nual Micro - Giochi di Luce

nual Micro - Giochi di Luce
Microen
gli
sh
nual
Micro
Version 5.X
1.6.2004
Contents
1 Introduction
3
1.1 General Information
3
1.2 General Comments
3
1.3 Specifications
4
1.4 Installation
4
1.5 Safety Requirements (Important, read carefully!)4
1.7 Layout and Controls Micro light
5
1.9 General Operation
6
1.10 Quick Reference
9
2Setup
12
2.1 Selecting and creating of fixturesanddimmers 12
2.2 Menü Full Access oder Live Access
13
2.3 DMX List
20
2.4 ATTRIBUTE SETUP
21
2.5 FIXTURE TYPES
23
2.7 Function Sets
26
2.8 Profiles
28
2.9 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration
31
2.10 DMX Output Window
35
2.11 Auto Create
35
2.12 Setup menu
37
2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS Menu
39
2.14 Setting Sound Signals
40
3 Creating a Show
43
3.1 CREATING A WINDOW
43
3.2 Storing VIEWS
45
3.3 Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS
46
3.7 Creating and calling up Presets
61
3.9 MAtricks
66
4 Cues and Sequences
68
4.1 Creating Cues (separate memories)
69
4.2 Programming Sequences
71
4.3 Editing Sequences
75
4.4 Editing Chasers
80
4.5 Updatings Cues
83
2
4.6 INFO - Fenster
84
85
5 Cues, Sequences and Chasers
5.1 ASSIGN menu
85
5.3 EXECUTOR Sheet
93
5.4 TRACKING Sheet
94
5.6 OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)
98
6 Effects
99
6.1 Effect Pool
99
6.2 Editing Effect Groups
100
6.3 Executing an Effect Group
103
6.4 Customizing an Effect Group
104
6.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu
106
6.8. Modulators INDEX
108
7 BITMAP Effects
11 0
7.1 Creating a Layout for a BITMAp Effect 110
7.2 Creating / Changing BitMap effects
113
7.3 Starting the Effect
115
8 Remote Control
116
8.1 Timecode
116
8.2 Remote Control via Touchboard
125
8.3 Remote Control by DMX IN
126
9 Macros und QUIKEYS
128
9.1 Creating Macros
128
9.2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS
130
10 Command line
132
10.1 Introduction
132
10.2 Command Overview
133
10.3 Command Reference
134
11 Saving and loading a SHOW
148
11.1 Saving the Current Show on harddisk 148
11.2 Loading a Show from the harddisk
149
11.3 Loading a empty Show
149
11.4 Deleting the current show
149
11.5 Deleting a Show from harddisk
149
11.6 Saving the Current Show on floppy disk149
11.7 Loading a Show from Floppy disk
150
11.8 Loading a Demo Show
150
11.10 PARTIAL SHOW READ
151
12 Update Software
153
13 Utility Menu
155
14.1 Introduction
156
14.2 General Instructions
156
14.3 Specification and Technical Data
156
15 Network connections
15.2 Preparing a Session
15.3 Creating a Session
15.7 Worlds (Welten)
159
159
161
163
Color Code
Index
164
170
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
1 Introduction
1 . 1 General Information
Combining an approved concept of operation, an outstanding product design and
first-class quality with a host of new ideas and the latest technology, this new
console offer ulitmate control on larger shows. The grangMA range combines the
best in mechanical design with a flexible and powerful software platform.
MA users will feel very familiar with Micro from the very beginning. The basic
operation modes, well known from the Scancommander have been well proven
in the field as powerful tools for the control of intelligent fixtures and many are
now the standard of the industry. Of course, there have been quite a few
improvements as controlling hundreds of channels requires intelligent solutions
to time consuming operations, but essentially, the Micro is still an MA console –
easy to operate, yet very powerful.
view of the vast variety of features and options available. Once you are familiar with the
basics, you will realise that you can easily try out new fuctions, as all procedures and
operational modes are clearly structured.
We are sure that you will enjoy working with the Micro and we wish your show every
success!
1 . 1 . 1 Displays
The first remarkable feature of the Micro is the contrast-rich, full color TFT touch
screen. It allows for clear and precise control along with multiple visual
represenations of group and preset operations, interactive output displays and
different ways of cue listing.
Colors and gobos can directly be selected by labeled preset keys and allow for a
fast and accurate control, while the encoders can be used anytime for fine
tuning. By way of presets, stored positions can quickly be adjusted to changed
arrangements.
1 . 1 . 3 Programming features and data input
At first, the flexibility of the Micro may surprise, but you have always the choice
to do it “the old fashion way”. Dealing with huge amounts of data will make you
want to use improved ways of programming and even an automatic effect
synthesizer.
1.1.4 Flexible Setup configuration
Because of the Micros’s flexibility, you will never lose direct access and control.
View Macro keys allow to visualise current information at anytime. User profiles
allow for differing window configurations to be recalled from previous shows to
talyor the console for the particular type of show, Live Event, theater,
Synchronised playback, nightclub, industrial, etc.
1 . 1 . 5 Hardware and Interfaces
The built-in flashdisk contains the board’s software and makes the Micro
independent from any external PC.
1 . 2 General Comments
This manual describes the possibilities that the Micro has in store for you. Step by
step, you will be guided through the logical aspects of working with this console.
You will soon find out, that operating the Micro is simple and straight forward in
Micro
Declaration of Conformity
according to directives 89/336 EWG and 92/3
1 EWG
92/31
Manufacturer’s name:
Manufacturer’s address:
MA Lighting Technology GmbH
Dachdeckerstraße 16
D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn
Germany
declares that the product
grandMA Micro
Name of product:
Type:
MA GM
complies with the following product specifications:
Safety:
EN60065, EN60950
EMV (EMC):
EN55103-1 (E1), EN50081-1
EN55103-2 (E2), EN50082-1
Additional information:
DMX512 and analogue inputs and outputs must be
shielded and the shielding must be connected to the earthing resp. to the housing of the
corresponding plug.
Dipl. Ing. Michael Adenau
3
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
1 . 3 Specifications
1 . 3 . 1 Capacities
1024 control parameters (HTP or LTP) with 8 or 16 bit resolution, (optional)
also available with 4096 channels (ultra-Light:1024)
Virtually unlimited number of presets, memories, cue lists and effects
1 . 3 . 2 Ergonomics
full colour TFT touch screen with a wide angle of view
encoders for display setting, 5 master encoders for data entry
10 faders
Trackball and mouse optional
1 . 3 . 3 General user functions
Constant access to single units or groups
Fixture library with updates supplied via the Internet
Selective programming for free combination of memories and effects
Free switching between stage-orientated movements and DMX control in
combination with 3-D.
1 . 3 . 4 Hardware
CF and 3,5“ Floppy Drive
Protection against radio interference (CE-Norm)
Inputs: MIDI, Sound, Remote Go, SMPTE, Analogue (+10 V), DMX 512
Output: 2 Times DMX 512, MIDI, Printer, Ethernet
1 . 3 . 5 Dimensions and Weight
1 . 5 Safety Requirements (Important, read
carefully!)
1 . 5 . 1 Touchscreen
Never use any sharp items when operating the touchscreen! Deep scratches will
damage the screen. During operation, due to temperature fluctuations, the calibration
2.12
of the touchscreens may change, so an adjustment may be necessary.
Settings in the Setup Menu (point 1)
1 . 5 . 2 Sockets for keyboard and mouse
These sockets are located on the rear of the unit and are very delicate; especially
during transport, take care that these parts are not exposed to mechanic stress.
1 . 5 . 3 Transportation/Case
During transport, take care that the touchscreens are not exposed to mechanical
stress. Flightcases not provided by MA Lighting have to be designed in a way that
under no circumstances pressure can be exerted on the TFT displays.
1 . 5 . 7 Housing
– Do not block or cover the ventilation. If there is a high ambient temperature, the
display pannel (grandMA only) should be at least 5 cm open to ensure sufficient
ventilation.
– Do not place any drinks on the unit.
– Do not use excessive force when adjusting the viewing angle of the display panel
(grandMA only).
grandMA MICRO :
Width 482mm, height 146mm, depth 438mm
Weight 9.0 kg without flightcase
1 . 4 Installation
90–230 Volt, 40–60 Hz via Euro plug. No switching of voltage necessary.
DMX output: Complies with USITT DMX 512 (1990) protocol. The output is optoinsulated and exceeding RS 485 or RS 422. The pins in the 5 pin XLR plug are:
Pin 1: ground, Pin 2: Data–, Pin 3: Data+ (pins 4 and 5: not used)
4
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Layout and Controls Micro
1
2
4
3
5
6
13
14
17
15
8
9
10 12
11
18
Power switch
3
Grand Master for Dimmer
channels
4
5
6
19
An additional external keyboard, a mouse and an Trackerballhowever, can be
connected on the rear of the unit.
NOTE: an external keyboard has to be installed, when a
mouse will be used!
20
Blackout key for Dimmer
channels
8
13
Encoders – To set the attribute
values such as Gobo, Pan/Tilt, times
etc.
14
Keys – To directly process Go+,
Go– etc. for any Executor, or to
lock Executors
Page change-over – For
Channel faders, Executor faders
and Executor keys
TFT Display touch screen
Vie
w / Macro keys
View
Encoder for moving / scrolling the
respective window contents
.
9
16
Micro
21
1
2
Background key - If on the TFT
display, Views are being overlayed
by a menu (ASSIGN, EDIT, ….), you
can use this key to bring up or hide
the menu.
Keyboard key to bring up the
Soft Keyboard on the TFT display.
10
11
MA key - without function
12
Manual Time Setting for
Presets
15
16
Playback buttons – Can be
defined as Go+, Go-, Pause, Flash
etc.
17
Executor faders – Can be
defined as Master, Swap Master,
X-Fader etc
18
List keys
Faders: will bring up small
Executor windows
for the EXECUTOR
FADERS.
Buttons: will bring up small
Executor windows
for the EXECUTOR
BUTTONS.
19
Executor buttons can also be
defined as e.g. Go, Go-, Pause,
Flash, etc..
20
Manual setting of times for
Executor buttons
21
Socket for console lamp
12V/5W
COMMAND key to bring up the
Command menu
5
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
1.9 General Operation
Touch screen
– Keys can directly be selected.
– In charts, individual cells can be selected. By using the Lasso function on the touch screen, you can also select
several cells.
– You can simultaneously select individual, but also several Fixtures or Channels by clicking and dragging with the
mouse on touch screen.
– Directly activating title bars of windows or opening options for the individual window by touching the corner icon.
Encoder on the right of the Display
– In the active window, the focus (coloured frame) or a highlighted cell (red/blue background) can be moved
upwards or downwards. By pressing the Encoder when turning it, you can move the focus to the left or to the right.
– If a pulldown menu is opened, you can use the Encoder to scroll through the list. When you reach the desired
value, you can select it by a pressing the Encoder.
– If in a chart, a cell is selected with a value or a time, you can open an entry window by pressing the Encoder. In this
window, you can also use the Encoder to adjust the value, pressing the Encoder again will accept the new value.
– If a Fixture or a Channel is selected (coloured frame), you can open the options by shortly pressing the Encoder.
Encoder below the TFT Display
The currently chosen function is displayed above the appropriate Encoder.
The currently set value for the last activated lamp is displayed below the respective function. The values displayed
(percent, decimal, ...) do always refer to the active window (e.g.: Fixture- or Channel-Sheet).
Use the encoder to modify the values of this function. If you press the Encoder while turning it, you can modify its
2.13 item 6).
sensitivity (default setting
- By pressing the respective button, you can select the next function (in this case Gobo1). Pressing on the arrow will
open a menu in which all functions are displayed and can be selected directly.
- Pressing on “Align Off“ allows you to select the individual Align functions. Pressing on the arrow will open a menu
in which the respective function can be selected directly.
- Default setting is “Values“; by pressing the button shortly, you can switch to “Fades“ and, pressing the button
again, to “Delays“. Pressing on the arrow will open a menu in which the respective function can be selected
directly.
Micro Soft- (TOUCH) Keyboard
– Views, Groups, Presets, Sequences, Effect groups, Forms or Macros can directly be named within the respective
pool.
– Cue names can be adjusted in the EDIT menu, in the Tracking or EXECUTOR Sheet.
6
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Mouse or Trackball
An external keyboard has to be installed, when a mouse will be used!
The most effective way of working with the Micro is to use the touchscreen and the encoders which are located next
to the display. The only means to change the size of windows, work within the Tracking Sheet or edit forms , though,
is the mouse (or the Trackball, if the mouse function is on).
With the left key:
– Keys can directly be selected,
– Individual cells in charts can be selected,
– Several cells in charts can be selected simultaneously by clicking, holding and dragging them,
– Fixtures or Channels can be selected,
– Title bars of windows can be activated or options for the individual window can directly be called up.
With the middle key:
– The values of selected Fixtures or Channels can be adjusted.
With the right key:
– The options for this window can be opened by clicking on the title bar,
– The options can be opened by clicking on an individual Fixture or Channel.
Entry window/Calculator
Open by pressing on one of the 4 Encoders below the display or clicking on the Buttons above the Encoders.
Or:
Click into a cell (indicated by the Focus - colored frame and/or blue background) and press on the Encoder on the right
side of the display.
In this window, you can enter values or times and recalculate them.
Presets can be called up for the selected Fixtures or Channels.
If in the Executor Sheet or in the EDIT menu, a trigger call or time is selected, you can open this window by pressing
the Encoder on the right side of the Display.
If Fixtures or Channels are selected, this window can be opened by pressing the respective keys for this function above
the Encoder.
The title bar of this window will display the selected function. In the upper cell, the current value will be displayed.
Using the touch screen, the number pad or turning the encoder on the right of the display you can enter a different
value or time, and accept it by pressing the OK key.
Left of the numbers, the following keys are displayed: H (for hours), M (for minutes), S (for seconds) and F (for frames).
With these keys, you can directly enter times, if necessary.
or:
If a function is selected, keys for Clear, Deactivate and the individual presets are displayed in the lower part. If you
press CLEAR, the values of the selected Fixtures or Channels will be deleted. If you press DEACTIVATE, the active
values of the selected Fixtures or Channels will be deleted.
If you select a Preset, it will be displayed in the upper bar, and you can select it pressing the OK key.
Micro
7
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
SOFT (TOUCH) Keyboard
On the Micro you can call it up by pressing the KEYBOARD key.
In the upper left cell, the entered text will be displayed.
Using the touch screen, you can select individual keys.
Pressing RETURN will accept your entry.
COMMAND WINDOW
On the MICRO, you’ll find a dedicated COMMAND button. This window contains the most important buttons, here
displayed as Softkeys..
8
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
1.1
0Quick Reference
10
After many years of experience we have lost our illusions about any user to be willing to read an entire manual
before playing with a new toy. But here are some tips which may help you to find your way around.
1.1
0.1 Basics
1.10.1
The Micro is a highly specialised computer. Many functions will work as you are used to from your PC or MAC.
Main supply: 90–230V
The mouse or trackball on the Micro:
– Left click selects a field for keyboard or encoder input, etc.
– Right click goes to Modify (opens windows with options, sorting columns by clicking on the headline...)
– Pressing and holding the middle mouse key changes output values (Hold and Move)
The displays (select one by a click into empty space)
The Micro offers different windows: Menus with information and control keys, spreadsheets, key groups, dimmer
channel listings and fader symbols
– Clicking and dragging using the left mouse key on the headline moves a window, you can alter the size by clicking
and dragging the left and bottom edges.
– Right clicking with the mouse on the headline of a window opens options menu for that window.
Spreadsheets (comparable to those used in Excel or Access):
– Click and drag with the left mouse key and you can select a range of cells (not on all screens possible)
– Left click on a column headline will resize or move the column
– Right click on a column headline will sort by this column
Emergency help: Like any computer, the Micro may crash. To resolve a crash:
1. Perform a reset by Power Off / ON.
Only if this doesn’t help:
2. During the booting use „Delete ActShow“ to delete the current Show. 13 Utility Menu
In case of any further problem, please feel free to contact your dealer or our HOTLINE +49-5251-688865-99.
1.1
0.2 Setup and start
1.10.2
The easiest way is to use the BACKUP key and load a demo-show or start show. Alternatively:
1. SETUP key: Will allow you to select and patch the number of dimmers and fixtures, create presets, groups and
effects.
2. Right click or touch in any empty display:
– creates, moves and resizes a FADER or CHANNEL window for dimmer control and FIXTURE, GROUP and different
Preset windows (PAN/TILT, GOBO...) for fixtures.
1.1
0.3 Direct access
1.10.3
The Micro offers many different ways of controlling dimmer values and fixture attributes. For speed, we give you
only one example for each of them.
Setting values for dimmers:
CHANNEL FADER “–“ or “+“ key toggles the motorised faders to control single dimmer channels.
– “+“ and “–“ scrolls in blocks of 10 dimmers.
Micro
9
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
TIPP
– The set fader values are shown in the dimmer display.
Channels can also be selected and modified by the mouse, wheel, encoder and the keypad.
With the LINK function (right on top of channel and fader sheets), the window will automatically scroll to show the
channels set for the faders.
Controlling Fixture attributes:
GROUP window
Select a fixture by its key (or click on the name of a fixture in the fixture sheet).
GOBO, COLOUR ... window
Open a preset for the selected unit (if no presets are displayed, run the selected function via an encoder).
Pressing and turning the encoder allows for fine tuning
.
1.1
0.4 Storing Settings
1.10.4
If the STORE key is flashing, you can switch it off with a second press or use ESCAPE.
Example: Select some fixtures and set the color wheel
– STORE + one of the buttons above or below an EXECUTOR fader (make sure you have toggled back from
CHANNEL to EXECUTOR): Stores the color setting as a cue on that Executor.
– STORE + one of the buttons of an EXECUTOR fader, where a cue was already stored, gives you the option to
overwrite, merge information or create a second cue. 1.10.7 CREATE LIST
– STORE + a cell in the GROUP window: Stores the chosen Fixtures as a new group (enter a name via keyboard)
– STORE + any cell in the preset COLOUR window: Stores the values as a color preset (enter name via keyboard)
– STORE + one of the VIEW keys on the right hand side of the displays: Stores the layout of the screen, the mouse
position, etc. as a view (enter a name ...)
TIPP
With STORE + VIEW key you can store screens individually or all console wide.
In the ASSIGN menu, you can enter names sequences of cues.
1.1
0.5 Selecting and activating channels
1.10.5
channels,, fixtures and functions
Selecting and Activating have different meanings and are important terms and concepts when working with the
Micro.
Selected fixtures or channels are what you are currently working with, you can tell what is selected by their
names in fixture / channel sheet being yellow. Active values determine which channels and parameters are to
be stored in the next cue and will be controlled by this cue later on. Values with a dark red backround will be
stored in the next cue, values with a bright red background are currently under your control and will also be
stored in the next cue. Channels not active when the cue is stored will not be affected by the playingback of this
cue. Selected fixtures or channels are automatically deselected if a setting was altered and new fixtures selected
(a single press of the CLEAR key will do the same).
10
Changing the selection:
– Any channel or function, being controlled in Direct Access mode, is automatically marked as selected.
– Pressing the CLEAR key several times, deletes the whole selection.
1st CLEAR: deselects – 2nd CLEAR: deactivates– 3rd CLEAR: deletes all values set by direct access and returns the
values to their defaults or to being controlled by playback.
– Selecting a channel, fixture or function multiple times can be used to modify an activation
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
1st selects – 2nd activates all parameters – 3rd deactivates all parameters
By holding the STORE key and selecting ALL, the activation will be ignored and the complete console output stored
as a cue.
1.1
0.6 Timing – Fade times (FADE) and Delays (DELA
Y)
1.10.6
(DELAY)
The Micro offers two different ways of storing time settings for a cue:
1. BASIC X-FADE and SNAP DELAY
With STORE, a basic fade time can be set for all typical fader channels, whereas SNAP DELAY will only work for
channels marked as snap channels in the Patch menu.
2. TIME key for individual durations per channel
With TIME, the status windows can be switched to the FADE or DELAY layer, where individual fade and delay times
can be set for each channel. These durations will be stored in the cues and will overrule any basic duration.
1.1
0.7 CREA
TE LIST
1.10.7
CREATE
When storing a cue to an Executor already containing a cue, the grandMA offers the option to create a second cue
and start a cue list, which may be replayed as a Chaser or sequence later on.
In the ASSIGN menu, you can preset the Cue list as tracking or non-tracking, respectively.
TRACKING CUELIST (typically for moving light control or theatre applications):
When working with a tracking cuelist it only makes sense to store values that have changed. On playback, the
grandMA will hold a parameters value until it is given a new value by subsequent cues.
NON-TRACKING CUELIST
With a non tracking cuelist, all values to be playback have to be stored in each respective cue, as all values not
stored within a cue, will be switched off (“0” or default).
1.1
0.8 Playback buttons and faders
1.10.8
– The faders allow to work on different pages simultaneously. With OFF, playback of cues loaded onto executors
can be stopped.
– With the ASSIGN + EXECUTOR buttons, you can define, which sequences with which functions are to be
playbacked on executors.
– The 12 function keys can be used for any Playback (OFF - EXECUTOR1).
TIPP
Micro
To call up a cue with a fader, it has to be activated via GO+, TOP or ON.
Watch out for the GRANDMASTER - or simply switch it off in the Setup menu.
11
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2
Setup
2.1 Selecting, patching, creating and editing of fixtures and
dimmers, Stage Setup
press SETUP
Full Access
In the Full Access menu, you can define the number of Scanner and Dimmer channels and assign DMX
addresses. Furthermore, the stage can be adapted and Scanners and Dimmers be positioned accordingly.
Only in the Full Access menu can you modify the complete Show. If using the console in the Multi User mode,
you can access this menu only from a console.
2.2 All Access
When adapting a Show, a copy will be used; the modifications will only be available when they are saved.
Live Access
There are certain limitations when it comes to modifying a Show. These modifications will be executed
immediately. In the Multi User mode, the Show data can be adapted by multiple users simultaneously. In the Live
Access menu, you can e.g. assign DMX addresses. Furthermore, the stage can be adapted and Scanners and Dimmers be positioned accordingly. Additionally, adaptations can be made in the Attribute Setup.
It is not possible, to sign on or delete new lamps in the Show.
The PDA remote control does have the status of Live Access only.
Auto Create
In this menu, you can e.g. have presets automatically created for all your fixtures and dimmers, as long as those
presets are already contained in the internal library. Premade Effects and Groups for each Fixture or Dimmer
channel can also be created. 2.11 Creating presets, effects and groups automatically
12
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
2.2 Menü Full Access oder Live Access
press Fixture Layer
Here, you can create Scanner and Dimmer groups.
These groups can be modified later without any problems, e.g.: increase number, change the lamp type etc.
Additionally, you have an overview over the number of all signed-on lamps and their ID numbers for Channel and
Fixture.e.
2.2.1 Creating groups with Scanners/Dimmers (Fixture Layer)
Press the “Add Line“ key (Fixture Layer must be active, i.e. header dark blue).
A window will open, where you can enter a name for the group and must confirm this action.
Now, the “Create New Fixtures or Channels“ window will open. When opened for the first time, only “From Library“
will be displayed here and is already selected (indicated by its blue background).
When selecting “From Library“, the library window will open:
By turning the Encoder, you can only choose a lamp type (blue bar).
Pressing the Encoder will accept the chosen lamp type and close the window.
- To load a lamp type from floppy, press the “Floppy“ button. Now, the Scanners present on the floppy will be
displayed and can be selected and loaded.
For conveniently localizing scanners (fixtures), the list can be sorted by name, manufacturer or date. Example: Sort
alphabetically: Make a right mouse click on NAME. Clicking once will sort the list A–Z, on the second click Z–A.
or:
You can use a search filter: Select the manufacturer column on the side of “Filter“, and enter the first character of
a manufacturer. Now, only the models produced by this manufacturer will be displayed.t.
On www.ma-share.net , you will find a forum to setup and download self-created or altered Fixtures.
Micro
Channel Start Id:
Here, you can set the first ID number of the Dimmers. These are then displayed in the Channel and Fader
Sheet. The Dimmer channel of Scanners could also be used in the Channel and Fader Sheet. In order to do so, you
would have to assign “Channel-IDs“ for the Scanners first.
Fixture Start Id:
Here, you can set the first ID for the Scanners. These are then displayed in the Fixture Sheet.
Dimmer channels can also be used in the Fixture Sheet. In order to do so, you would have to assign “Fixture IDs“
for the Dimmer channels first. .
Qty (Quantity):
Finally, you have to set the number of selected fixtures under „Quantity“ (numeric keypad or keyboard
Autopatch:
displays the next available DMX-channel; in position ON this channel will be used after presing CREATE; in
position OFF (default) any other available channel can be used 2.2.2
Pressing “Create !“ will accept the settings for generating fixtures later on.
13
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2.2.2 PPatching
atching Scanners/Dimmers
In The lower part of the window shows the Scanners/Dimmers of the selected
Select a fixture in the “Patch“ column (blue background).
If all fixtures of these “Fixture Layers“ are to be patched one after the other, you can select all of them together by
clicking on the column title (in this case PATCH). Now, all fixtures are displayed on a blue background.
Pressing the Encoder will open this menu:
Below “Direct Patch“, the first free
DMX channel is displayed.
First, you have to set the DMX output (e.g.: A, B), then the (first) DMX channel.
Finally, press the “Patch!“ key. That’s all.
or:
All free channels are displayed in the right column. By turning the Encoder, all invisible channels can be displayed
and selected. Pressing the Encoder will accept the channel.
If the TEST OUTPUT button is pressed (green background), the selected DMX output channel is set to 100%. This
accelerates the localizing of a patched channel in the stage setup.
Now, the selected and patched fixtures can bei positioned in a 3D stage display.
Leave menu with X .
press Save to save the modified settings
Don´t Save will discard the modifications
with Cancel you stay in this menu.
2.2.3 PPosition
osition of fixtures
14
In the upper right part of the window, you’ll find a simplified representation of the stage that can be used to
position the fixtures. Settings will also be taken over onto the grandMA 3D.
If this part of the window is active (title bar “Stage“ is displayed in dark blue), you can modify the stage view by
turning or turning plus simultaneously pressing the Encoder.
Setting the stage size
In the geometrical system of the Micro (Stage window) or in the grandMA 3D, you can position objects in the
three-dimensional space.
It is modelled on the geometrical system used in architecture: The X/Y level is defined as base area (stage) and the
height as Z axis.
To adjust the stage size, press the “Stage Setup“ button.
The following window will open:
Click on the values you want to change. A small dialogue window will open, in which you can adjust the size.
The values do always refer the center of the stage.
By just turning or turning and simultaneously pressing the Encoder, you can modify the Stage views.
Setting the Matrix Layout:
Here, you can create a right-angle matrix for the first Fixture Layer. The
Set the number of columns and rows using COLS and ROWS (a touch on the cell will open the Calculator).
Set the distance between indiviual fixtures with Width and Height (a touch on the cell will open the Calculator).
Use MAKE to arrange the fixtures in the Stage view
By pressing the “X“ key, you can leave the menu
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
press Stage Setup .
Click on the values and enter a value in the entry window. (the values do always refer to the centre of the stage)
By turning or turning and simultaneously pressing the Encoder, you can change the stage views.
Close menu with X .
Positioning fixtures:
You can only set the specific group selected in the Fixture Layer – it is not possible to select fixtures from the small
Stage window. To gain a better control, click on the small STAGE window (title bar turns dark blue) and change the
stage view using the Encoder right of the Display (turn or turn and press the Encoder).
in the FIXTURE LAYER, select the fixture type
in the FIXTURES AND CHANNELS IN LAYER, select one or more fixtures
set the positions and targets of the fixtures using the 3 Encoders (shift linear on the x, y, and z axis, or
rotation around the x, y, and z axis) – check out results in the STAGE window. The values set will be displayed in
the back part of the table. Press and simultaneously turn the Encoder (right of the Display), to change the table
view. Turn it, until the columns for Position X, Y, Z and Rotation X°, Y°, Z° are displayed.
or
highlight a value directly
press on the right Encoder
enter the value using the Calculator
confirm with ENTER
Shift linear (S/Gs have no importance)
select one or more fixtures
select the Linear icon
select the space-axis icon
shift the fixtures along the space axes using the Encoder
Shift linear tilted (S/Gs have no importance)
Only for rotated fixtures; if the fixtures were not rotated before, this function is equal to the one described above
select one or more fixtures
select the Linear icon
select the Axis icon
shift the fixtures along the fixtures’ axes using the Encoder
Micro
15
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Rotation S(ingle):
select one or more fixtures
select the Circle icon
select the „S“
rotate each single lamp by turning the encoder
Rotation G(roup):
select multiple fixtures
select the Circle icon
select the „G“
rotate the fixtures „in traverse“ around their virtual traverse using the Encoder
Press „X“ to leave the menu.
Press „Save“ to save the settings.
Press „Don’t Save“ to discard the settings.
Press „Cancel“ to stay in this menu.
The „ALIGN“ function will be of great help and save you quite some time.
2.2.4 Adjusting the Fixture Layer
Fixture Layer must be active: By shortly clicking on the title bar, it will be displayed in dark blue
Select group of Fixtures (Layer).
Add Line: A new group can be inserted in front of the selected group. Proceed like indicated 3 pages earlier:
Creating groups with Scanners/Dimmers.
Delete Line: The selected group is deleted. All fixtures with all settings in this group are deleted..
Moves Lines: The selected group can be moved to another position in the table. If the “Moves Lines“ button was
used, this will be displayed in red. By selecting a new position in the table, the group will be moved..
16
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
2.2.5 Adjusting individual fixture groups
Select a group in the “Fixture Layer“; this will now be displayed below:
Adding identical fixtures
Select “New“ (dark blue) and shortly press the Encoder (right to the Display). The “Create New Fixtures or
Channels“ window will open. In this window, all types of fixtures are displayed that are already present in this
show.
Select the type of fixture by turning the Encoder. Proceed like indicated, 3 pages earlier: Creating, patching
and positioning groups with Scanners/Dimmers.
Adding new fixtures
Select “New“ (dark blue) and shortly press the Encoder (right to the Display).
The “Create New Fixtures or Channels“ window will open.
Now, choose “From Library“. Proceed as indicated 3 pages earlier: Creating, patching and positioning groups
with Scanners/Dimmers.
Exchanging fixtures
Select the fixtures to be exchanged in the “Type“ column (dark blue). You can also select several or all
fixtures..
Shortly press the Encoder (right to the Display). The “Choose Fixturetype“ window will open.
Select a fixture that was already present in the show by turning the Encoder, and accept it by shortly
pressing on the Encoder. The fixture still has to be patched.
or:
Select “From Library“ for a new fixture, and shortly press on the Encoder. Proceed as indicated 3 pages
earlier: Creating, patching and positioning groups with Scanners/Dimmers.
Multipatch (assigning one DMX channel for multiple fixtures/dimmers)
Makes sense, if several fixtures are always to be triggered at the same time (but cannot be dimmed individually).
To do so, you make a arbitrary number of „copies“ of a fixture.
select the fixture that you want to „copy“
press Create Multipatch
in the entry window, enter the number of fixtures to be triggered by the same DMX channel
Micro
In the fixtures list, you will now find the copies below the fixture. In the TYPE column, you will find „Multipatch
Dummies“ for the copies. And you can position the fixtures, to use them in the Stage window or on the grandMA
3D.
Note: After a Multipatch, you’ll find no DMX addresses for the dummies, as these will automatically be given the
same DMX address, name and ID as the original fixture.
It is not possible, to enter the same address for different fixtures in the Layer Sheet. In the fixtures’ Settings
menu, the same addresses have also to be entered (see manual of the fixture manufacturer).
TIP: If you want to multipatch fixtures with different addresses (set on the fixture itself), you can enter these
after the Multipatch in the Layer Sheet (of course only, if not used by other fixtures)
17
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Inserting, deleting or moving fixtures
Select Fixture Layer.
Select a fixture. Pressing one of the buttons will have the following effects:
Add Line:
Inserts a new fixture in front of the selected fixture.
Delete Line:
Deletes the selected fixture. And all settings for this fixtures are deleted, too..
Moves Lines:
Moves the selected fixtures to another position in the table. If using the “Moves Lines“ key,
this key will be displayed in red. By selecting a new position in the table, the fixture will be
moved to that new position..
Assigning fixture names
Click on the fixture’s name, enter a name directly, and confirm with Enter.
If a space and a number is added an automaticly enumerate of the names is made.
TIPP
TIPP
Adjusting ID Cha and Fix
Select one or more cells under ID Cha or Fix and press the Encoder. A window will open, in which you can
enter the IDs that will then be accepted, when Enter is pressed. Pressing “None“ will delete them. Please
avoid any overlappings.
Switching the Master (GRANDMASTER FADER) off:
Select one or more cells under Master and press the Encoder.
Now, select “No“ and press the Encoder one more time. If GRANDMASTER FADER is switched off, this will be
indicated by a “No“ in the respective cell.
Func. Pan / Func. Tilt
Select one or more cells under “Func.. Pan“ or “Func. Tilt“ and press the Encoder. Now, select “Invert“ and
press the Encoder one more time. If a function is inverted, this will be indicated by a “Invert“ in in the
respective cell.
DMX Pan / DMX Tilt
Here you can invert the DMX - signals for Pan and Tilt functions - the signals are only inverted in the DMX -Output, not for the visualizer; this means, that movements in the visualizer and on stange will differ.
Select one or more cells under “DMX.. Pan“ or “DMX. Tilt“ and press the Encoder. Now, select “Invert“ and press
the Encoder one more time. If a function is inverted, this will be indicated by a “Invert“ in in the respective cel
Changing from PAN to TILT and vice versa
Select one or more cells under “Swap“ and press the Encoder. Now, select “Yes“ and press the Encoder one more
time. If PAN and TILT are changed, this will be indicated by a “Yes“ in in the respective cell.
This is where the useful „PAN/TILT trackball orientation“ can be set.
This can only be done in the Live Access menu.Check it out! Select a fixture, press HIGHLIGHT and let the Trackball „run“. Modifications will only be available after they have been saved. In cases like these, the HIGHLIGHT key,
among others, is very useful; if you keep the key pressed, selected lamps flashes for better identification.
18
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Assigning colors for Dimmer channels
In the STAGE window or for the grandMA 3D, this is where colors can be assigned for the individual Dimmer
channels (color filter foils).
Select one or more cells under “Color“ and press the Encoder.
The Change Color menu will open.
In this menu, you can choose between different color tables (Lee, Rosco, etc.). Above each color, the currently
selected color table is displayed (here “Standard“).
By shortly pressing the key, you can switch to another color table. Pressing the arrow will open a menu, in
which all tables are displayed and can be selected directly.
Having decided for an individual table, you can choose a color using the Encoder and accept it by pressing the
Encoder once. If a color has been assigned, this will be displayed in the respective cell..
Close menu with X..
RGB-Lamps and LED-Beamer without dimmer
For this types of lamps Micro can create an virtual dimmer.This means, that the software simulates the dimmer
function.The user only has to choose this function and can operate these lamps as any other dimmer-type lamp.
2.2
Sign on the new lamp in FULL ACCESS
If no lamp of this type is in the library, create your own lamp
2.6
In CHANNELS of FIXTURE TYPES create 3 channels with attribut COLORMIX and switch the column INV to YES.
Create another channel with attribute DIM and select Virtual in the SELECT ATRIBUTE menu. Confirm with OK.
In the Fixture Sheet the dimmer channel and the 3 colour channels are displayed and can be operated, although
only 3 DMX-channels are covered; the virtual dimmer channel does not cover an own physical channel.
If other channels than Colormix 1-3 should be affected b y the dimmer, set collumn REACT on DIMMER to
linear or invers.
Micro
19
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2 . 3 DMX List -Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current
Show
Press the PATCH SHEETS key in the Full or Live Access menu to activate this menu.
This menu will only display the actually patched channels. All changes made here will only affect the current
show!
individual, addressed DMX channel.
- This column will show the individual
- Will show the ID for Channel and Fixture. The IDs can be changed without affecting the show, e.g. for a better
display on the Fixture Sheet.
- The name of fixtures and dimmer channels assigned to the individual DMX channels.
- The functions of the individual DMX channels.
- In this column, a profile can be assigned to this channel. 2.8 Creating, Assigning and Deleting Profiles
- Within this column, the respective DMX channel can be inverted. A click into the cell will activate this
function. Press the Encoder (right to the Display). Select Yes for „Inverted“, No for „not inverted“ or Original
(Library setting will be used) and accept them by pressing the Encoder one more time. An inverted channel will
be indicated by a YES in the respective cell. These inverted channels are not used for the visualizer; this
means, that movements in the visualizer and on stange will differ.
- DEFAULT: This value will be output if no CUE, Sequence, Preset or Direct Access addresses the fixture or
dimmer channel.
This setting can be used for PAN/TILT so that a moving light can start being manipulated from a sensible and
optimum position. You can change values by selecting the cell and adjust it by using the right Encoder (below
the Display). These values can be set by selecting the respective cell with a click. n.
- The HIGHLIGHT function is used to temporarly override a fixtures current settings making it easier to see on
stage and speed up the procedure of programming positions of the selected fixtures. The HIGHLIGHT values for
individual DMX channels can be set by selecting the respective cell with a click. A value can then be entered
within the activated window. You can adjust the value by using the second Encoder (below the Display).
- STAGE (not yet available in version)
- SNAP: New values for this channel will ignore cue timing and will execute in 0 seconds. Activate by a click on
the cell. Press the Encoder (right of the Display). Select Yes for SNAP or No for FADE and accept by pressing the
Encoder one more time. A YES in the respective cell will indicate that SNAP has been chosen for this channel.
The default for all DMX channels is to follow cue timing.
- FADE: A value can be changed slowly (channel can fade).
This is only a pre-setting for each individual channel and can easily be changed during programming, if needed.
Fixture or Channel PPatch
atch menu
In both of these menus you can patch fixtures. And you can define standard settings for each fixtur
press SETUP
press FULL ACCES
20
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
press PATCH SHEET
press FIXTURE PATCH or CHANNEL PATCH
Listing of individual functions
DMX: Shows the patched channel. If this is to be adjusted, click into the cell and rotate the Display Encoder. The
2.2.2 Patching Scanners/Dimmers
Fixtures to Patch menu will open.
NoMaster: If a cell contains a No here, the function of the Grandmaster-Faders is not active for this fixture.
2.2.5 Switching the Master (GRANDMASTER FADER) off (one page earlier).
Pan/Tilt/Swap: If a cell contains a Yes here, the function will be inverted or completely exchanged. 2.2.5
Inverting or changing PAN or TILT.
2.4 Adjustments in the ATTRIBUTE SETUP menu
In the „Attribute Setup” menu, you can change the names of Preset and Features Groups. Furthermore, you can
create or adapt new Features Groups. Furthermore, you can define, which attributes will be activated together or
individually.
But first a short explanation about the differences between Presets, Features and Attributes:
Attribute: Attributes are individual functions of Fixtures like Gobo1, Focus, Iris, Pan, Tilt ...
Feature: Features are groups, in which several Attributes are combined. In the Fixture Sheet, the first line will
display all Features available. Below the individual Features, the respective Attributes are displayed.
Presets: In a preset, the value of one or more Attributes can be stored. Presets are divided in different Preset Groups
(Gobo, Colour, …).Features are allocated to the individual Preset Groups.
By pressing a FEATURE key with the function (in this case, Dimmer), you can select the different Feature Groups
for the Preset Group selected to change the individual Attributes using the Encoder.
Here, the individual Attributes are displayed that can be changed with the respective Encoder.
2.4.1 Preset, Feature and Attribute Setup
Attention! This menu is important and can influence all of your programming!
press Full- or Live Access
open Attribute Setup
The number of Preset groups is fix and cannot be modified. Furthermore, the names displayed in red can’t either be
changed or deleted.
Changing the names of Preset groups, Features and Attributes
Click on a name, change it using the keyboard, and confirm with Enter. The modifications will only be executed
and saved after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the SAVE button.
The new name will now be displayed in the respective Preset window or in the Fixture window.
Micro
21
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Creating an additional Feature in a Preset group
When creating new scanners or adjusting of present ones, you possibly need additional Features and Attributes.
Select a Preset group.
Click into the empty cell below the present Features. Enter a name for the new Feature using the keyboard (e.g.:
Gobo 4) and confirm with Enter. The same name is automatically taken over and will be displayed in the Fixture
window on the right side. If you want to use a different name, change it as indicated further above.
Now, you still have to create Attributes for this Feature.
Click into the first cell below the name. Enter a name using the keyboard (e.g.: Gobo 4) and confirm with Enter. The
same name is automatically taken over and will be displayed in the Fixture window on the right side. If you want to
use a different name, change it as indicated further above. To create further Attributes, go to the next free cell and
proceed as you did for the first Attribute..
Adding additional Attributes to a Feature
Select a Preset group and then an Feature.
Click into the free cell below the available Attributes.
Enter a name for the new Attribute using the keyboard (e.g.: Gobo 4) and confirm with Enter. The same name is
automatically taken over and will be displayed in the Fixture window on the right side. If you want to use a different
name, change it as indicated further above.
Inserting, deleting or moving Features or Attributes
Select a Feature or Attribute (blue background). Pressing the buttons below will have the indicated results:
Add Line will add a new Feature or Attribute in front of the selected one.
Delete Line will delete the selected Feature or Attribute. Only self-created Features or Attributes can be deleted.
Moves Lines will move the selected Feature or Attribute to another place in the table. The different ways to move
Features or Attributes will be explained in the two following items.
Moving a Feature to another Preset group
Click on a Feature, e.g.: Gobo1.
Press the Moves Lines button, will be displayed in red.
Select a Preset group, to which the Feature is to be moved.
Select the position in the Features table by clicking on it. The Feature will now be displayed in this Preset group.
Some Features cannot be moved (e.g.: Color Mix). This is indicated by the words “Fixed Attributes“ in the table on
the right of the respective Feature.
The changes will take effect and wiil be saved only after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the
SAVE button.
Moving Attributes to another Feature or Preset group
Click on an Attribute, e.g.: Shutter.
Press the Moves Lines button, will be displayed in red.
Select a Preset group, to which the Attribute is to be moved, e.g.: Control.
Then, select a Feature, to which the Attribute is to be moved, e.g.: Control.
22
Select the position in the Attributes table by clicking on it. In this Preset group, the Attribute will now be moved into
this Feature
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Some Attributes cannot be moved (e.g.: Color Mix1). This is indicated by the word “Unmoveable“ in the table on the
right of the respective Attribute.
The changes will take effect and will be saved only after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the
SAVE button.
2.4.2 Encoder (Activation) Grouping
All settings within this menu will affect the storing of Cues, Presets and creating of Presets (Create Preset menu).
Attention! This menu is important and can influence all of your programming!
Call up this menu by pressing the „Encoder (Attribute) Grouping” key in the Preset and Feature Assignment.
The Attributes combined in a group will be activated and stored when they are changed (e.g. Pan and Tilt).
In the Attribute Setup menu (see 2 pages earlier), open this menu by pressing the Encoder Grouping button.
By selecting a group, the appropriate Attributes will be displayed in the table on the lower left side.
- Pressing the „Add Group“ key will create a new group.
In order to delete a group, this group has to be selected first. Now, press the „Delete Group“ key. The group will be
deleted, the Attributes will automatically be added to the Free Attributes.
- In this column, the Attributes of the selected group will be displayed. By selecting an Attribute, this will be
removedfrom this group and added to the Free Attributes.
- In order to assign Free Attributes to another group, this group has to be selected first. Selecting the Attribute will
add it to the currently selected group.
- By pressing the „Default“ key, all groups except 3 will be deleted. Almost all Attributes will be displayed as Free
Attributes in the right column. In the remaining 3 groups, the fixed Attributes (Pan/Tilt, Col.Mix1-4 and Blade1A4B) are allocated. These Attributes can not be moved into other groups (indicated by “fix” next the Attribute’s
name).
The changes will take effect and will be saved only after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the
SAVE button.
2 . 5 Modifying Scanners (FIXTURE TYPES)
In the Full Access menu, open this menu by pressing the Fixture Types button.
The upper part of the Display shows all fixtures that are currently used in the Show.
Micro
- No: Numerical of the individual fixtures currently signed-on in this Show. If this number is displayed in red and with
an asterisk, this fixture has been modified..
- Qty: Number of fixtures of this type.
- Name: Name of the fixture from the Library. By selecting it, you can change the name directly using the keyboard.
- Shortname: Here, you can enter an abbreviation or short name.
23
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
- Manufacturer: Manufacturer’s name from the Library.
- Comment: Enter a comment here.
- Date: If you see “Original“ here, this fixture is one from the MA Library. If a self-created fixture is used, you’ll find
the date off creation here.
- Type: Toggle between mirror or moving head Fixture. When using moving head Fixtures, the FIXTURE SHEET
will show a square left of the PAN value, indicating the current head position..
- MIB Delay: To set a DELAY time for the MOVE IN BLACK function for this fixture. If Default is displayed, the set
2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu
value from the DEFAULT menu is used.
- MIB Fade: To set a FADE time for the MOVE IN BLACK function for this fixture. If Default is displayed, the set value
2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu
from the DEFAULT menu is used.
- BeamAngle: Max. Beamwidth in degree (Zoom and Iris-function corresponds to this value).
- Power: For the 3D view; see 3D instructions.
- Lumen: For the 3D view; see 3D instructions..
- Weight: For the 3D view; see 3D instructions.
If you select a fixture, the individual functions of this fixture will be displayed in the lower part of the
Displays.
- No: Listing of the individual DMX channels. If a number is displayed in red and with an asterisk, this channel has
been modified.
- Break: If one cell contains a “Yes“, you can assign a different DMX address from the next channel onwards. To
change the setting, select a cell and press the Encoder. Now, select „Yes“ and press the Encoder one more time.
- Attribut: Listing of the individual functions.
- Type: „Coarse“ stands for a coarse channel, and „Fine“ for a fine channel.
- Snap: FADE/SNAP function for the respective channel. 2.3 DMX List -Single Channel-specific Adjustments for
the Current Show
- Inv: In this column, you can invert the respective channel.
- Default: This value is called up, if the Fixture or Channel is not controlled by CUE, Sequence, Preset or a direct
access. Can be changed with the left Encoder.n.
- Highlight: This value is called up, if these fixtures are selected and the HIGHLIGHT key is pressed. Can be
changed with the second Encoder.
- Stage: (No function assigned yet).
- MIB Fade: Allows you to set a FADE time for the MOVE IN BLACK function for this Fixture. Can be changed with
the right Encoder..
- Profile: In this column, you can assign a profile to the channel. 2.8 Creating, assigning and deleting Profiles
- Time: For the 3D view; see 3D instructions.
- React to Dimmer: depending to a virtual dimmer can be set
Functions of the individual bu
ttons:
buttons:
- Add Line: To insert a new fixture or function above the selected line.
- Delete Line: To delete the selected fixture or function.
- Decimal Values: To display the table values as percentages. By pressing the button, you can switch between
decimal and hexadecimal representation.
24
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Updating the Fixtures Library
- Export to Library: The selected fixture will be saved to disk in the Library.
- Export to Floppy: The selected fixtures will be saved to floppy.
2.7 Function Sets
- Function Sets: Changes into this menu.
- Import: You can insert a fixture from the Library or from a floppy.
- Funcion Sets: Here, you can enter and modify value-depending names and values for the visualization and
representation in the Fixture Sheet. Furthermore, you can define how Presets are automatically created 2.7
Function Sets - Names (Channel Values) and Presets
With this, you can leave this menu. The settings will only take effect and be saved after leaving the Full
Access menu and after pressing the SAVE button.
2.6 FIXTURES TYPES (create new)
In the Full Access menu, open this menu by pressing the Fixture Types button.
Make your entries or modifications as indicated
1.9 General Operation.
All fixtures that are currently used in the Show will be displayed in the upper part of the Displays.
2.5 FIXTURE TYPES, 2 pages earlier.
Description of all functions
In the New column, click on the Name cell and enter a name for the new fixture and confirm with Enter. A new
fixture is created and the basic settings are set to “Default“. These settings still have to be adjusted.
Please make sure that the chosen name does not already exist, because otherwise two with the same name can
later only be recognised by their manufacturer or the date.
- Now, you can enter a name for Shortname, Manufacturer and, if needed, a comment.
- Type stands on Mirror and can be switched to Head by selecting the cell using the Encoders (to the right of the
Display).
- Adjust the values for MIB Delay and MIB Fade, if needed.
- The settings for P Offset, T Offset, BeamAngle, Power, Lumen and Weight will only be needed for the
visualization in the Stage window or on the grandMA 3D and can be adjusted, if need be.
In the New column, click on the Attribute cell and open the Select Attribute window by pressing on the Encoder
(right to the Display).
Now, select the function for the first channel and accept it by pressing the Encoder one more time. Automatically,
the next line will be selected.
The DUMMY Function is meant for fixed channels. The output value for this channel has to be set in the DEFAULT
column. This channel can not be modified in the FIXTURE-SHEET.
Micro
25
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
If you finished selecting all Scanner functions, you can proceed with the presets.
Presets are:
- Type
- Snap
- Inv
- Default (can be adjusted with the left Encoder)
- Highlight (can be adjusted with the second Encoder)
- Stage (presently without any function)
- MIB FADE (can be adjusted with the right Encoder)
- Profil
- Speed
2.5 Listing of the individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menu
The values are displayed as percentages and can be switched to decimal or hexadecimal by pressing the Percent
button.
For the individual functions (e.g. GOBO), so-called Channel Values can be created. These will then be displayed in
2.7 Function Sets.
the Fixture Sheet. You can switch to the menu by using the Function Sets button.
You can leave this menu by using the X button. You could now use the created fixture in this Show.
The settings will only take effect and be saved after leaving the Full Access menu and pressing the SAVE button.
Momentarily, the created fixture can only be used for this Show.
If you want to have this fixture available in the general Library (on harddisk or floppy), too, you have to UPDATE
them (save to disk or floppy).
2.5 Updating the Scanner Library (USER-Library)
Delete self created fixtures
In the Tools-menu you can delete (permanent) self created or varied fixtures from the library. You can not delete
fixtures from factory desk library.
-
In the menu Tools press the button Manage Fixture Library
Select the fixture and press Delete Entry
With the filters you can display fixtures of the desired manufacturer or names
With Harddisk/Floppy choose store medium, mostly its Harddisk.
2.7 Function Sets - Names (Channel Values) and Presets
26
In this menu, you can create or adjust so-called Channel Values (names) for the individual functions (e.g. GOBO).
These names will then be displayed in the Fixture Sheet instead of the number value. Furthermore, you can assign
different graphic parameters like e.g. colors or Gobos that will then additionally be displayed in the Fixture Sheet.
These data will also be needed for the visualization on the grandMA 3D
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
These names and values are used when creating Presets in the Auto Create menu ( 2.1
2.11
1 Auto Create Creating Presets, Effects and Group buttons automatically).
Presets will not be created automatically, if for the Ranges of Names and Visualize values from “X“ up to “Y“
are indicated (e.g.: 10-21)! Otherwise, always - see column AutoGen.
Open this menu by pressing the Function Sets button in the Fixture Types menu (see 2 pages earlier).
Listing of the individual columns and their functions
- No: Listing of the created names and appropriate values. If a number is displayed in red and with an asterisk,
this line has been modified.
- Name: This name will only be displayed, if the value indicated for Range is reached. There are exceptions that
will be explained on the next page. You can select individual names using the left Encoder.
- Range (Name): For these values, the names (Channel Values) will be displayed. The Start and End Ranges can
be adjusted using the two Encoders in the middle.
- AutoGen: By choosing a cell and pressing the Encoder „No“ will be indicated, this means, that the presets will
be not automatically generated.
- Visualize: Here, you can define what else is to be displayed in the Fixture, Stage-Sheet or grandMA 3D. You can
visualise either graphics (for Gobos) and colors or data plus units (e.g.: degrees for PAN/TILT or RPM for Gobo
rotation).
- Range (Visu.): These values will be displayed to indicate units (e.g.: with PAN/TILT degrees); e.g. Gobo rotation:
for a value of 1 - 20, 1 RPM -20 RPM will be displayed (Discrete values).
For the functions PAN and TILT the maximal deflection is here setted; important for Flip functions and
grandMA 3D views. E.g.: Pan -90 - 270 corresponds a maximal deflection of 360 degrees whereas the middle is
at 0 degrees (asymetric deflection). For Zoom and Iris the value-range between 0 and 1.
- Extra: With this, you can define, what Gobos or colors will be displayed.
- Mode: Here, you can set an additional condition for displaying the name.
With “Always“, you do not set a condition, and the name will always be displayed.
If, however, a function (Attribute) is selected and a Range set, this name will only be displayed, if the value (of
the Range) of this function has been set (condition).
- Range (Mode): Value for the indicated function (mode).
Functions of the individual buttons:
By pressing the button
- Add Line: you can insert a new name above the selected line.
- Delete Line: you can delete the selected name, i.e. the complete line.
- Percent Values: you can display the table values as percentages. By pressing the button, you can switch to
decimal or hexadecimal display.
to leave this menu. The settings will only take effect and be saved after leaving the Full Access menu and
pressing the SAVE button.
Micro
27
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Entering Names and Values
The Attribute, for which names and values can be entered, is displayed in the title bar or above the right Encoder
below the Display. To select another one, rotate the Encoder, until the desired Attribute is displayed.
The first column contains the name (for Color e.g.: Color1). Click on this name and change it, if needed (e.g.: Close,
Red, ...).
In the Range column, 0.00% - 100.00% is displayed. Using the second and third Encoder, you can enter the
starting and end values for this name (Channel Values). By pressing the Percent Values buttons, you can switch to
decimal or hexadecimal display.
For further names and values, repeat these two steps, using the next lines, respectively.
Examples:
Here are some examples for standard functions (e.g.: Dimmer, ...), variable functions (e.g.: Strobe, Pan, Rotation, ...)
and functions with fix values (Gobo, Colors, ...). You can sign-on different fixtures for a trial, of course, or have a
look at the given names and settings and use them for your own fixtures.
- Standard function: Closed will be displayed, if the set value is „O“. Open, if on 255. Between 1- and 254, only
the value will be displayed.
- Variable function: (Discrete Values) The set value will be displayed. Furthermore, a value indication will
bedisplayed together with „Degrees“ as unit. In this case, -270° to 270° would be displayed. For Strobe, “Hz“ and
for Gobo_Rotate “RPM“ would appear here.
- Fixed values: Open will be displayed, if the set value is „O“.
Red between „8“ and „24“ and additionally a color will be displayed on the side. This color can be set in the Extra
column. Sames applies for the other colors.
Between the given values (e.g.: here 1 - 7), the color would be displaced by Open, and the color be inserted for
Red. Only after reaching the value “8“ would the color be displayed completely for Red.
2.8 Creating, Assigning and Deleting Profiles (see also: TTOLS-Menu)*
In the PROFILE TOOL menu, you can create individual profiles. The profiles created can be assigned to any Fixture
parameter or dimmer channel.
28
Assigning a profile to a DMX channel
press Setup
Open the FIXTURE TYPES menu 2.5 Modifying scanners (EDIT FIXTURE) or 2.6 Creating Scanners (EDIT
FIXTURE). Here, you can assign a profile to all fixtures of one type simultaneously
simultaneously.
Or:
Open the Patch Sheets menu 2.3 DMX List -Single Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show. Here, you
can assign a profile to each individual DMX channel.
In the Profile column, elect the cell for the fixture or DMX channel, and press the Encoder. The Select Profile menu
will open.
The table shows all created profiles.
By selecting a profile, it will be activated and the menu be closed. The name of the selected profile will now be
displayed in the cell.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Un-assigning a Profile
Select the name of the assigned profile and press the None button. This will revoke the assignment.
2.8.1 EDIT PROFILES - Creating or modifying profiles
If you want to create a new profile, press the NEW button. The EDIT PROFILES menu will open. Additionally, a
window will open, where you can enter a name for the profile and have to confirm it with Enter.
To change a profile, select it using the Encoder and press the Edit button. The EDIT PROFILES menu will open
with the selected profile.
Qty: Numbers of cordinations are displayed
100 : Number of fixtures, this profile is coordinated.
(1):
Number of channels per fixture, this profile is
coordinated.t
At first, when creating a new profile, a lineary profile is displayed that can then be modified. If an existing profile
is selected, this will now be displayed.
The y-axis gives the value set on the grandMA, whereas the x-axis gives the DMX value that will be output. By
pressing the PERCENT key, you can switch the scaling from percent to decimal or, when pressing the key once
more, to hexadecimal.
Clicking on a desired point in the diagram will bring up cross-wires. Above the diagram, the value of the
current position is displayed. The value after IN is the set value on the grandMA, the one after OUT is the DMX
value that will be put out.
- Add Point: The profile line will automatically be connected with the new point.
This way, you can set as many points as you wish.
- Delete Point: To delete a point, select one and press the Delete Point button.
- Toggle Curve: will create a wave form.
- PREDEFINED: opens a menue with predefined profiles, these profiles can altered and stored with a new name.
- MIRROR: displays a selection to mirror the profile.
Using the mouse
mouse, you can move points. Make a left mouse click on the point, draw it to the desired position
and let the button go.
The modifications made will be saved to this profile directly.
The table will show all existing profiles that can also be accessed and modified directly.
To create an additional profile, press the Add Profile button, name it and repeat the steps above.
To delete a profile in the table, select it and press the Delete Profile button. Deleting a profile is only possible
when the profile is already deleted from the fixture (in Full Access / Fixture Types / Profiles)
Pressing the X button will save the profiles and you leave the menu.
Micro
29
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2.8.2 Embedding self-created Gobos
When using self-created Gobos, these graphics can be collected in a Gobo library; the Visualizer will, however,
show the „real“ Gobos. In stage view on the console, the light is indicated in a very simplified form, i.e. as a color
line, and the Gobos do not appear.
Saving a self-created Bitmap graphics
create a graphics and save it as a BMP file to a floppy
FULL ACCESS
FIXTURE TYPES
activate the FIXTURETYPE menu (dark blue title bar) and the line of the fixture type
activate the CHANNELS of FIXTURETYPE menu (dark blue title bar)
use the Encoder to jump to the attribute cell GOBO
FUNCTION SETS the FUNCTION SETS menu of the respective fixture type (Gobo 1 or Gobo 2) will appear
in the empty bottom line, enter a name for the Gobo – the line will be numbered automatically
enter a range (environment in which the Gobo should completely be visible – depends on the fixture type)
Visualize – using the Encoder, choose the Visulize Effect fro the menu (in this case, Gobo 1 or Gobo 2)
position the frame in the EXTRA column using the Encoder – the CHANGE GOBO menu will appear
use the arrow to open the folder overview
use the Encoder to choose and open the folder in which you want to save the bitmap
copy the bitmap into the folder by using IMPORT IMAGE FROM DISK
or:
create a new folder using MAKE FOLDER ON DISK; enter a name and confirm
copy the bitmap into the folder by using IMPORT IMAGE FROM DISK
„Inserting“ an already saved Gobo in a fixture
When Gobos were exchanged within a fixture, you have to do the same for the „equipment“ in the library so that
the 3D Visualizer can give a real representation of the Show.
open the FUNCTION SETS menu of the respective fixture type (Gobo 1 or Gobo 2) – see above
use the Encoder to go to the EXTRA cell and open the CHANGE GOBO menu
use the arrow to open the menus of different manufacturers
choose a manufacturer and a Gobo, and confirm using the Encoder – the chosen Gobo will be „inserted“ into
the fixture
using DELETE FOLDER FROM DISK to delete the chosen folder from the hard disk
using DELETE IMAGE FROM DISK to delete the bitmap from the chosen folder
30
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
2 . 9 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration
There are 2 DMX output sockets on the rear of the Micro. These sockets can be assigned to any of the DMX
universes A and B. It is also possible to output the same universe on more than one output socket.
2.9.1 Assigning the DMX-XLR sockets of the Micro
DMX outputs A to B (on the backside of the console)
In this column, the DMX ports can be assigned to the respective output sockets on the Micro.
By repeated pressing these keys any of the DMX Universes, A to B, can be assigned to any of the Micro´s DMX
output sockets A to B. The assigning of DMX ports to the sockets is instantaneous.
DMX input
In this area, you can assign the DMX-XLR input to an internal DMX port (A-B), or you can assign the DMX-In of an
external Ethernet DMX unit to an internal DMX port.
By pressing the button below PROTOCOL, you can set the following:
- Intern: The DMX-IN (on the backside of the console) will be used.
- ARTNET: The assigned DMX-In of an ARTNET unit will be used. Assignment see 2.9.3 ARTNET DMXETHERNET CONFIGURATION,DMX input
In this area, you can assign the DMX-XLR input to an internal DMX port (A-H), or you can assign the DMX-In of an
external Ethernet DMX unit to an internal DMX port.
By pressing the button below PROTOCOL, you can set the following:
- Intern: The DMX-IN (on the backside of the console) will be used.
- ARTNET: The assigned DMX-In of an ARTNET unit will be used. Assignment see 2.9.3 ARTNET DMX-ETHERNET
CONFIGURATION
-PORTALL: Not verified in this software version.
- PATH PORT: The assigned DMX-In of a PATH PORT unit will be used. Assignment see 2.9.4 PATH POT DMXETHERNET CONFIGURATION, next pages.
By pressing the button below Configuration, you can open the appropriate menu. below or on the next page
DMX Merge
By pressing the “Merge with“ button you can define, on which internal DMX port (A to B) the DMX-IN signal will
bemerged with.
DMX IN can be used to merge the signals of a second console with those of the grandMAs (MERGE) and pipe them
to the stage on the same line. If channels from the grandMA and of the second console are triggered in this
connection, the higher value will be sent (HTP).
The DMX-In can be used as an additional remote control channel 8.3 Remote control by DMX IN
Attention: If you are in a network connection of Master-Slave, only the DMX IN of the Master console will be
transferred to the internal DMX port. The DMX IN of the Slave console can only be used for remote control
purposes.
Micro
31
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2.
9 .2 Configuring the internal DMX ports 1(A) -2(B)
2.9
By pressing a button in the PROTOCOL column, you can set a protocol for the appropriate DMX port (A-B) (referred
to the respective Ethernet DMX converter) for the transmissions.
By pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column, you can call up the appropriate menu for this DMX output.
next pages
enabled if Idle or Playback
Playback“, a DMX output via Ethernet is on, if the unit is not in a
If the button is on “enabled
session (Idle). An exception is here the Playback Session, in this case the Slave stays on.
In a Master-Slave configuration (Full-Tracking and Multi-User Session), the Slaves switch itselv to
„Disable“ (off). If a Master fails, the Slave with the higher priority will automatically be switched to
„Enable“. This way, the DMX will now be created by the former Slave (now Master). If two units are
switched to „Enable“, the data may will overlap. This has to be avoided under all cicrumstances!
By pressing on this button, it will switch to “disabled“; now, a DMX output via Ethernet is no longer possible.
next pages
With the menu „Ethernet Configuration Setup“ you can change the IP-address and the name of the desk. With
START SESSION the Micro connects with grandMA 3D .
The Micro can not be connected to NSPs and other grandMAs.
2.9.4 ARTNET DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURATION
You can call up this menu by pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column, if the PathPort protocol has been
selected
32
It is possible to connect up to 16 Ethernet DMX Converter. On the DMX converters, unique SUB NET addresses
have to be designated accordingly. The address switches of the individual DMX sockets have to be set to four different addresses. The settings modified on the DMX converter, can be overwritten by software. Artnet - Note
Configuration, next page
If Artnet converters are connected, they will be searched for and displayed in the chart when calling up this
menu. If the converter is being activated after opening the menu, you can search for the converter by pressing
the Scan for Nodes key to insert the converter in the chart, if one is found.
In the left chart, all converters found will be displayed with the respectively set address for each DMX OUTPUT.
The number in front of the colon is the SUBNET address, the number following is the address for the DMX OUTPUT.
Choose an address for the DMX OUTPUT.
In the right chart, one line is displayed for each converter. The selected DMX OUTPUT will be displayed on a green
background.
If an output is displayed on a red background, this indicates that it is already being assigned and can not be used.
Pressing the Save button will save all modifications.
Press the key X. Now, the converter for this DMX port is configured and the menu will be closed.
For the „DMX Hub“ from the Artistic Licence Company, this button must be on „Delayed Output“, for all other
units, this setting is not relevant.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
If further ports are to be assigned, repeat all steps. When all settings are completed, press the SAVE key in the
DMX-OUTPUT CONFIGURATION menu. The modified settings are now stored. Now, the blue ACTIVE LED at the
assigned DMX converter is on and the DMX outputs can be used. When at the node data is received, the red LED is
on.
Artnet - Node Configuration:
First, choose a DMX converter to be edited in the table.
Pressing the Edit Nodes button for this Ethernet-DMX converter will open the menu.
As Shortname and Longname, you can enter any name for this converter.
The IP address of the grandMAs does not have to be adapted to this IP address here.
For Manufacturer, IP and version, only internal data from the converter will be displayed.
For SubSwitch, the DMX converter SubNet number can be changed. This change will overwrite the settings in the
converter.
In the Output table, the available DMX outputs of the Ethernet-DMX converters will be displayed.
In the Input table, the available DMX inputs of the Ethernet-DMX converters will be displayed (DMX input two
pages earlier).
In the tables, you can adjust the SubNet and Channel addresses for every DMX output or input. This change will
overwrite the settings in the Ethernet-DMX converter.
By pressing the Reset to Local Control button, the Ethernet-DMX converter will be reset to its standard
setting (Defaults).
Pressing the Save button will save the modifications.
By pressing the X button, you will leave this menu.
2.9.5 PPathP
athP
ort DMX-ETHERNET
-CONFIGURA
TION
athPort
DMX-ETHERNET-CONFIGURA
-CONFIGURATION
You can call up this menu by pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column, if the PathPort protocol has been
selected.
Up to 64 DMX outputs can be triggered via the PathPort nodes. The IP address has to be adapted to the PathPorts
Ethernet-DMX converter, something you can also do via the grandMA. PATHPORT - Node Configuration, next
page
If PathPort Ethernet-DMX converter s are connected, they will be looked for when you call up this menu, and they
are displayed in the table (only, if the first 3 digits of the IP address of grandMA and PathPort Ethernet-DMX
x).
converter are identical, e.g.: 192.168.0.x
If the Node is activated after having opened the menu, you can look for the Node by pressing the Scan for
Nodes button to be displayed in the table.
In the left table, all found DMX outputs are indicated by a number. These are the assigned xDMX slots (
PATHPORT - Node Configuration, next page). The outputs can be distinguished by these numbers.
Select an address for the DMX output.
In the right table, one line is displayed for each Node. The selected DMX output will be indicated by a green
background.
If an output is indicated by a red background, this means that it is already assigned and cannot be used.
If you press the Identify by Backlight button, the background lighting of the Display will blink.
Pressing the Save button will save the changes.
Micro
33
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Press the X button. Now, the converter for this DMX port is configured and the menu will be closed.
If additional ports are to be assigned, repeat all steps as indicated. After all settings have been made, press the SAVE
button in the DMX-OUTPUT CONFIGURATION menu. The changes made will be saved then. On the assigned
Ethernet-DMX converter, Active will be displayed for the assigned DMX outputs and inputs.
PATHPORT - Node Configuration:
First, choose a DMX converter to be adjusted in the table.
By pressing the Edit Nodes button, open the menu for this DMX converter.
The data will be read from the Ethernet-DMX converter and be displayed.
Aside from the name, a deliberate name for this node can be chosen.
IP: here, you can set the IP address. When pressing the Save button, you have to start the Ethernet-DMX
converter transmission by pressing OK in the opened window. The converter will reboot and set the new IP address.
Under Desk Config, the IP address and the Subnet of the console will be displayed.
If the SubNet is not identical, this has to be adjusted. For further information, please contact you network
administrator.
Gateway: For further information, please contact you network administrator.
With the Backlight button, you can switch the background lighting on and off.
In the Output table, all available DMX outputs of the DMX converter are displayed.
In the Input table, all available DMX inputs of the DMX converter are displayed (DMX input four pages earlier).
In the tables, you can adjust the name, patch for every DMX output or input.
In the xDMX column, you can assign a number for every DMX output or input. Each DMX output or input will be
assigned by this number.
If you press the Save button, the changes are transferred to the converter.
By pressing the X button, you close the menu
34
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
2.1
0 DMX Output Window
10
Create a DMX Output Window (DMX) using a TFT Display. 3.1 Creating windows
Open Options Menu
In this window, each patched channel can be displayed showing the value it is currently outputing.
By briefly pressing the respective keys (A – B) (dark background), all DMX ports’ DMX channels will be displayed
in this window (if needed, scroll through the window using the Encoder next to the Display.)
The first DMX channel of this row is displayed here.
If you position the mouse pointer on a cell, the DMX channel (possibly already patched channels with their
fixture types and functions) will be displayed in the lower part of the window.
In the DMX-sheet you can also change the DMX-Patch:
Cchange patch:
Press button Move (LED lights) and click on a channel with left mouse button, hold left mouse button down and
move the fixture to an empty space. You can only move the complete fixture, therefore you need enough space
at the new address.
Unpatch:
Press button Delete (LED lights) and select a channel (with mouse or touch). All channels of the fixture will be
deleted.
New Patch of Fixtures:
Fixtures, which are present in the fixture-Sheet, can directly patched in the DMX-Sheet
- select fixture in fixture sheet (with mous or touch)
- press button Assign (LED lits)
- press empty space in the DMX-sheet, the fixture will be patched (if the fixture needs more channels
as available in this area, the procedure will be stopped. Look for an area with enough empty channels
in a row.
Note: when you take action in the DMX-sheet and Full Access is aktive, dont press Save after closing Full
Access - otherwise all changes in the DMX-shet will be rejected.
2 . 111
1 Auto Create - Creating presets, effects and group keys
automatically
For most of the Fixtures in the library, there are ready-made presets that can be created in this window. Furthermore, ready-made effects and group keys for each Fixture and Dimmer can be also be created.
open AUTO CREATE in SETUP-Menu
2.1
1.1 Creating Presets automatically
2.11.1
Micro
Call up AUTO CREATE in the SETUP menu.
In the table, all Scanner and Dimmer types are displayed that are used in the current Show. On the right of each
Scanner and Dimmer, you’ll find the Select column. By choosing a cell and pressing the Encoder on the right of
the Display, you can select them and the display switches to Yes. When creating Presets, these will only be
35
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
created for these Scanners or Dimmers.
By pressing the Autocreate Prests New button, you can create individual Presets for each Scanner type.
The created Presets will now be available in the individual PRESET windows. See also: 2.7. Function Sets Names (Channel Values) and Presets
By pressing the Autocreate Presets Merge button, you can create the Presets for all Scanner types
simultaneously. Same names of different Scanners will be displayed on one PRESET button.
By pressing the Delete Presets button, you can delete the Presets of the selected Scanners and Dimmers.
By pressing the button Reset Presets References you can delete all self created preset references and the
presets created from the function sets from library.
To save self-created Presets of a Reference Scanner, select the appropriate Scanner (in the Fixture Sheet). Press
the “Create Preset Preference“ button. The Presets will now be saved to the Fixture in the USER Library in this
Show (same name, can only be distinguished by its version number). If you sign-on further Fixtures of this type
(same version), you can load the created Presets with CREATE NEW PRESETS (see item 3). To use this Fixture with
the self-created Presets in other Shows or on other consoles, too, you have to save this Fixture in the USER
2.5 Updating the Fixture Library (USER Library)
Library on disk or floppy.
By pressing the “Create Dimmer Presets“ button, you can creatPresets in differently adjustable levels for each
Dimmer channel. The Presets can bei adjusted in 4 levels (5, 10, 20, or 25%) by pressing the button on the right.
2.1
1.2 Creating groups automatically
2.11.2
If the Groups button is pressed (green background), you are in the Auto Create Groups menu.
In the upper table, all Scanner and Dimmers are displayed that are used in the current Show.
In the lower table, all “Fixture Layer“ are displayed that are used in the current Show.
On the right of each Scanner and Dimmer, you’ll find the Select column. By choosing a cell and pressing the
Encoder on the right of the Display, these are selected and the display switches to Yes. When creating groups,
groups will be created only for these Scanners or Dimmers.
By pressing the CREATE GROUPS button, one ODD button will be created for each Scanner type, with which you
can select all odd-numbered Scanners simultaneously. One EVEN button to select all even-numbered Scanners,
and an ALL button, to select all of the two.
By pressing the CREATE SINGLE GROUPS button, you can create a single button for each Scanner type in the
GROUP window.
2.1
1.3 Clone Fixture - Copying Fixture data globally (cloning)
2.11.3
36
Press Clone button (green background) to open the Clone Fixture Data menu.
You can clone (copy) all data of one or more fixtures globally. In this, all Preset, Group, Cue and Effect data are
cloned from the first fixture/s (From Fixtures...) to the target fixture/s (...To Fixtures). If you select the same
number of fixtures on each side, the data of the first will be transferred to the first, of the second to the second,
etc.
Select the fixture/s that you want to clone (Fixture Sheet). If you want to clone several fixtures, you have to
observe the sequence in which you select them. Pressing the left Take Selection button will display the fixtures
in the left table
(From Fixtures...).
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Select the fixture/s, to which you want to clone the data (Fixture Sheet). If you want to clone several fixtures,
you have to observe the sequence in which you select them. Pressing the left Take Selection button will display
the fixtures in the right table (... To Fixtures).
By pressing the >>>! Clone!<<< button, you can clone all data.
Attention: All target fixture data created sofar will be overwritten/deleted.
2.1
1.4 Auto Create Effects
2.11.4
Press Auto Create Effects button (green background) to open the Auto Create Effects menu.
By pressing the Create Built-in Dafault Effects menu, you can create preset effects that will then be
available in the EFFECT pool. 6 Effects
By pressing the Import Effects button, you can load saved effects from floppy.
By pressing the Export Effects button, you can save the created effects to a floppy.
2.1
1.5 ASCII Show Import
2.11.5
If the Ascii Show button is pressed (green background), you are in the ASCII Show Import menu.
Before you load an ASCII Show, you should save the Current Show, as it could be overwritten.
If the FDD contains a floppy with a Show in ASCII format (file with the .ALQ extension), you can load the Show by
pressing the button. It is not possible to transfer Scanner data. The Default User Settings ( 2.8 Saving or
Loading Profiles) will be loaded. The Show will be saved under the name AssciiShow and should be renamed and
saved again. 11 Saving and Loading a Show
Use the X button to leave the Auto CREATE menu. The data will only be saved to the RAM - permanently only
when saving the complete Show to disk or floppy. 11 Saving and Loading a Show
2.12 Settings in the Setup Menu
Micro
- Using the Executor Mode button, simulate the numbering of the grandMA’s executors (Executor Fader 1 - 20,
Executor Button 21 - 60; the additional executors can only be triggered from the Command Line. This is the easier
way to use shows created on the grandMA.
- By setting the soft key „Executor Layout“ to „Wide“, a Micro will use the same executor numbering as the „big
brother“ grandMA does. Therefore the first button executor has number 21. Please have in mind, that in wide
mode the printed labels on the consoles surface are wrong. The advantage of wide mode is, that all executors can
be accessed by the command line. This is useful when porting shows from a grandMA into a smaller console.
- By clicking this key, four calibrating keys, numbered 1 to 4, will be displayed on the respective TFT display.
Touch the keys using your finger or the supplied pen (special pen with soft rubber core). The display will
automatically switch back after the last key is touched. The touchscreen is now calibrated and the settings will
automatically be stored.
With the respective keys, the touch screens can be switched on or off. It is possible that a fault may cause the
mouse to freeze in one position and can no longer be operated. In this case, the touchscreens can be switched
off. For this, use function key F9 on the keyboard.
F9 will switch off the touchscreen (emergency switch). To switch the touchscreen back on use the
mouse.
37
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
To toggle the mouse function on both external monitors on and off. In AUTO mode, the software will recognize if
a monitor is connected or not and will switch the mouse function for the external monitors on or off, accordingly.
OFF will not allow any mouse function, while ON will keep the mouse function activated at all times.
With this key, the grandMA’s internal speaker be switched on or off (not available on older grandMAs).
To set the sensitivity of trackball and the encoders to coarse, fine or extra fine (16bit resolution).
With the PUSH key, you can set the Encoder’s sensitivity when holding it down and turning.
F a d e r s without ffu
u n ct i o n
- Executor Faders: When switching between the Pages, the stored values will be called up, but the Faders will
not follow.
- Channel Faders: Faders do not adjust automatically to the called-up values of the assigned channels.
The wheel’s functions for the dimmers:
- Additiv: All dimmer values will be changed simultaneously. If they reach “0“ or “FF“, they will be aligned.
- Incremental: All dimmer values will be changed simultaneously. If they reach “0“ or „FF“, the respective
intervals will be maintained.
- Prop.+: All dimmer values will be changed in percentages and will reach “0“ simultaneously.
- Prop.–: All dimmer values will be changed in percentages and will reach “FF“ simultaneously.
Please note, that with PROP+ a change of the value “0“ is not considered a change.
Please note, that with PROP– a change of the value “FF“ is not considered a change.
- Switch between “Light“ and “Dark“ display background illumination.
- The desk lamp can be switched either on or off with the ON/OFF key. The brightness of the desk lamp can be
changed using a left mouse click on the blue bar or using the touchscreen. On the ULTRALIGHT and MICRO, you
can only switch the brightness of the console lamp from FULL to HALF and vice versa.
- DEFAULTS: By pressing this key, you will enter the DEFAULTS menu. All general presets can be set in this
menu. 2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu
- By pressing this key you will enter the DATE and TIME menu. 2.15 DATE and TIME
- By pressing this key you can change the display language.
- To switch the screen saver off an on. By pressing the key briefly, a window will appear where you can select the
time after which the screen saver will activate.
- By pressing this key, you will reach the UPDATE SOFTWARE menu. The operating system, the operating software
as well as the console software and the fixtures can be updated from this menu. 12 Software Update
Close menu with X.
38
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS Menu
Pressing the DEFAULT key in the SETUP menu will bring you to the DEFAULTS menu.
Programming
This column will display the default times and settings that will be used when storing Cues and Sequences.
Using the Encoders, you can adjust the individual times and trigger calls.
DUAL DIGIT VALUE ENTRY: Entries performed over the numeric block, have to be done in the conventional way;
entry 2_0 will yield a value of 20.
SINGLE DIGIT VALUE ENTRY: Entries performed over the numeric block will be done in factors of ten; entry 2 will
yield 20, 0_5 will become 5, and 1_5 will yield 15 (without switching to DUAL)
Default AT: Here, enter the percentage value that the selected fixtures or dimmers are to take when the 2x AT
command is used.
Playback Timing
The duration set for the OFF Time will be used when switching off Executors (OFF key).
GOTO & GO-: If a specific time is set when calling up a Cue using the GOTO or GO- function, the Cue will be
called up with this duration. If Cue Timing was set, the Cue will be called up with the duration programmed in
this Cue. You can overwrite the Goto Default duration at any time. 4.2.3 Default Sequence (Master
Sequence)
5.1.4 Move in Black Option
Here you can enter a Default time for MIB DELAY and FADE.
Executor Defaults
Default is Sequence/Chaser: With this key, you can define, whether a newly programmed sequence will be
created as a Chaser (one look after another running automatically) or as a Sequence (press go for cue 1 and then
press go for ce 2 etc.) (default setting).
Chase Fade: Here, you can define the preset for Chase Fade.
Chase Speed: Here, you can define the default Chase Speed and Effect Speed.
Readout: By pressing the key, you can here switch the Chaser Speed between BPM (beats per minute), Hz
(beats per second) and SEC (seconds).
The default Chaser Speed is also used as the default for the Effect Speed.
Crossfade Reload/Permanent: Here, you can define whether manual cross fading should be performed just
in one direction (Reload) or in both directions (Permanent) when moving a fader set to cross fade.
Sheet Sorting
By the SORTING column, you define according to which aspects the fixtures and channels shall be sorted
when setting up new windows. You can switch to the next option by clicking on the respective keys.
Sheet Fontsize
With the FONTSIZES column, you can define the type size of new windows.
Sheet Readout
Preset for the output of numbers in the OUTPUT, CHANNEL and PATCH windows.
Misc
Micro
– Function of BLACKOUT key:
PUSH:
serves as push key (key)
39
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
TOGGLE:
will remain active when pressed
DISABLED: switches the blackout function off
– Function of the GRANDMASTER FADER:
ENABLED: Fader active
DISABLED: Fader inactive
– KEYBOARD GERMAN/ENGLISH: Switch option for country-specific keyboards.
– KEYBOARD Dot-Zero: Switching the key sequence on the numeric keyboard to Zero-Dot. The key caps
1.7.2 Layout and Controls grandMA item 19 or 1.7.1/3 Layout
can be exchanged without any problems.
and Controls grandMA (ultra) light item 21
– With the Preset Color key, three different presets for the color scheme of displaying preset keys
can be called up.
RESET DEFAULTS key: Will reset all changes back to factory settings.
Encoder labelling for figures within the Cue Timing column.
2.14 Setting Sound Signals
The sound signal is used for triggering Chasers and Sequences. In other words, this is an electronic, graphic
equalizer. In order to slowly balance any fluctuations of the audio signal, a specific compressor function has been
integrated.
You will find an integrated adjustable HOLD-OFF function. This function will prevent any double triggers (for
example: with fast BASSDRUM beats). Beats will be automatically recognized via the incoming sound signal (BPM).
Press TOOLS
Press Button Sound Settings to open the menu
To set an equalizer, pull the respective “slider“ to the desired position. In the left lower corner, there is a visual
trigger signal (monitor) for your orientation. The small dot on the left side of the HOLD Function will indicate the
remaining HOLD time. The small dot on the left side of the GAIN indicator will show the compression rate of the
audio signal.
The right small dot will indicate the state of compression of the audio signal. The sound signal is visualized in the
lower left part of the display. The analysis of the sound signal will be indicated in the smaller right part of the
window, including indication of the recognised BPM (Beats per minute). By moving the BPM slider, the beat can be
set. The next-possible beat will be recognised from the incoming audio signal and will be used to control the BPM.
If the BPM key is ON, the currently recognised beat will be used. When switching the BPM to OFF, the last
recognised beat at the time will remain unchanged and will be used. You can adjust the value using the BPM
slider.
If the Auto Stop key is on ON, the Chase or the effect will be stopped when there is no sound signal. If the Auto
Fader key is also on ON, the Chase or the effect will be faded out when there is no sound signal.
When you switch the Auto Stop key to OFF, the Chaser or effect will continue with the latest BPM value measured.
40
You can leave this menu by pressing the X key; all settings will be stored.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
2 . 1 5 TIME & DATE Menu
Pressing the TIME and DATE key in the SETUP Menu will open the following menu.
You can set TIME and DATE with the encoders below the display. (You can switch encoder functions by
pressing the button Time).
Manual or automatic positioning via GPS
The times of sunrise and sunset change according to your geographical position. If you know your position, you
can enter it in the LOCATION MANUAL mode; if moving around frequently (e.g. when travelling on a ship), it is
advisable to determine your current position by a GPS receiver and let the values be inserted automatically.
Button display: Location Manual
Manual, fix entry of values.
Set position for the automatic control of ( 9.3 Agenda Menu) sunrise and sunset calculation. Clicking on the
respective keys will open a window, where the position can be set.
Information regarding the respective position can be looked up in a software program that can be downloaded
from the internet at: www.djuga.net/winglobe.html.
or:
Button display: Location Auto
Auto, values are automatically used by a connected GPS receiver.
Pressing the button will open the GPS-Info menu. In this menu, you can modify the settings for a NMEA GPS
receiver connected to the serial port. This receiver will then determine the position of the grandMA. This can be
especially useful e.g. on ships cruising on the oceans. For best satellite reception, check for an unhindered view
to the sky when setting up your equipment.
If the key is set to Enabled
Enabled,the clock will automatically switch between summer and winter time. Pressing the
key deactivates this function (Disabled). Pressing the respective key in the Begin/End field will open a window
where you can set the beginning and the end of the summer time.
Pressing this key will open a sheet, where the calculated times for Dawn, Sunrise, Sunset and Dusk for yesterday,
today and tommorrow are listed.
Leave this menu with the X key.
Micro
41
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2.16 User Management
The Micro has only one default-user, no login and no User-profiles as the grandMA, Light and UltraLight has. Parts
of the user profles can be added from the loaded show.
2.16.1 Locking the Desk
Locking the desk is a method to temporarily protect your desk against misuse from inexperienced users. It is not
suitable for permanent protection.
Locking the desk does not affect the output. All programs that are running continue to do so. But the surface of
the desk is inaccessible, even moving the grand master fader will be ignored.
Activating Desk Lock:
- Press CTRL-PAUSE on the PC-Keyboard
- The touchscreen will show DESK LOCKED.
- Desk is locked.
Deactivating Desk Lock:
- Press CTRL-PAUSE on the PC-Keyboard again.
- The touchscreen will restore in the original screen.
- Desk is unlocked..
CAUTION:
Due to the fact, that the grand master fader is not motorised, master dimming may jump to an unwanted level
upon deactivation of desk lock. So have a look at it before you deactivate the desk lock!
42
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3
Creating a Show
3 . 1 CREATING A WINDOW
Pressing an “empty” space on the TFT display. The CREATE A WINDOW menu will open.
3.1.1Listing of individual windows and functions
Sheets:
- CHANNEL: This window will display dimmer channels as figures. You have direct access to channels and values
3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly
here.
- EXECUTOR: Within this window, you will have the option to display a sequence, which is assigned to an
EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button. Among other options, this is where global times can be changed.
5.3 EXECUTOR window
- FADER: Selected dimmer channels can be displayed as either bar or figure within this window. Here you will also
have direct access to channels and values. 3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly
- FIXTURE: Displays all fixtures and their various functions, values, status etc. Here you will have direct access to
3.4 Accessing Fixtures directly
the fixtures, functions and values.
- TRACKING: In this window you can display a Sequence that is assigned to an EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button.
Here, as opposed to the EXECUTOR Sheet, all values or times can be displayed separately for an entire sequence. Cues
are displayed vertically with channel and fixture data displayed horizontally. Any value/time can be modified
separately for any channel. 5.4 TRACKING window
- DMX: In this window, all DMX output channels are displayed as values, as they are actually patched. It is also
0 DMX Output window
possible to perform drag and drop patching operations from within this window. 2.1
2.10
P ools:
Micro
- GROUPS: Displays, creates new, edits and calls up fixture and dimmer groups. 3.3 Creating and Calling up
Fixtures and Dimmer groups
- SEQUENCE: In this Pool, all the created Sequences are displayed. This way, assignments to Executors can be
made very quickly. Sequences can be renamed, copied and deleted from within this window as well. 5.1
ASSIGN menu
- EFFECTS: Displaying and Calling up Effects. 6 Effects
6.7
- FORMS: In this POOL, all created forms will be displayed. Here, you can rename, copy or delete forms.
Creating and Storing Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)
- MACROS: In this Pool, all the created Macros are displayed. It is also possible to store new macros and edit
existing ones from within this window. 9 Macros and QUIKEY
- VIEWS: Displaying and Calling up Views. 3.2.2 View Pool
- QUIKEY: Displaying and creating soft versions of existing console keys and commands. 9 Macros and QUIKEY
8
- TIMECODE: Recording, Playing back, Editing and Storing SMPTE LTC Timecode controlled operations.
Timecode
- MAtricks: Here, you can create, save and directly call up different selection groups. And you can copy or move
values that were set by the Circular Copy function from one fixture to another. 3.9 MAtricks
- Worlds: Here, you can create, call up or manage so-called „Worlds“. Worlds are important, when you e.g. want
43
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4
3
to work in the Multi-User Mode, or you just want to make some Fixtures „invisible“.
15.7 Worlds
- Channel Pages, In these pools, “buttons“ will be displayed for all pages. The pages can be called up quickly
- Fader Pages, by just clicking on them. Here, you can change the names of the pages,
5.5 Managing Pages
- Button Pages: you can copy or delete them.
- Bitmap Effects: Here, you can create, call up or manage Bitmap-Effects.
Presets:
PAN / TILT, DIMMER, GOBO, COLOUR, BEAM, FOCUS, CONTROL, SHAPERS and ALL:
Creates new, edits and calls up individual PRESETS with name and number. 3.7 Creating and Calling up Presets
4
4
- COMMAND LINE: Lists executed commands by their names. Also to enter commands using the keyboard. 10
Command Line
- CLOCK: Display window analog or digital clock. Switch by pressing the Analog button.
9.3 Agenda
- AGENDA: In this menu, you can create automatic controls by time/date or sunrise/sunset.
menu
- DESK STATUS:
Displays the current software versions:
VXWORKS:
Operating system with date
GrandMA:
Main program with date. If this line is displayed in green, the unit
supports 1024 DMX channels
- Chat: For communication (Chat) with other grandMA users in the network.
- Stage: To display a simplified stage model with all fixtures. In this window, the beam of light will only be
displayed as a line. For Scanners having a color mixing unit or Dimmer channels, to which a color has been
assigned, this beam of light represents the chosen color and its position. Additionally, fixtures can be selected
2.2.3 Position of Fixtures and 2.2.5 Adjusting individual Fixture Groups,
directly by clicking on them.
Assigning Colors for Dimmer channels
- Clear Screen: Will delete all windows on this display/monitor (but not the saved views)
Will close this window discarding all changes.
Select the window to be created with a left mouse click.
If you wish to move the newly created window, click and drag the window border.
There are 3 ways to enlarge or reduce a window: Move the cursor carefully to the lower or right border or corner,
until you will see a small double-arrow next to the cursor. Now click and drag holding the left mouse key. By
moving the mouse, the window can now be resized according to your requirements.
One of the most effective ways to work with the grandMA is by using the touchscreen and the encoder which is
located next to each display..
3.1.2
44
Deleting a window
Press the DELETE key once. Right click on the title bar of the window.
Or:
Click into the left corner (yellow dot) of the title bar. In the next window, confirm with YES or DELETE.
Or:
When pressing the top and bottom VIEW keys simultaneously, all windows on the TFT display will be deleted.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 2 Storing VIEWS
The soft VIEW keys running down the righthand side of the touchscreen and can be assigned with views.
The physical keys located beside the touch screen can be used for direct access to the VIEW soft keys on the
screen.
What can a (soft) key be used for?
- You can store one or more displays on it,
- You can store all currently created windows on all screens and both external monitors on it,
or - You can store a Macro 9.1 Creating Macros
- Organize a display or monitor 3.1 CREATING A WINDOW
Press the STORE key once (STORE LED is on).
Press a VIEW key or a VIEW soft key once. The SELECT VIEW window will open.
Enter a name for the VIEW using the keyboard. The new name will be displayed in the top line.
With the OK or ENTER key you can complete the store and assign process.
3 . 2 . 1 Assigning VIEWS
All created views can by assigned to any view key.
Click on the view key with the right mouse key. The window SELECT VIEW will appear. In this window, make a left
click on the VIEW you require:
- The table shows all created VIEWs.
- The QTY column shows the number of stored displays and external monitors for the individual VIEWs.
- Scrolling is possible by dragging the scrollbar on the right side.
- Selecting a VIEW in the table will assign this view to the chosen key.
3 . 2 . 2 View PPool
ool
In the View Pool, all created Views are displayed and can be called up directly by selection.
Micro
45
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3 . 3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS
Important and frequently used combinations of fixtures and dimmer channels can be stored in groups. ( max. 999
groups). Makes selecting of group of lamps very easy and quick. The same lmap can be member of several groups.
3 . 3 . 1 Creating fixture or dimmer groups
Create a GROUP window on the TFT touchscreen. 3.1 Creating a Window
Use the touch screen or make a left mouse click on the individual Fixture within the FIXTURE SHEET or click on
the Dimmer channels in the CHANNEL or FADER SHEET.
The Fixtures and / or dimmer channels that make up a group can be recalled one at a time in sequence. The
order in which they are recalled is same as the order in which they were selected when the group was originally
stored. When selecting Fixtures or Channels for a group, make use of their order so that you can step through
them individually using the NEXT/PREV key.
Or
Press the FIXTURE key for a fixture group or the CHANNEL key for dimmer groups (LED is on).
Pressing the ENTER key will lock the Fixture or Channel in the Command Line.
Enter the number of first fixture or dimmer channel, using the numeric keypad.
Now you can select the next fixture or dimmer channel to be selected by using the “+“ key.
The THRU key on the numeric keypad will select a range. All fixtures and dimmer channels from... to
including the last number entered.
Using the “–“ key, the fixture/dimmer channel with the number you input will not be selected.
The selection can be confirmed with ENTER.
The selected fixtures or channels will be displayed in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window in yellow characters.
Press the STORE key once (LED within the key is on). Using the touchscreen or left mouse click, select the
desired group key in the GROUP window on the display. The selected fixtures are now stored in this group (STORE
LED is off).
You can now name this group using the keyboard. Enter the name or description and confirm with ENTER.
Press the CLEAR key once. This deselects the group of fixtures and dimmer channels.
3.3.2 Calling up groups
Groups can be called up by:
A left mouse click
Direct touch on screen
Pressing the GROUP key once, entering the group number with the keyboard or keypad and confirming with
ENTER.
Press the GROUP key once. Pressing the ENTER key once will lock GROUP as preset in the Command Line. Then,
enter the group number on the numeric keypad and call it up pressing ENTER.
46
By pressing the CLEAR key once, all selected Fixtures and Channels are deselected (no longer displayed in yellow).
Proceed as follows to separately activate selected Fixtures/Dimmers or called-up groups in the desired/stored order:
NEXT key once within a group or selection: forwards
PREV key once within a group or selection: backwards
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Pressing the SET key once reselects all Fixtures and dimmer channels in the group.
If there are more groups than can be displayed in the GROUP window, you can scroll down within every “active“
window (title bar in dark blue) on every screen, by using the encoder wheel on the right of the respective
touchscreen or the up/down key.
3 . 3 . 3 Moving a button within window
or
Press the MOVE key once (MOVE LED lights up)
Using the touch screen or left mouse key, click on the GROUP key and hold it down (a small hand appears).
Drag the key to another location within this window and then release it.
press MOVE twice (LED flashes)
Using the touch screen or left mouse key, click on the GROUP key and hold it down (a small hand appears)
Drag the key to another location between two buttons within this window and then release it.
3.3.4 Copying a button within window
Press the COPY key once (LED is on).
Select the Group Keys in the GROUP window. By selecting several groups one after the other, that set of
groups can be copied together
Press the AT key once (LED is on).
Click on the position for the copied group in the GROUP window.
Confirm with ENTER.
Micro
47
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3 . 4 Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET)
Individual fixture functions can always be accessed directly and multiple fixtures can be controlled at the same
time. The selection will determine which fixtures react to Direct Access procedures (selected fixtures will be
marked in yellow writing in the FIXTURE window).
Within the FIXTURE window, you can locate, select and execute all functions for all fixtures.
Select the fixtures, where you wish to modify a value (the selected fixtures will be displayed in yellow characters).
Selection:
Call up a fixture group. 3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS
or:
Select fixtures using the touchscreen.
or:
Select fixtures by using the Fixture key and the numeric keypad. 3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and
Dimmer GROUPS
or:
A left mouse click on the individual fixtures.
Select the requested function by clicking on the relevent key on the Preset Control Bar. Switch on the Preset
Control Bar 3.4.8 Options in the Fixture Window.
Values can now be changed via the encoders, located below the TFT display (all functions of the encoders
will be displayed directly on the screen):
The various functions can now be toggled by pressing the FEATURE key.
or:
The Trackball affects the PAN/TILT function only (if switched to Pan & Tilt).
or:
The Trackball affects the dimmer values only.
or:
Any value may be altered by clicking and holding on it with the middle mouse key and moving the mouse.
48
For storing settings 4 Cues and Sequences
3.7 Creating and calling up Presets
For creating Presets
To call up or create Effects 6 Effects
If you wish to modify the selection or the activated values of the fixtures:
Press the CLEAR key:
When pressing the CLEAR key the first time, the selection of fixtures will be deselected from the OUTPUT window
(yellow characters turn grey).
The modified (active) values will be kept and displayed with red background.
Press the CLEAR key again:
When pressing the CLEAR key the second time, the activation of modified values will be canceled (they will no
longer have a red background).
Press the CLEAR key one more time:
When pressing the CLEAR key the third time, all modified values will be reset (default or to their original setting
prior to the activation).
After pressing the CLEAR key for the first time, the yellow LED in this key will flash. This means that only the
selection was deleted. When you select other fixtures or dimmer channels now, the yellow LED will no longer flash.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Auch die Selektion von einzelnen Scannern kann gelöscht werden.
Press OFF key 1x (LED is on).
Click on the Fixture key in the Group Window or on the Fixture Name in the Fixture Sheet.
You can also deactivate parameter values of individual fixtures (Output will be set to Default or to an outputing
cue value).
Press OFF key 1x (LED is on).
Click on the activated value in the Fixture Sheet.
You can also delete activated values of entire function groups of selected fixtures (Output will be set to Default
of activated cue value).
Press OFF key 1x (LED is on).
Press a key for the respective function on the Preset Control Bar or click on that function within the Fixture
Sheet.
1 x ALIGN
3 . 4 . 1 The ALIGN Function
2 x ALIGN
3 x ALIGN
4 x ALIGN
Micro
The ALIGN function allows you to apply ratios to ranges of parameters. Four different modes are available.
ALIGN key pressed once (LED is on).
ALIGN key pressed once (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the value of the first selected Channel/Fixture will be taken as the starting
value (will not be changed), while the value of the last selected Channel/Fixture value will be the one modified
most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.
ALIGN key pressed twice (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the value of the last selected Channel/Fixture will be taken as the starting
value (will not be changed), while the value of the first selected Channel/Fixture will be the one modified most,
and all values in between will be distributed evenly.
ALIGN key pressed 3 times (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the value of the selected Channel/Fixture(s) “in the middle“ will be taken
as the starting value (will not be changed). The value of the first and last selected Channel/Fixture will be the
ones modified most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.
ALIGN key pressed 4 times (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the middle value will be the one modified most, the values of the first and
last will not change, and the values in between will be distributed evenly.
49
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3.4.2 PAUSE Function
With the Pause Function you can temporarily freeze (park) entire fixtures or just individual parameters of fixtures.
After the activation of the Pause Function, no further changes will be output by the console. But you can still
change and store fixtures or single functions internally. Output is shown in the STAGE -window, but not on the real
stage.
You can park single fixtures with all parameters. Parked fixtures are displayed by a blue bar on the side of the
name and all functions.
Press PAUSE key 1x (LED is on).
Click on fixture or fixture key in the Group Window or click on fixture in the Fixture Sheet.
You can also park single parameters of the fixtures. Parked parameters are displayed by a blue bar on the side of
the name and all functions.
Press PAUSE key 1x (LED is on).
Click on the functions in the Preset Control Bar (Switch on Preset Control Bar 3.4.8 Options in the Fixture
Window) or directly on the parameters in the Fixture Sheet.
Parked fixtures, functions or parameters can be released again either individually or together.
Press GO+ key 1x (LED is on).
Click on fixture or fixture key in the Group window or click on fixture in the Fixture Sheet.
or:
Click on the functions within the Preset Control Bar or directly on the parameters in the Fixture Sheet.
50
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 4 . 3 FADE and DELA
Y times in the FIXTURE window
DELAY
Additionally to the standard (Basic) FADE and DELAY times, individual durations can also be set for the individual parameters in the FIXTURE window.
You will need these settings when creating Cues, in order to be able to work with different FADE or DELAY times
for individual parameters.
Press the Values/Fades/Delays key as displayed above in the „Fades“ picture.
oder:
When you press the TIME key once, the fixture sheet will switch to FADE time mode**.
. The second time, the fixture sheet will switch to DELAY time mode.**.
If in the windows options Automatic has not been selected, the display will not switch over. The currently
selected FADE or DELAY function will be displayed only for the Encoder labels. 3.4.8 Options in the Fixture
window
Choose a function, where you wish to program a time, other than the Basic time.
Now you can modify the IND. FADE time or IND. DELAY time (individual Fade/Delay Times) for the selected fixtures
using the encoders. While modifying, you can use different options.
Choosing options:
Above the left Encoder, a second additional button with the currently chosen option will be displayed.
By pressing this button, you can select the respective next option.
Or:
By pressing the right arrow, a menu will open, in which all options are displayed and can be chosen directly.
- Single (For Active): The time can be adjusted for each individual Function (Attribute). If “Single For Active“ is
chosen, only times for activated values can be changed.
- Feature (For Active): The time can be adjusted for the chosen Feature (e.g.: Gobo1, containing e.g.: Gobo1 and
Gobo1 Rotation). If “Feature For Active“ is chosen, only times for activated values can be changed.
- All (For Active): All times for all Attributes are adjusted. If “All For Active“ is chosen, only times for activated
values can be changed.
- Defined (For Active): The time can be adjusted for the fixed Attributes. Pressing the left arrow on the side of the
Defined button will open the “Define Attributes to Set Time“ menu.
Selecting individual Attributes:
In this menu, all Attributes are displayed with a green (selected) or black (deselected) background. Pressing on
one of the functions will select or deselect it, respectively.
Micro
51
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3.4.4 Modulator values in the Fixtures window
The 4 modulator columns of the respective features show the values on which the effects are based – the column
having a violet background. The values will be inserted automatically when an effect is transferred to the
modulators using the TOP command. You can, however, enter values directly into the modulator columns. . 6.8
- Modulator Table; here you find the entered functions, e.g. SIN, SWING, etc.
- Modulator Size; here you find the entered size of a function, ranging from -200 to 200
- Modulator Speed: here you find the entered function speed
- Modulator Phase: here you find the entered angle to shift the effect
The TOP - button in combination with a target, will synchronize the effect modulators.
3 . 4 . 5 Deactivating values individually (Knock out)
Before storing, it is possible to select which parameters of which fixtures are to be stored. Values that are to be
stored are indicated by a red background or by red numbers.
2.4.2. Encoder (Activation) Grouping
By default, parameters within functions are partly activated together.
In order to split the activation for a function, press Edit key and touch on the set activation (red background)
before storing it.
press EDIT
choose function in Fixture Sheet
This will open the input window.
The title bar will display the chosen function (Attribute).
Pressing the Deactivate button will cancel the activation of this function.
52
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 4 . 6 FIXTURE OPTION
In the Fixture Sheet, you can adapt different basic settings for each individual Fixture.
press EDIT
touch on a Fixture and the FIXTURE OPTION window will open.
The Fixture can be renamed using the keyboard.
Next to Type the type of Fixture is displayed, next to ID: the corresponding number, and next to Patch the start
address for this Fixture.
- Pressing the PAN NORMAL key (display changes to PAN INVERSE) will invert the output of the PAN parameter.
- Pressing the TILT NORMAL key (display changes to TILT INVERSE) will invert the output of the TILT parameter.
- Pressing the NO SWAP key (display changes to SWAPPED) will swap the output of the PAN and TILT parameters
so that the Pan parameter on the console controls the tilt of the fixture and vice versa.
- Pressing the WITH MASTER key (display changes to NO MASTER will be indicated by a dark blue background),
the Dimmer value will be output without regard to the level of the GRANDMASTER.
If a Fixture was modified in this window, the Fixture’s name will be displayed on a blue background in the Fixture
Sheet. These changes can also be set while patching Fixtures. 2.5 Selecting DMX addresses for Fixtures
With the <<< key, you can switch to the previous Fixture. With the >>> key, you can switch to the next Fixture.
With the X key, you can close the window. .
3 . 4 . 7 AUTO-SORT Function in the FIXTURE Window
Pressing the „Auto Cols“ key (dark background) will move the function column, for which the value is currently
being changed, automatically to the left.
Selecting Presets or functions in the Preset Window ( 3.7 Create Presets) will move the respective column in
the Fixture Window to the left.
Pressing the „Auto Rows“ key (dark background) will move up those fixtures, selected via groups or directly by
fixture key and numeric keypad.
3 . 4 . 8 SORT Function in the FIXTURE Window
Pressing the SORT key will update the sorting (à below) in the Fixture Window.
3 . 4 . 9 Options in the FIXTURE Window
Touch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar (yellow dot).
Or:
Right click with the mouse on the headline bar.
The NEW FIXTURE SHEET OPTIONS window will open
Micro
If pressing the Sorting & Readout button (displayed with a green font):
Layer Display: By pressing the respective function, the following values will be displayed as basic setting.
- Preset and Values: The FIXTURE window will show presets or values if no presets are used.
53
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
- Fades: FADE times will be displayed.
- Delays: DELAY times will be displayed.
- Values Only: Only values (without presets) will be displayed, but no effects and profiles.
- Output: The DMX output values will be displayed, but without taking any profiles into account!
- Executor ID: The Executor’s number and page will be displayed.
- Cue ID: The sequence’s number and the respective Cue will be displayed.
- Automatic: If this key is pressed, the display will automatically toggle between the different options when
toggling with the TIME key.
- Layer Control: If “On“ is chosen, a control bar appears below the Scanners. By pressing on the individual buttons
on the control bar, the display in the window will be switched accordingly.
- Preset Control: If “On“ is chosen, a control bar appears below the Scanners. For each function, there is a separate button. By pressing on the individual buttons on the control bar, the appropriate function will be activated and
can be modified using the Encoders.
In the right upper corner of each button, you’ll find a small square. If this square has .a black background, the
respective function has not been modified. If the background is red, something has been changed in this function.
If pressing the Sorting & Readout button (displayed with a green font):
Sort by:
With the respective key, you can determine according to which criteria the fixtures within the column are to be
sorted.
- Numbers: Fixtures will be sorted by numbers in the FIXTURE window.
- Names: Fixtures will be sorted by name.
- Selected: The selected Fixtures will be moved upwards.
- Active: Fixtures for which a value is activated
activated, will be moved upwards.
Sort Directions:
- Values: Fixtures will be sorted according to highest dimmer value.
- Sort Upwards: Sorting by ascending values.
- Sort Downwards: Sorting by descending values.
-READOUT: Pressing this function, you can switch between the following display options.
- Percent: Values will be displayed as percentages.
- Percent +: Values will be displayed as percentage values; interim values will be displayed next to the figure in
form of 3 dots.
- Decimal: Values will be displayed as decimal numbers (0–255).
- HEX: Values will be displayed as hexadecimal numbers (0–FF).
- FONT: By pressing this function, you can switch the font size in the FIXTURE window between Huge (very big),
Big and Small.
This window can be deleted by pressing the DELETE WINDOW key.
Pressing the X key will close the Option Window.
These settings will all be stored when VIEWS are stored ( 3.2 Storing VIEWS).
54
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
If the Settings button is pressed (displayed with text in green):
Using the respective button, you can display the following items
- Physical Values: in P/T degrees can be displayed
- Display Color Mix: CMY can be displayed
- Display Wheels: Gobos can be displayed
- Programmer only: The Fixture sheet will only show those fixtures and their features, whose values were
changed; to change values not displayed, press on the magenta PROGRAMMER ONLY button in the Layer
Control bar so that the button turns grey, to display the complete Fixture sheet.
3 . 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL
SHEET)
The individual dimmer channels can be accessed directly at any time.
Select the channels, which you wish to modify (selected channels will be displayed in yellow characters).
Selection:
- Select a dimmer group. 3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS
Or:
10 Command Line
- Select dimmers via the CHANNEL key and the numeric keypad.
Or:
- With Touchscreenn or a left mouse click on the individual channels.
Or:
- Make a left mouse click on the first channel and drag with the mouse holding the left mouse key down (creates
a Loop
Loop), all channels in this loop are selected
selected.
Values can be modified
- with the encoders (Encoder assignment is displayed on the screen above) or with the wheel.
Or:
- By direct entry into the Command Line (AT functions) you can also enter dimmer values 10 Command Line
Or:
- Select channels with a left mouse click and hold middle the mouse key down and drag; the value will be
modified
Micro
55
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3 . 5 . 1 CHANNEL Mode
Activate the CHANNEL Mode with the CHANNEL FADER keys this will toggle your executor faders so that they are
now channel faders.
The assignment of Channels and Faders can be changed via the CHANNEL FADER keys (for example: 1–20, 21–40,
etc.).
The assignment of a channel number to a Fader is listed on the TFT displays above the faders.
By pressing the indiviual CLEAR keys above each fader on the touch screen individual channels, which have been
modified manually, can be deselected and deactivated.
The respective channel can be selected using the physical key above the Fader.
- In the TFT displays above the Faders, the assignment of channel numbers and Faders will be displayed along with
any names that have been given to individual channels.
- In CHANNEL mode, the individual channel values can be set with the Faders.
- The respective channel can be hidden using the physical key under the Fader.
In order to modify the selection or the active values of dimmer channels:
Press the CLEAR key:
When pressing the CLEAR key the first time, the selection of dimmer channels will be deselected from the OUTPUT window (yellow characters turn grey).
The modified (active) values will be kept and displayed with red background.
Press the CLEAR key again:
When pressing the CLEAR key the second time, the activation of modified values will be canceled (they will no
longer have a red background).
Press the CLEAR key one more time:
When pressing the CLEAR key the third time, all modified values will be reset (default or to their original setting
prior to the activation).
After pressing the CLEAR key for the first time, the yellow LED in this key will flash. This means that only the
selection was deleted. When you select other fixtures or dimmer channels now, the yellow LED will no longer
flash.
56
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 4 . 1 The ALIGN Function
The ALIGN function allows you to apply ratios to ranges of parameters. Four different modes are available.
ALIGN key pressed once (LED is on).
1x ALIGN <
e.g. moving on the X-axis
2x ALIGN >
e.g.moving on the X-axis
3x ALIGN ><
e.g.changing PAN-values
4x ALIGN <>
e.g.changing dimmer values
ALIGN key pressed once (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the value of the first selected Channel/Fixture will be taken as the starting
value (will not be changed), while the value of the last selected Channel/Fixture value will be the one modified
most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.
ALIGN key pressed twice (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the value of the last selected Channel/Fixture will be taken as the starting
value (will not be changed), while the value of the first selected Channel/Fixture will be the one modified most,
and all values in between will be distributed evenly.
ALIGN key pressed 3 times (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the value of the selected Channel/Fixture(s) “in the middle“ will be taken
as the starting value (will not be changed). The value of the first and last selected Channel/Fixture will be the
ones modified most, and all values in between will be distributed evenly.
ALIGN key pressed 4 times (LED is on).
When changing the activated values, the middle value will be the one modified most, the values of the first and
last will not change, and the values in between will be distributed evenly.
Order of selection is important; the first and the last selected lamps are also the first and last value in alignement
3.5.3 PAUSE Function
With the Pause Function you can temporarily freeze (park) dimmer channels•. After the activation of the Pause
Function, no further changes will be output by the console - only the original value will be kept and be output .
But you can still change and store dimmer channels internally.
Press PAUSE key 1x (LED is on).
Click on Dimmer key in the Group Window or click on dimmer channels in the Channel or Fader Sheet.
Parked dimmer channels will be displayed with a blue bar.Parked dimmer channels can also be released either
entirely or separately.
Press GO+ key 1x (LED is on).
Click on dimmer key in the Group window or click on dimmer channels in the Channel or Fader Sheet.
Micro
57
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3 . 5 . 4 FADE and DELA
Y times in the CHANNEL window
DELAY
In addition to the standard (basic) FADE times, individual durations can also be set for the individual
functions in the CHANNEL window (not in the FADER CHANNEL window).
These settings are needed when creating Cues, so that you can work with different FADE or DELAY times for individual channels.
Open CHANNEL Window
Press Values, so that the button displays Fades or Delays.
Or:
When pressing the TIME key once, this will switch the channel sheet to the FADE time mode. The second time,
this will switch the channel sheet to the DELAY time mode.
If in the Window options Automatic was not selected, the display will not switch over. The currently selected
function of the FADE or DELAY Command Line will be displayed only for the Encoder labels. 3.5.7 Options
within the CHANNEL window
Now you can modify the IND. FADE or IND. DELAY time for the selected dimmer channels using the left encoder
(Individual Fade/Delay Time).
When carrying out modifications, different options can be used. These options can be necessary when times for
Scanners and Dimmers are changed simultaneously.
Selecting options:
Above the left decoder, a second additional button will be displayed showing the currently selected option.
By pressing this button, you can select the next option available.
Or:
Pressing on the right arrow will open a menu, in which all options are displayed and can be selected directly.
- Single (For Active): The time can be adjusted for each individual Function (Attribute). If “Single For Active“ is
chosen, only times for activated values can be changed.
- Feature (For Active): The time can be adjusted for the chosen Feature (e.g.: Gobo1, containing e.g.: Gobo1
and Gobo1 Rotation). If “Feature For Active“ is chosen, only times for activated values can be changed.
- All (For Active): All times for all Attributes are adjusted. If “All For Active“ is chosen, only times for activated
values can be changed.
- Defined (For Active): The time can be adjusted for the fixed Attributes. Pressing the left arrow on the side of
the Defined button will open the “Define Attributes to Set Time“ menu.
Selecting individual Attributes:
In this menu, all Attributes are displayed with a green (selected) or black (deselected) background. Pressing on
one of the functions will select or deselect it, respectively.
58
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 5 . 5 Link Fader-Function in the CHANNEL window
If the Link Fader function is activated, paging through in CHANNEL Mode will keep the current fader range in the
Channel / Fader sheet
3 . 5 . 6 AUTO-SORT-Function in the CHANNEL window
If the AUTO-SORT-function is activated (key has a black background), the selected channels in the CHANNEL
window will automatically be moved to the left and upwards.
Using AUTO-SORT in conjunction with Link-Fader allows channel selections to be transferred to the faders when
in channel mode ( CHANNEL mode).
3 . 5 . 7 Options within the CHANNEL or Fader window
Touch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar (yellow dot).
Or:
With a right mouse click on top line the CHANNEL SHEET OPTIONS window will open.
The Channel or Fader Sheet Options window will open.
The Display button must be pressed (displayed with green font).
Layer Display (only Values and Outputs in the FADER CHANNEL window possible):
By pressing the respective keys, the following basic values will be displayed:
- Values only: Values are displayed.
- Fades: FADE times will be displayed.
- Delays: DELAY times will be displayed.
- Output: The DMX output values are displayed.
- Executor ID: The Executor’s number and page are displayed (only valid for Executor keys).
- Cue ID: The Sequence’s number and respective Cue are displayed (only valid for Executor keys).
- Automatic: If this key is pressed, the display will automatically swap in this window when using the TIME key.
- Layer Control: If “On“ is chosen, a control bar appears below the Scanners. By pressing on the individual
buttons on the control bar, the display in the window will be switched accordingly.
- Preset Control: If “On“ is chosen, a control bar appears below the Scanners. For each function, there is a separate button. By pressing on the individual buttons on the control bar, the appropriate function will be
activated and can be modified using the Encoders.
In the right upper corner of each button, you’ll find a small square. If this square has a black background, the
respective function has not been modified. If the background is red, something has been changed in this
function.
The Sorting & Readout button must be pressed (displayed with a green font).
Sort by:
With the respective key, you can define the channels’ sorting order in the window.
- Numbers: Within the CHANNEL window channels are sorted by numbers.
- Names: Channels will be sorted by name.
- Selected: The selected channels will be moved to left/above.
- Active: Channels for which a value is activated
activated, will be moved upwards.
- Values: Channels will be sorted by highest value.
Micro
59
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Sort Direction:
- Sort Upwards: Sorting by ascending numbers.
- Sort Downwards: Sorting by descending numbers.
Readout:
By pressing this function, you can choose the display criteria for the values.
- Percent: Values will be displayed as percentages.
- Percent+: Values will be given as percentage values; interim values will be displayed next to the figure inform of
dots.
- Decimal: Values will be given as decimal numbers (0–255).
- HEX: Values will be given as hexadecimal numbers (0–FF).
Font: By pressing the function, you can switch the font size in the Channel or Fader window between Huge (very
big), Big and Small. The Settings button must be pressed (displayed with a green font).
Orientation: By pressing this function, you can choose between sorting the channels from left to right or from top to
bottom.
Wrap Around: If “On“ has been selected, the size of the Channels will be adjusted automatically, when the
number of Channels changes.
Namefield: If “On“ has been selected, the Channel names are displayed.
Column: The figure indicates, how many channels will be displayed in one column. Clicking on that figure, you
can enter a new number via keyboard; confirm with ENTER. The new number will automatically be taken over.
The Channel window can be deleted by pressing the Delete Window key.
By pressing the X key, the Option window will be closed.
All these settings (excl. “LINK“) will be stored when storing the VIEWS ( 3.2 Storing VIEWS).
3 . 5 . 8 DIMMER OPTION
In the Channel Sheet, you can adapt different basic settings for each individual Dimmer channel.
Press Edit key and choose the channel on the Touchscreen.
The CHANNEL OPTION window will open.
The Dimmer channel can be renamed using the keyboard.
Next to ‘Type’ the type of Dimmer is displayed, next to ‘ID’ the corresponding number, and next to ‘Patch’ the DMX
address for this Channel.
Pressing the WITH MASTER key (display changes to NO MASTER, will be indicated by a dark blue background), the
Dimmer channel will be output without regard to the GRANDMASTER.
If a Dimmer channel was modified in this window, the Dimmer channel’s number or name will be displayed on a
blue background in the Channel Sheet.
These modifications can also be defined while patching Dimmer channels. 2.2.2 Selecting DMX addresses for
Dimmers
With the <<< key, you can switch to the previous Dimmer channel. With the >>> key, you can switch to the next
Dimmer channel.
With the X key, you can close the window.
60
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 7 Creating and calling up Presets
There are certain values for the functions of fixtures, which will be needed again and again, for example the
values for individual colours of the color wheel. These values can be programmed as presets in the respective
PRESET window and then be reselected.
If you have presets for the fixtures be created automatically (CREATE PRESETS), these pre-recorded presets will
2.1
1 Creating Presets automatically
be available in the respective windows.
2.11
Pictures of the gobos are displayed only if they are
stored in library.
Create a window for all presets you want to use - select them from preset-pools.
In the GROUP window, select those fixtures, for which you want to create a Preset, by a touch or mouse
click (fixtures have to be displayed in yellow in the FIXTURE window).
Select the Preset group for which you want to create a Preset on the display, using the Touchscreen or by a
left mouse click on the title bar. For example: In the Preset window PAN/TILT.
Values and positions can be changed by:
- Encoders (all functions and the assignment will be displayed on the right display above the encoders),
- Trackball (only PAN /TILT), if activated,
- Level Wheel (only for dimmer values),
- Middle mouse key (left click on a value in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window; drag the mouse while holding the
middle mouse key will change the value).
- Switch on the Trackball by pressing the TRACKBALL ON button (the integrated LED must be on). Now you can
control the selected fixtures via the trackball (PAN/TILT) . Changed (active) values will be displayed in the OUTPUT window by a red background colour.
There are two types of Presets:
- Selective: Can only be used for those Scanners, for which it was saved. Will be indicated by a red triangle in
the left upper corner of the saved Preset button.
- Universal: Can be used for all Scanners of the same type, even if not all will be saved.
Additionally you can store presets including several functions on one key. These presets can be created in any
preset group. Preset Filter ON: only the functions (Attributes) of this Preset group will be stored into this preset;
with Preset Filter OFF, all currently active functions will be stored into this Preset.
- While holding down the STORE key, make a preselection by pressing the appropriate button (Universal,
Selective, Preset Filter ON or OFF).
- Release STORE key (STORE LED comes on). Select the required location in the PAN/TILT window on the display
by a simple touch or with left click of the mouse. These Pan & Tilt values are now stored in this location (STORE
LED is off).
- Enter a name for the preset using the keyboard: confirm with ENTER.
If you want to store more presets for the same fixtures and functions ( 3.7.5 Update Preset).
Micro
61
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3 . 7 . 1 Moving Preset Keys within the Window
Press MOVE key 1x (LED comes on).
Activate the key in the respective window by either using the touchscreen or a left mouse click on the key and
drag (a hand symbol appears) to the required location within this window.
You can also insert preset keys.
Press MOVE key 2x (LED flashes).
Activate the key in the respective preset window using the touchscreen or make a left mouse click
Press AT
Activate the desired location between two other keys.
Press ENTER
The following keys will all be moved by one position to the right.
3 . 7 . 2 Copying Presets
Press the COPY key once (LED is on).
Select the Preset Keys in the respective PRESET Window. By selecting mulitple presets, several presets can be
copied at the same time.
Press the AT key 1x (LED is on).
Click on the destination for the copied presets in the PRESET Window.
Press the ENTER key once.
3 . 7 . 3 Selecting Presets
Select the Fixtures or Dimmers, for which you want to call up a preset (Fixtures/Dimmers have to be displayed
in yellow). Now, the individual presets can be called up for the selected Fixtures. The called-up presets and their
names will be displayed in the FIXTURE windows.
If you select a preset directly, without having selected Fixtures or Dimmer channels, all Fixtures and Dimmers, for
which presets had been created, will be selected. The preset can now be called up by pressing the respective key.
Using the Fader next to the display, you can either define Preset Fade times or fade over presets manually.
Press the key above the Fader once (red LED is on). Select the desired Fade time using the Fader. The selected Fade
time will be used when presets are being called up.
Press the key above the Fader once more (green LED is on). Select your Presets. With the Fader, you can now fade
over towards the selected Preset. Default setting for the Fader to fade just upwards or in both directions 2.13
Settings in the DEFAULTS menu below the Executor Defaults Crossfade.
62
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 7 . 4 FREEZE Function
By activating the FREEZE function, called-up Presets can be locked. As long as the FREEZE Function is switched
on, the called-up preset can not be overwritten by any Cues, Sequences or Chasers.
Press the FREEZE key once (LED is on).
Select a Preset – the selected Preset will be activated and can no longer be modified by Cues, Sequences or
Chasers.
In order to deactivate the FREEZE function, press the FREEZE key once more (LED is off).
3.7.5
Update Preset
In order to change presets
Press the EDIT key (LED is on).
Click on or touch one of the Preset Keys (the LED will blink, the preset key will display EDIT). The used fixtures/
channels are being selected and the values will be activated.
Make your required modifications.
Press the UPDATE key.
A window appears, where you can either store the preset by pressing the OK key or cancel the modification by
pressing CANCEL.
If you want to change more than one preset, you can select another preset by pressing the EDIT key right after
the modification, followed by the NEXT key. Before the activation of the new selected preset, a window will open,
where you can store the 1st preset by pressing the OK key or where you can cancel the modification by pressing
CANCEL. The second preset can only be activated after this.
Or:
When executing sequences you can modify and store single values of presets directly.
Play back a cue, in which presets are to be modified. Now you can modify this cue by direct access (the UP3.4 Accessing fixtures directly / 3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly
DATE key LED is on).
Press the Update key once.
The UPDATE window will open.
By pressing this key, you can toggle between “only original contents“ and “add new contents“.
- Only original contents: Upon updating the preset, only the changes on fixtures/channels which have already
been used in this preset will be stored.
- Add new contents: Upon updating the preset, all changes will be stored regardless at to whether those
fixtures/channels have already been used in this preset.
Pressing the “Update Preset“ key will update that preset being displayed with a blue background. You can select
another preset using the encoder.
Pressing the “Update All Presets“ key will update all presets listed in the chart.
Pressing the Save as default key will store all (pre)- settings as default (e.g.: Only original contents oder Add new
contents). These settings will be ready the next time you open the Update menu.
3.7.6 Embedded Presets
Micro
With this function, you can „embed“ preset values into other presets, so you can quickly change multiple
presets. As the embedded value is nothing but a link to the original preset, all changes of the original preset will
be contained in all those presets containing this link. All Embedded Presets, as well as all presets having a link to
another preset, can be distinguished by a black frame in the Preset Sheet.
63
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Creating an Embedded Preset:
call up a preset
adjust additional values or positions
use STORE to save the new preset to an empty button in the Preset Pool – mind the preset filter setting. The
black frame around the new preset indicates an Embedded Preset.
Example:
Preset 1
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
value 1
- activate Preset 1 and save it with an additional value as Preset 2. In the Preset Pool, Preset 2 will be displayed
with a black frame indicating an Embedded Preset. Create Preset 3 in the same way. If you change Preset 1, this
will automatically change Presets 2 and 3.
Link zu
value 1
Editing an Embedded Preset:
press EDIT
call up a preset – in the Fixture Sheet, all Embedded Presets will now be displayed with a black frame
make your changes
press UPDATE and confirm with OK
If you change the values of all Embedded Presets, they will become a „normal“ preset after an update. If an
Embedded Preset or a part of an Embedded Preset (e.g. only the PAN channel) is kept, the character of the
Embedded Preset will also be kept.
value 2
Preset 2
link zu
value 1
value 3
Preventing changes by previous Presets:
call up the Embedded Preset
press STORE (red LED is on)
press the button of the Preset and confirm with OVERWRITE
The black frame around the Preset will vanish and the link to the Embedded Preset will be cancelled.
Example:
Preset 3
Preset 1
- Activate and save Preset 3. The link to value 1 will be cancelled, value 1 will be entered in Preset 4 (the black
frame in the Preset Pool will vanish). If you now change Preset 1, Preset 3 will remain unchanged.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
value 1
Link zu
value 1
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○
value 2
Preset 2
copy
Link zu
value 1
Copying an Embedded Preset:
value 2
Preset 3
press COPY
press on the Preset
press on a free button, to which the Preset is to be copied
Example:
COPY
press on Preset 2
press on a free button and rename the new preset to Preset 3
Important: The link to Preset 1 will be kept in Preset 3, even if you delete Preset 2 after the copying
process (see graphics on the left).
64
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
3 . 8 Deleting Groups, Sequences, Views etc.
Working with Command Line:
press DELETE
press button Preset / Page / Group / View / Executor
or
select Sequenz
type in number on the numeric block (e.g. 1.16
for Executor 16 on Page 1)
confirm with ENTER
writings in red are not possible; if no page number is typed
the elements of the current page will be deleted
Micro
For all following Deletions, the DELETE key has to be pressed in advance (LED is on).
Deleting Groups:
Select the respective Group by touch or left mouse click.
or:
Press the GROUP key. Enter a Group number using the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER.
Deleting Presets:
Select Preset in the respective window by touch or left mouse click.
or:
Press the PRESET key. Enter a Preset Function number (e.g.: 3 for Gobo) followed by „.“ and the Preset number;
confirm with ENTER.
Deleting VIEW Assignments: Select a VIEW with the VIEW key on the side of the numeric keypad, via the
Touchscreen or a left mouse click.
Deleting a VIEW: Press the VIEW key (LED is on). The SELECT VIEW window appears; now select the window to
be deleted. The VIEW Name will be maintained, but without any contents. All assignments to VIEW keys are now
deleted.
Deleting a MACRO: Press the MACRO key (LED is on). The SELECT MACRO window appears; now select the
macro to be deleted. The MACRO Name will be maintained, but witout any contents. All assignments to MACRO
keys are now deleted.
Deleting an EXECUT
OR: Press the desired EXECUTOR key.
EXECUTOR:
or:
Deleting the EXECUTOR on the current page:
– Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Enter the EXECUTOR number via the
numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER.
Deleting the EXECUTOR on another page:
– Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Now, enter the PAGE number.
Then, press the full stop key and the number of the EXECUTOR and confirm with ENTER.
Example: EXECUTOR 5 on PAGE 3 is to be deleted:
Entry: [DELETE key] [EXECUTOR button] [3] [.] [5] [ENTER]
Or:
– Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Enter the EXECUTOR number via the
numeric keypad.
– Press the PAGE key next to the numeric keypad (LED is on). Enter the PAGE number via the numeric keypad and
confirm with ENTER.
Deleting Sequences: Press the SEQUENCE key. Enter the number of Sequence via the numeric keypad and
confirm with ENTER.
Deleting CUES: Press the SEQUENCE key. Enter the number of Sequence via the numeric keypad. Press the
CUE key and enter the cue number via numeric keypad; confirm with ENTER.
If no sequence number is entered, the Cue of the Master (default) sequence is deleted.
Deleting a PAGE: Press the PAGE key next to the numeric keypad. Enter the PAGE number via the numeric
keypad and confirm with ENTER. The complete PAGE with all EXECUTOR faders and buttons
is deleted.
65
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
3 . 9 MAtricks
3.9.1 Intelligent Selecting
Here, you can create, store and directly call up different Selection groups.
Find out, what the different combinations and the resulting options can be used for, by simply trying them out. The
listing of the individual functions will only contain and explain a few of the many options.
Proceed as follows:
In order to reate groups:
open the MAtricks SETUP
choose function and value (STORE button lights green)
press STORE (LED lightsred)
press empty button in MAtrickspool and insert name
In order to apply groups:
select lamps (the order of selection is the same order the Next / Prev. - buttons are working)
press button (in MATricksPool)
press NEXT / PREV. to select lamps and set values
In the Matrix pool, press the “SETUP“ button.
The “MAtricks Settings“ menu will open.
Next/Prev: Move individual or several selected fixtures within the whole selection.
E.g. select fixtures. When pressing the “Next/Prev < “ or “ > “ key for the first time, the first/last fixture remains
selected. When pressing the key once more, the next will be selected, and so forth. This function can also be
operated by using the NEXT/PREV keys.
Groups: Here, you can define the number of fixtures that are to be moved simultaneously within the selection.
E.g. Press the “Groups > “ key, until a „3“ appears. Now, each time you press the “Next“ key, the next 3 fixtures of
the whole selection will always be selected.
Interleave: To divide the whole selection into groups.
e.g.: If you select a 3 under „Interleave“, the next 6 fixtures (3 groups of 3 fixtures each) will be skipped, when
pressing the “Next“ key.
To select the skipped fixtures, you can choose individual groups. If you had entered a value under “Interleave“, 1st
will be displayed for the first group on the right of “Interleave Next/Prev“. Using the “ < “ or “ > “ keys, you can
switch over to the next group. When moving the selection, the other fixtures will now be selected.
or:
Interleave Next/Prev: E.g.: You want to select each fifth fixture of the whole selection and move this
subselection.
Next/Prev must be „Off“. Switch it off by shortly pressing into the center of “Next/Prev“ to “ < 2nd > “. The display
will switch to “Off“.
Then, press “ > “ under “Settings“ next to “Interleave“, until a 5 appears. Now, you have selected only the first,
sixth, eleventh, .... fixture.
By shortly pressing “ < or > “ next to „Interleave Next/Prev“, you can move the selection by one position up or
down.
If you want to move several fixtures simultaneously, you can define this under “Groups“.
66
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Additionally:
Wings: Allows you to split and mirror the whole selection.
E.g.: When you have a setting of 2, the complete selection of fixtures will be split in the middle. The set selection
will now be executed in the first half from the first fixture to the middle, and in the second half from the last
fixture backwards to the middle.
3.9.2 Mirroring when Entering PPan/Tilt
an/Tilt values
Mirror Wingstyle: When entereing values for PAN/TILT, these can be mirrored individually or together.
E.g.: Take 10 Scanners (mounted in a row from left to right) and select them 1-10.
Now, set “Wings“ on 2 digits and “Mirror Wingstyle“ on Pan.
Now, when you modify the „Pan“ value, the first 5 Scanners move in one direction and the others into the other
one.
3.9.3 Storing settings
The modified settings can be stored individually or together.
In the MAtricks Setup, you’ll find a “Store“ button next to each function. If a function has been changed, this
buttons will automatically be activated (dark green background). By shortly pressing the button, you can switch
on (activated) or off (deactivated) the storing function. When storing, only the activated functions will be stored.
To store, press the STORE key (LED in on).
Now, choose the desired button in the MAtricks pool. Directly after storing, you can assign a name for the
stored setting.
By cklicking on the button, you can call up the stored setting, and the button will be displayed with a dark
green background. You can combine multiple stored settings by calling them up in sequence.
By pressing the “Reset“ button, all settings in the MAtricks Setup will be switched off.
3.9.4 Selective Copying
With the Circular Copy function, you can copy or move set values of fixtures to other fixtures.
Copying values
Example:-Select a fixture and set the Dimmer value to 100%.
Select the fixture and further fixtures.
By pressing the “ > “ button, the Dimmer of the fixture that was selected as next one, will be set to 100%.
With each pressing, the value will be copied to the next, selected fixture. When pressing “<“, the value will
be copied to the last selected fixture.
Moving values
Example: Select a fixture and set the Dimmer value to 100%.
Select the fixture and further fixtures, to which you want the Dimmer value to be moved to.
By pressing 2x on the column title (here Dimmer), you can activate all Dimmer values für the selected
fixtures.
By pressing the “ > “ button, the Dimmer value of the first fixture will be moved to the next, selected fixture.
When pressing “<“, the value will be copied to the last selected fixture.
Micro
67
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Setting Filters, to just copy/move individual Functions
- Example: You have set different positions for 10 Scanners. Now, you want to just copy/move the “PAN“ value
from one fixture to the others.
Pressing the “Filter“ button will open “AT Filter Option“ menu. In this menu, you’ll find all functions available.
The functions are all displayed with a green background. Pressing on a function will deactivate it (will be displayed
in black then).
If you just want to copy/move the “PAN“ value, deactivate “TILT“ and leave the menu by pressing the “X“ key.
Now, only the “PAN“ value will be changed, when you copy/move.
4
Cues and Sequences
A Cue is an individual stage setting, which can be assigned and stored directly to EXECUTOR button or EXECUTOR
Fader.
Several cues in line are called a sequence. Sequences of cues can also be assigned and stored on an EXECUTOR
button or EXECUTOR Fader.
If cues are created using Presets, a modication of this Preset will automatically update all cues which use this
Preset.
Thus, time-consuming checking and correction of individual Cues becomes unnecessary.
TIPP
We recommend to use the Preset functions as often as possible.
EXECUTOR buttons or Faders can have multiple assignments for created sequences.
EXECUTOR Faders and buttons are organised in PAGES. You can work on all PAGES simultaneously. Changing pages
only effects what you currently have physical access to NOT what is currently playing back. When using motor
faders, those motor faders will move reflect the status of the current PAGE.
With the EXECUTOR buttons it is possible to call up the Cues, Sequences and Chasers.
5.1.3 Buttons and
Faders.
For dimmer channels, the respective MASTER FADER, Group fader and the Grandmaster have to be pushed
up.
68
EXECUTOR buttons do not have a Master and are therefore are activated immediately. When dimmer values are
playback via Cues or Sequences assigned to EXECUTOR buttons priority issues may arrise then trying to
control these same dimmer values from other EXECUTOR button and faders without first switching off the relevent
EXECUTOR buttons. In practical terms this means that to work with Dimmers as on a convenetional console (HTP),
dimmer channels have to be assigned to the Executor Faders.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
4 . 1 Creating Cues (separate memories)
The actual stage setting can be stored as a Cue and be called up via the EXECUTOR buttons or faders.
- All changed (active) values (recommended setting),
- all momentary settings (complete Output),
- or all values of the selected Fixtures and channels can be stored as Cues.
4 . 1 . 1 Creating new Cues
Create the look on stage by direct access or presets.
3.4 and 3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly or 3.7
Calling up Presets
This look shall now be stored as CUE in the following way:
Press the STORE key and hold it. The following options and encoder names will appear on the TFT display:
Press one of the following keys (selected key will receive dark-grey background colour):
- Active Values: Store only the active values (all values in the FIXTURE/CHANNEL window which are shown
with a red background colour
colour).
- All: Store all settings (all fixture and channel values).
All values of the selected fixtures and channels will be stored (the
- All for Selected Devices:
fixture/channel numbers will be marked in yellow).
Release the STORE key (LED stays on).
For this CUE, set the following parameters via the encoders:
- Trigger: Call of the CUE by GO, SOUND or FOLLOW (i.e. after previous cue in the sequence has completed) or
automatically after an amount of time.
- Fade: CUE will be played back with the set time; this is only possible with “FADE“ functions. 2.3 Single
Channel-specific Adjustments for the Current Show (point 10) and 2.5 EDITING FIXTURES (modify) (point 9)
- Delay: CUE will be called up delayed by the time set; only possible for the „FADE“ functions.
- Snap-Delay: The Snap values of the CUE will be played back after the set period of time (only with “SNAP”
functions).
Pressing the In Fades button will switch it over to Out Fades:
- Out Fade: Dimmer channels, which reduce their level in the next Cue, will be faded with the set period of
time.
- Out Delay: delays the outfading
Cues can be stored on EXECUTOR faders or EXECUTOR button.
Define the assignment position of the Cue by pressing the EXECUTOR button once. When storing to an EXECUTOR
FADER, press a button above or below the fader once.
The CUE is now assigned to this EXECUTOR button or EXECUTOR fader and stored in the Sequence Pool. This way
it is possible, to assign the same Cue more often than once. 5.1 ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)
Repeat all steps to create the next Cue.
Pressing the CLEAR key: once - will delete the selection, twice – will delete the active values and reset all
values then.
Micro
69
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4 . 1 . 2 Store Options - Functions available when storing
The different settings in this menu have an effect on how Cues, but also Presets are stored. The settings modified
in this menu can be stored as defaults. These (Pre) sets will then be used for storing, but can also be adjusted from
case to case.
Press the STORE button and hold it. In the TFT Display, the following selection will appear:
Press the buttons (selected button will be backlit in dark grey):
Store Source:
- Normal: Will store all values contained in the Programmer (mind the settings under STORE VALUES).
- Output: Will store all values output (as displayed in the DMX Sheet), i.e. also the position of the Master/
Groupmaster will be accounted for. Asssignments, e.g. to Presets, will be lost, as only the output value will be
stored, not the source.
- DMX IN (DMX Capture): With this setting, you can store DMX signals coming in via the DMX-IN jack, e.g. to store
a non-compatible Show of another console. You can also call up individual Cues on other consoles, if the SETUP
and the patched channels on the grandma are identical, and store a new Cue on the grandMA.
You can set the DMX-IN in the TOOL menu / DMX&NSP configuration / Local DMX Input. The incoming DMX has to
be merged with the DMX line, on which the fixtures of the imported Show were patched.
Filter:
- Define: Will open the Attribute filter; all attributes having a green background will be saved. The settings in this
filter will only be active for the following STORE process, afterwards, the filter will be reset to default again.
70
Store Values:
- Active Values: Will store only the active values (all values that have a red background in the FIXTURE
or CHANNEL window).
- All: Will store all current settings (all values of all Scanner and Dimmer channels).
Very memory-demanding – problems when saving presets – only recommendable for special cases.
- All for Selected Devices: Will store all values of the selected Scanners and Dimmers (the Scanners or
Dimmers are indicated by yellow names).
If not empty:
- Merge: When expanding Cues, all settings already stored will be kept. The newly set values will be stored to the
Cue as additions, already existing ones will be overwritten.
- Overwrite: Cue will be overwritten completely.
- Remove: When removing, only those parts of the Cue will be cut (deleted) out of the existing Cue that are active
(red).
- Ask to Confirm: nWhen storing a second Cue on an Executor, the SAVE window will open: Here, you can execute
one of the functions by selecting it.
Cue Options:
- Cue Only On/Off: Defines, whether Cue Only is On or Off when storing.
- Reset Times On/Off: Preset defining whether the set times are to be reset when storing CUEs (FADE/DELAY) the
next time (RESET TIMES ON) or whether they are to be kept (RESET TIMES OFF)
Preset Options:
3.7 Creating and calling up Presets
.Preset
Pressing the Save as default button will save the presets as defaults.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
STORE ENCODER WINDOW:
press STORE
The Encoder window displays the setting of 3 areas of the OPTION menu. The settings can be changed (for the
following STORE process) temporarily from the pull-up menus. On the next STORE, the very setting will reappear that
was defined in the Option menu.
4 . 1 . 3 Overwriting a Cue
If you wish to overwrite a Cue completely, simply use the same EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button once again.
The following window will appear:
In order to overwrite this cue completely, press the OVERWRITE key (If the executor contains more than one cue
you will have to be specific about which cue you want to Store - 4.2 Programming Sequences).
4.1.4 Merging a Cue
When merging cues, all existing and stored settings will be maintained. The newly set values will be stored and
added to the cue, while already existing values will be overwritten.
If you wish to merge a cue, simply use the same EXECUTOR Fader or EXECUTOR button once again. The SAVE
(STORE) window will appear (as above). In order to merge this cue, press the MERGE key (If the executor contains
more than one cue you will have to be specific about which cue you want to store - 4.2 Programming
Sequences).
4 . 1 . 5 Removing a Cue
In the removing operation, the active values (red) will be subtracted from the already existing cue.
If you wish to remove from a cue, simply use the same EXECUTOR Fader or EXECUTOR button once again. The
STORE window will appear (as above). In order to remove from this cue, press the REMOVE key (If the executor
contains more than one cue you will have to be specific about which cue you want to Store - 4.2 Programming
Sequences).
You can also remove specific parts of a complete sequence by entering: [STORE] [SEQUENCE] [Sequence number]
[CUE] [1] [THRU] [number of last Cue] [ENTER]. A window will open in which you confirm your operation by
pressing the REMOVE key. (This syntax also applies for “OVERWRITE” and “MERGE”.)
Caution! In NON-TRACKING mode, only Dimmer channels of the first copied Cue are taken account of. For the
following Cues, the Dimmer values are “0” and will have to be reprogrammed manually.
4 . 2 Programming Sequences
Micro
Sequence is the generic term for multiple of cues, with the option of various Fade and Delay times per channel
and cue. Sequences can be stored either on an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button.
Store the first Cue (first step of a sequence) either on an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button. 4.1
Creating Cues
Create the second Cue (next step of the sequence) as before. When storing the second Cue, use the same
EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button. Now, the STORE window will appear:
In order to create a Sequence (more than one Cue), press the CREATE SECOND CUE key. The Cue will now be
stored in this Sequence as the second step (Cue 2).
In the ASSIGN menu, you can define whether this Sequence should be executed in TRACKING or NON-TRACKING
mode. TRACKING and NON TRACKING. 5.1.4 EXECUTOR SETTINGS
Create the next Cue for any other step and use the same EXECUTOR fader or button when storin
71
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4 . 2 . 1 Copying Sequences
Once a Sequence has been created, it can be copied completely with all component Cues, Fade and Delay times.
Press the COPY key once (LED is on).
Press the SEQUENCE key once (LED is on).
Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of the Sequence to be copied. All sequences and their numbers will
be displayed in the Assign menu. 5.1 ASSIGN Menu
Press the AT key once (LED is on).
Using the numeric keypad, enter the number of the new Sequence and confirm with ENTER.
4 . 2 . 2 Including Cues
Set a Cue
4.1 Creating Cues
Press the STORE key once (LED is on).
Press the SEQUENCE key once (LED is on).
Enter the number of the Sequence using the numeric keypad.
Press the CUE key once (LED is on).
Enter the number of the new Cue via numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER.
Example: A new Cue is to be included between Cue 3 and Cue 4. This new Cue will be named for example Cue no.
3.1(numbers between 3.001 and 3.999 are possible).This way, 999 Cues can be included between two Cues.
72
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
4 . 2 . 3 Default Sequence (Master Sequence)
When creating sequences, Cues can directly be stored on a Default Sequence.
Press the SELECT key once (LED is on).
Select the respective EXECUTOR, which shall be the Default Sequence by pressing the respective EXECUTOR
button once. The headline of the small EXECUTOR window will be green.
To create the first Cue of the Default Sequence. 4.1 Creating Cues
Push STORE key 1x (LED flashes).
Push ENTER key 1x; the created cue is now stored in the Master Sequence.
TIPP
If no EXECUTOR button has been selected before storing, and you confirm with ENTER, the stored Cue will always
be added to the current Default Sequence.
In the Default Sequence, Cues can be played back directly**
Press the GOTO key once (LED is on).
Enter the Cue number on the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER. The Cue will be played back with the
set duration ( 2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu).
When played back Cues directly, you can enter a FADE or DELAY time using the TIME key.
After having entered the Cue number, press the TIME key for the FADE time once and enter the period of time
using the numeric keypad, or press the TIME key once more for the DELAY time, enter the duration using the
numeric keypad and confirm with enter. The Cue will be played back with the entered times.
The Cue will always be played back as if the Sequence was run from the very beginning. That means, all
previous steps will be accounted for with regards to the tracking of values(this depends on whether
Tracking had been activated in the ASSIGN menu. à 5.1.4 Executor Settings)
4 . 2 . 4 LOAD CUE
You can use LOAD CUE in order to directly call up a certain cue with either one or several executors.
Press the GOTO key twice (LED is blinks)**.
Select an executor by shortly pressing a key.
A window with a chart appears. All cues of this sequence are listed in this chart.
If you select one of these cues, it will be loaded. This cue will be displayed as next (red blinking background) in
the small executor window above the executor.
Start this cue with the GO button.
Cues within the Mastersequence can be directly loaded**
Press GOTO key twice (LED is on).
Enter Cue number using the keypad and confirm with ENTER.
The Cue will be loaded and displayed as next (red blinking background) in the small executor window above the
executor.
Start this cue with the GO button.
Micro
73
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4 . 2 . 5 Playing back sequences or chasers
Using the EXECUTOR button, you can playback the stored Sequences directly.
If the green LED on the button is lit, a Cue or a Sequence of cues is stored on this button.
If the yellow LED is lit or is flashing, this Cue, Sequence of cues or Chaser (a sequence which as been told to run
automatically) is activated.
The yellow LED indicates the beat of a Chaser.
Push up the respective Master Fader for the EXECUTOR faders to see the dimmer values. Playback Cues using the
Go+ button (standard setting is button below the Fader). If the green LED in the button above the Fader is on, a
Cue or a Sequence is stored on this button.
If the yellow LED is on or is flashing, this Cue, the Sequence or the stored Chaser is activated. The yellow LED
indicates the beat of a Chaser.
Using the PAGE keys, you can select other pages. 5.5 PAGE Administration (PAGE)
With the Fader to the right of the EXECUTOR buttons, you can either set fixed fade times or perform manual fadein when playing back Cues using the EXECUTOR buttons.
Press the key above the Fader once (red LED is on). Set the desired fade time using the Fader. When selecting the
Sequence using the EXECUTOR buttons, only the fade time set here will be used (this also applies to SNAPDELAY
times).
Press the key above the Fader again (green LED is on). Select the sequence using the EXECUTOR button. Using
the Fader, you can now fade in the selected sequence. Default setting for the Fader can be changed to fade just
upwards or in both directions 2.13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu below the Executor Defaults Crossfade.
With the PREVIEW function, Cues can be displayed in the FIXTURE SHEET or CHANNEL SHEET without being
output to stage.
Press the PREVIEW key once and playback the desired Cue using the EXECUTOR button.
74
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
4 . 3 Editing Sequences
During editing procedures, you can change all values of cues, add values or delete them. The X-FADE and DELAY
times can be altered and the trigger of cues via GO key, X-FADER, SOUND or TIME can be defined.
Apart from what is indicated in this chapter, there are three other ways of editing:
4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.1.5 Overwriting, expanding, removing Cues
4.3.4 Update Cues or Presets
5.3 EXECUTOR window
Press the EDIT key (LED is on).
Select the sequence with the respective EXECUTOR button.
Or:
Left click with the mouse into the small window above the EXECUTOR Fader or use the touchscreen.
The EDIT menu appears on the TFT display, showing a listing of the individual cues contained in the selected
sequence.
You will find the addressed EXECUTOR fader or button in the headline, giving the number of the PAGE and the
sequence name.
The second line will give you the functions of the columns.
- No.: Number of Cue
- NAME: Name of Cue
- MIB: Activate MIB (Move In Black function) individually for each cue. Activate it by selecting a cell and shortly
pressing on the encoder on the right side of the display. Activation is confirmed by YES.
MIB can only be used in cells where a “
Micro
* “ is displayed.
- Trig: The trigger for the Cue (GO button, SOUND, TIME or FOLLOW)
If the TIMES key on the title bar of the edit window is pressed:
- Fade: FADE time
- Outfade: Duration of the fade time on Dimmer channels which are reducing in value
- Delay: CUE will be called up delayed by the time set; only possible for the „FADE“ functions
- Outdelay: Outfade will called up delayed by the time set
- Snap: Duration of the DELAY
- I.Fade: Duration of the individual FADE time (min and max)
- I.Delay: Duration of the individual DELAY time (min and max)
If the LOOPS key on the title bar of the edit key is pressed:
- LOOP: Will initiate a jump after the cue that includes the loop statement has finished
- LOOPDELAY: The length of time or the number of occurences of a LOOP will be displayed
- LINK: The Command Line Order to be triggered will be displayed
- LI. DEL: The delay value for the execution of the Command Line Order will be displayed
If the EFFECTS key on the title bar is pressed:
- EFFECTS: Display of the effects calls
A second sheet will appear in the lower part of the display:
- NO.: Number of the Effect
- NAME: Name of the Effect
75
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
- ACTION: Type of Effect call (play forwards, play backwards, pause, stop)
- INTENS: Display of the defined size of the Effect
F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the size will be faded in with the set fade time
- SPEED: Display of the defined speed of the Effect
F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the speed will be faded in with the set fade time
- SOFT: Display of the set softness (softer fade in) of the effect
F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the softness will be faded in with the set fade time
If AUTO SCROLL key is pressed, the chart will automatically move to top/bottom when handling larger sequences.
The chart will show you all cues of a sequence including the various TRIGGER functions.
The EDIT CUE key will enable you to change values of individual cues ( below).
4.3.1 Changing values for individual cues in the sequence
– Select the Cue that you want to change (red cell) in the Name column.
– Press the Edit Cue key (LED in the EDIT key starts flashing).
ll values of the Cue will now be played back on stage and displayed (active, red) in the
– All
Channel & Fixture sheets.
–The cue can now be changed by either direct access or presets. 3.4 Accessing Fixtures directly (in the FIXTURE SHEET) / 3.5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly (in the CHANNEL SHEET) and 3.7 Creating and calling up
Presets
If this Cue has been changed, the LED in the Update button will be on.•
If the Cue is not to be seen on stage, activate the Blind function by pressing the BLIND key (integrated LED is
on).
Press the Update key once. Choose OK in the window that has just opened. The changed Cue is now stored.
Press the CLEAR key twice if necessary (Cue values will be deleted in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window).
For modifying further Cues, select the respective Cue one by one (will be displayed on a green background).
Repeat all steps as described with first cue.
4 . 3 . 2 Changing the TRIGGER (Call-up) of individual Cues within a Sequence
Select the respective cue within the Trig column (red cell).
Enter the following with the left Encoder or via the keyboard and confirm with ENTER.
- F: for FOLLOW mode
- G: for GO button
- S: for SOUND signal
- No.: Automatically according to set time (e.g. if the set time is 1.5, this Cue will be called up after 1.5 seconds
automatically).
4 . 3 . 3 Changing the FADE or DELA
Y times of individual steps within the
DELAY
Sequence
76
Select the respective cue (red cell).
Here, the duration for this cue can be changed with the In-Fade, In Delay or Snap encoder.
Pressing the Basics button (above the right Encoder) will switch this button to Out
Out: Now, you can modify
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
this time with the Encoder Out-Fade.
If no FADE or DELAY times are indicated, none are stored in this CUE.
Changing all times of one or more Cues ( CUE TIME SCALING )Changing all times of one or more Cues (
CUE TIME SCALING )
With this function, you can scale or compress all Fade, Delay, and Trigger times.
select one ore more Cues (red cell).
click on the Cue’s number using the right mouse button or the Encoder on the side of the monitor, der rechten
Maustaste oder dem Encoder neben dem Monitor
In the EDIT CUE NUMBER menu, select a percentage or absolute change
- Scale Timing (%): All times of the marked Cue will be changed to the entered value.When entering 100%,
all values remain unchanged.
- Scale Timing (sec): The total time of the marked Cues will be changed to the entered time – all times will
change proportionally. For the example on the left: For the 4 marked Cues, 6 seconds were entered; DELAY
and FADE were increased to 6 seconds in total; the trigger time increases according to the proportional
changes of the individual times.
Use the Calculator to make the changes, and confirm with ENTER.
WARNING: If you compress all times to 0, you will no longer be able to enter longer times. You would then have to
enter all times anew, or you could restore them, if the OOPS function was activated (not on the MICRO).
4 . 3 . 5 Moving Cues
Micro
Press the MOVE Key once (LED is on).
Press the SEQUENCE Key once (LED is on).
Using the keypad, enter the number of the Sequence in which Cues are to be moved.
Press the CUE key once (LED is on).
Using the keypad, enter the number of the first Cue to be moved. If only one Cue is to be moved, continue with
the AT key.
Pressing the +Key will move the selected cue and the cue indicated by the subsiquent number
Cue).
Pressing the THRU kKey on the keypad will move the Cues from...to (including last Cue)
When pressing the –Key, the Cue with the next number will be excluded from the move operation
operation.
Press the AT key once (LED is on).
Enter the new number for the moved Cues using the keypad.
Example: The Cues are to be inserted between Cue 10 and Cue 11. Number these Cues e.g. as 10.1 (possible Cue
numbers are 10.001 - 10.999). This way, up to 999 Cues can be inserted between two existing Cues.
Confirm with ENTER.
When moving one Cue, the COPY window will open.
After pressing the key on the left of Statuscopy, you can choose between:
During the moving process, only the values and times actually stored in this Cue will be moved
moved. Tracked
information will be ignored.
The Cue will be moved as it would actually be realized on stage. That means, all previous steps will be taken into
account and the result will be moved.
By pressing the button on the left of Cue Only
Only, you can choose between:
Normal moving (with or without Status)
Will copy the values of the step before into the step after, but only to a position having no value; this wouldn’t be
wise. The moved Cue will now be a „Cue Only“
Pressing COPY will move the Cue, CANCEL will abort the process.
77
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4.3.4 Copying Cues
Press the COPY Key once (LED is on).
Press the SEQUENCE Key once (LED is on).
Using the keypad, enter the number of the Sequence from which the Cues are to be copied.
Press the CUE Key once (LED is on).
Using the keypad, enter the number of the first Cue to be copied. If only one Cue is to be copied, continue with
the AT Key.
Pressing the +Key will copy the selected cue and the cue indicated by the subsiquent number.
Pressing the THRU Key on the keypad will copy the Cues from...to (including the last Cue).
When pressing the –Key, the Cue with the next number will excluded from the copying operation.
Press the AT key once (LED is on).
Enter the new (destination) number for the copied Cues using the keypad.
Example: The Cues are to be inserted between Cue 10 and Cue 11. Number these Cues e.g. as 10.1 (possible Cue
numbers are 10.001 - 10.999). This way, up to 999 Cues can be inserted between two existing Cues.
Confirm with ENTER.
When copying one Cue, the COPY window will open.
After pressing the key on the left of Statuscopy, you can choose between:
Only the values and times actually stored in this Cue will be copied. The tracked information will be
disregarded.
The Cue will be copied as it would actually be realized on stage. That means, all previous steps will be taken into
account and the result will be copied.
By pressing the button on the left of Cue Only
Only, you can choose between:
Normal Copying (with or without Status)
Will copy the values of the step before into the step after, but only to a position having no value; this wouldn’t be
78
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
4 . 3 . 6 Deleting and renumbering Cues
Right click with the mouse on the respective Cue in the NO. column.
The following window will open.
- From Cue: Display of the first selected Cue. The number can be modified by clicking on it.
- To Cue: Display of the last selected Cue. The number can be modified by clicking on it.
- New Number: Display of the first new number of the selected Cues. The number can be modified by clicking on it.
- Step Width: Display of the steps, in which the Cues’ new numbers will be placed. The number can be modified by
clicking on it.
Deleting Cues
Select the Cue to be deleted. By pressing the Delete Cue ! key, the Cue will be deleted. If you want to delete not
only one but several Cues, select the respective Cues.
By pressing the Delete Cue ! key, the Cues will be deleted.
TIPP
Renumbering Cues
Select the Cue to be renumbered. Enter the new number on the right side of “New Number”. By pressing the RENUMBER key, the Cue will be renumbered. If you want to renumber not only one but several Cues, select the
respective Cues. Enter the new number for the first Cue on the right side of “New Number.“ By pressing the RENUMBER key, the Cues will be renumbered.
4 . 3 . 7 Inserting LOOPs
Program flow inside a cuelist can be controlled by LOOPS.
Loops have a destination. If a Cue is executed that contains a loop, program flow will continue with the given
destination instead of the next cue.
Loops can be timed. A timed loop will stay inside the loop until a given time elapses.
Otherwise loops are counting. A counting loop will stay inside the loop until the loop counter reaches zero.
Loops can be endless. An endless loop will stay forever inside the loop once it was activated.
Make a right mouse click on the respective Cue in the LOOP column. The SELECT LOOP-TARGET window will open.
Select the Cue to which the jump is to be performed. The Cue will be listed in the top line.
Select the jump function by pressing the respective Key:
– With the LOOP (TIMED) Key, a timed loop will be created.
– With the LOOP (COUNT) Key, a counting loop will be created.
– With the DELETE Key, you can delete the loop.
For the indicated loop, you can now edit the duration or the loop counter value in the LOOPDELAY column by
clicking on or entering the respective value.
Example: When you enter „5“ in the TIMED cell, the loop will be executed for 5 seconds. When you enter „5“ in
the COUNT cell, the loop will be repeated five times, before the Sequence will be continued normally.d.
Micro
79
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4 . 3 . 8 Inserting Command Line Commands**
Within a Sequence, a Command Line Command can be triggered by a Cue. As soon as this Cue is reached, this
command will be executed. By setting a time frame, the command can be played back with its own individual
10. Command Line
delay time.
A click on the respective Cue in the LINK column. For the selected command, you can now enter a delay time in
the LI. DEL column. The command will only be executed after this time has ended, e.g. if you enter „5“ in the LI.
DEL colu mn, the command will be executed after a delay of five seconds.t.
4.4. Editing Chasers
A Chaser is a sequence which runs automatically. During the editing process, you will be able to modify, add or
delete all the values of the individual Cues. Speed, X-FADE and SNAP-DELAY times can also be adapted globally.
Apart from what is indicated in this chapter, there are three other ways of editing:
4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.1.5 Overwriting, expanding, removing Cues
4.5 and 3.7.5 Update Cues or Presets
5.3 EXECUTOR window
Press the EDIT key (LED is on).
Select a Chaser with the respective EXECUTOR key.
Or:
Left click with the mouse into the small window above the EXECUTOR Fader.
The EDIT menu appears on the TFT display, giving a listing of the individual cues.
The selected EXECUTOR fader or button is now listed in the headline, giving the page number and the name of
the sequence.
In the second line, the column functions are indicated
- No.: The number of the individual Cues
- NAME: Name of the Cue
- MIB: Activate MIB (Move In Black function) individually for each cue. Activate it by selecting a cell and shortly
pressing on the encoder on the right side of the display. Activation is confirmed by YES.
MIB can only be used in cells where a “ * “ is displayed.
- TRIGGER: Has no effect on a Chaser
If the TIMES key on the title bar is pressed:
- FADE: Has no effect on Chaser
- OUTFADE: Has no effect on Chaser
- SNAP: Has no effect on Chaser
- I.FADE: Has no effect on Chaser
- I DELAY: Has no effect on Chaser
If the LOOPS key on the title bar is pressed:
- LOOP: Will initiate a jump after the cue that includes the loop statement has finished.
- LOOPDELAY: The length of time or the number of occurences of a LOOP will be displayed
- LINK: The Command Line Command to be triggered will be displayed
80
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
- LI. DEL: The delay value for the execution of the command will be displayed
If the EFFECTS key on the title bar is pressed:
- EFFECTS: Display of the Effect calls
A second sheet will appear in the lower part of the display:
- No.: Number of the Effect Group
- NAME: Name of the Effect Group
- ACTION: Type of Effect call
- INTENS: Display of the defined size of the Effect Group
F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the size will be faded in with the set fade time
- SPEED: Display of the defined speed of the Effect Group
F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the speed will be faded in with the set fade time
- SOFT: Display of the set softness (softer fade in) of the effects
F (Fade): If Y (YES) is displayed, the softness will be faded in with the set fade time
Micro
The chart shows all Cues in the Chaser (Sequence):
With the help of these keys you can define the various functions for the Chaser.
- RUN: Chaser runs with the set speed. Fade and Delay times will be adjusted in terms of percentage.
- SOUND: Triggering of the steps (cues) via a sound signal. Fade and Delay times will be executed with the set
time.
- BPM: Playback of the steps (cues) via automatic recognition of Beats P er Minute. Fade and Delay times will be
adjusted in terms of percentage.
- FORWARD: Chaser runs forward.
- REVERS: Chaser runs backwards.
- BOUNCE:Chaser runs forward, then backwards and so on.
- RANDOMLY: Chaser plays back individual steps (cues) on random basis.
- AUTO LOOP / SINGLE ON / SINGLE OFF (Toggle by pressing the key):
On AUTO LOOP, after the last step, the Chaser will jump back to the first and continue. With SINGLE ON, the
Chaser makes one run and stops at the last Cue. With SINGLE OFF, the Chaser makes one run and switches off
after the last Cue.
- SPEED INDV.: On RUN, an individually set speed will be used.
-SPEED 1–4 : On RUN, the respective SPEED-Group will be used. These set speeds can be used for all Chasers.
5.1.6 Assigning Special Masters
Using the keys, you can either divide or double the set speed.
HALF SPEED: Pressing 1x, the set speed will be divided in half – this can be done up to 8 times (The modification
will be displayed above the left Encoder).
1:1
1:1: Resets the speed to the set value.
DOUBLE SPEED: By pressing this once the set speed will be doubled – this can be done up to 8 times
(Modification will be displayed above the left Encoder.
This key will bring you to the ASSIGN menu. 5.1 ASSIGN menu
The Edit-CUE button allows you the modify values of individual Cues (LED in Edit key will blink) 4.4.1 Changing values of individual Chaser steps
Above the encoders on the screen, playback soft keys and the name of the chase are displayed. The functions of
81
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
these soft keys are:
EDIT:
LEFT ARROW:
SQUARE:
DOUBLE LINE:
RIGHT ARROW:
PAGE X:
Open edit menu for the chase
GO- (Run backwards)
OFF (Stop)
PAUSE (Has toggle function)
GO
(Run forward)
Toggle between encoder functions. The important functions are on page 1.
As usual, a pushed and then turned encoder works with a different resolution, depending on the settings in the
setup menu.
An encoder click ( push and release without turning) brings up a huge fader on screen.
Encoder functions of page 1:
SPEED SCALE: Divides or multiplies the speed with a factor.
SPEED: The speed of the chase. The accessible range depends on the speed scale. If the chase belongs to a speed
group, changing the chases speed will affect the speed group ( also the other way around ).
FADE: Step by step INFADE time. Defines the smoothness of the running chase.
MASTER FADE: Controls master in & outfade. It is used when starting or switching off the running chase. With
the encoder the „Master Fade“ can be set to “DEFAULT“. In this position the predefined M-Fade from the menu
setup/defaults/playback timing will be used.
Encoder functions of page 2:
SPEED GROUP: Link chase to a speed group or let it have individual speed.
OUTFADE: Defines step by step OUTFADE time. With the encoder the OUTFADE can be set to always equal
INFADE.
SNAPDELAY: Defines the trigger point for snapping channels in the chase.
4 . 4 . 1 Modifying values of separate Chaser steps
82
Select the Cue to be modified in the Names column (red cell).
Press the Edit 7 key (LED in Edit key will blink).
All values of the Cue will now be played back on stage and displayed (active, red) in
the Channel & Fixture sheets.
– This cue can now be modified by either direct access or by presets. 3.4 Direct Access to Fixtures (in the
FIXTURE SHEET) / 3.5 Direct Access to Dimmer Channels (in the CHANNEL SHEET) and 3.7 Creating and calling
up Presets
If the Cue is not to be seen on stage, activate the Blind function by pressing the BLIND key (integrated LED is on).
Press the UPDATE key once. Choose OK in the window that has just opened. The changed Cue is now stored.
Press the CLEAR key twice (Cue values will be deleted in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window).
For modifying further Cues, select the respective Cue (Cue will be displayed on a green background).
Repeat all steps as described with the first cue and store with STORE.
4.3.4 Copying Cues
4.3.5 Moving Cues
4.3.6 Deleting and renumbering Cues
4.3.7 Inserting LOOPs
4.3.8 Inserting Command Line Commands
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
4.5
Updatings Cues
When executing sequences, Cues can be modified and stored directly.
Playback the Cue to be modified. Modify the Cue by either direct access or via presets (UPDATE key LED is on).
3.4 Direct Access to Fixtures (in the FIXTURE SHEET) / 3.5 Direct Access to Dimmer Channels and 3.7
Creating and calling up Presets
Press the Update key once.
The UPDATE window will open
By pressing this key, you can toggle between “only original contents“ and “add new contents“
- Only original contents: Upon updating the cue, only the changes on fixtures/channels which have already been
used in this cue will be stored.
- Add new contents: Upon updating the cue, all changes will be stored regardless at to whether those fixtures/
channels have already been used in this cue.
By pressing this key, you can toggle between “only last called Executor“ and “all possible Executors“.
- Only last called Executor: The“Cue Destinations“ chart only shows the last played back cue.
- All possible Executors: The “Cue Destinations“ chart shows all currently playing back cues on all executors.
- “Tracking“ or “Cue Only“ Update. A “tracking“ update may affect “cues in the future“ while a “cue only“ update
does not affect them.
- Pressing the “Update Cue“ key will update that cue being displayed with a red background. You can select
another cue using the encoder.
- Pressing the “Update All Cues“ key will update all cues listed in the chart.
- Pressing the Save as default button will save the (pre) sets as default settings (e.g.: Only original contents or Add
new contents). The next time you open the Update menu, these settings will be available.
Micro
83
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
4 . 6 INFO - window
A information window can be added to every executor. Type here information for sequenzes, chasers or effects.
Additional you can type infomation for every cue in a sequenz, a chaser or an effect.
Create Info Window:
with CREATE A WINDOW andINFO an empty Info Window opens
press Select - „Select Something“ appears
press button or little Executor window of the relevant sequenz, chaser or effect.
type Info text
close Info Window
Create Info for cue:
press EDIT
choose a sequenz, chaser or effekt (not Bitmap Effekt)
press Button INFO
type Infotext
84
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
5
Executing Cues, Sequences and Chasers
5 . 1 ASSIGN menu (Assignment to EXECUTOR)
Cues, Sequences or Effect Groups can be assigned to any EXECUTOR fader or button.
One way to enter the ASSIGN menu is by a mouse click or using the touch screen on the title bar of the
EXECUTOR FADER window.
Or:
Press the ASSIGN key once (LED is on).
Select a Sequence in the Sequence Pool, or an Effect Group in the Effect Pool.
Press the EXECUTOR FADER or EXECUTOR button, to which you want to assign a Sequence or Chaser.
Or:
Press the ASSIGN key once (LED is on).
Press the EXECUTOR FADER or EXECUTOR button, for which a Sequence or Chaser is to be created. The ASSIGN
menu will appear in the middle TFT display.
Another way to enter the ASSIGN menu is via the EDIT menu.
The title bar will display the selected EXECUTOR FADER or BUTTON.
5 . 1 . 1 Assigning Sequences or Effect Groups
The “Function” key must be activated (dark background).
By pressing the CHASER, SEQUENCE or EFFECT key, all created Sequences will be listed in the Sheet. Select the
Sequence or Effect Group to be assigned. Assigned Sequences or Effect Groups are displayed in red.
The CUES column shows the number of Cues in the individual Sequences.
By pressing the key “Edit“, you can customize the assigned Sequence or Effect Group in the EDIT menu.
4.3 or 4.4 Editing Cues, Sequences or Chasers. 6.2 Editing Effect Groups
5 . 1 . 2 Changing Sequence Names
By pushing the key “Name“ the a sequence can be renamed using the keyboard.
or:
Push ASSIGN key 2x (LED is on).
Push the executor button, where the name of the sequence should be changed.
A window appears, where you can now enter the new name.
Micro
85
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5 . 1 . 3 Changing Button and Fader Functions
press ASSIGN
press small executor window
press FUNCTION
press SETTINGS
When touch on the FADER symbol key, a selection will appear where you can assign the respective function to
the Fader by another touch.
- Master: The Fader controls all programmed dimmer values of this Sequence.
- Swap: With the Fader, HTP channels in the sequence can be faded in and all other HTP values not used in this
sequence are set to “0”
It is only possible to use the SWAP or Master fader.
86
- FADE: With the Fader, the fade-in time between cues can be set manually, when using Chasers.
- Speed: Chaser speed can be set with the Fader.
- Xfade: With the Fader, you can manually crossfade all parameters in to the next cue of the sequence.
- XF A: If Split Crossfade is active, you can fade out the Cue that is currently playing back when pushing the fader upwards or downwards.
If Split Crossfade is not active
active, you can fade out to the darkening Dimmer channels of the next Cue when
pushing the fader upwards or downwards.
- XF B: If Split Crossfade is active, you can use the Fader to fade in the next Cue when pushing the fader upwards
or downwards.
If Split Crossfade is not active
active, you can fade out to the next Cue and to the brightening Dimmer channels when
pushing the fader upwards or downwards.
- Empty: Fader has no function.
- Rate: Using the Fader, you can change all fade and delay times for sequences. If the fader is at 50%, all times
will be executed in the normal way. Using the RATE 1 button, you can automatically set the Fader back to
the 50% position.
- MFade: This fader controls master in & outfade in a range from 0 to 10 seconds. It is used when starting or
switching off the running chase. With the encoder the „master fade“ can be set to “DEFAULT“. In this
position the predefined MFade from the menu setup/defaults/playback timing will be used.
- Temp: Use the Fader to temporarily fade in the first Cue(step), then, the previous status will be restored, similar
to the „Temp“ key.
By a touch on the respective KEY symbol, a selection will appear in which any button can be allocated with different functions.
- Go: The cue will be played back with all programmed FADE and DELAY times.
- Go–: For sequences, the previous cue is played back and all changes are executed (full tracking) using all
programmed FADE and DELAY times. For Chasers, the running direction will be reversed.
- Pause: A running cue or a Chaser will be temporarily stopped. To continue use GO+ or GO–.
- On: Reasserts the priority of the Executor making it the latest action thus overriding other executors which were
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
previously overriding it (LTP).
- Off: Switches the Executor off so that it no longer outputting cue data to stage.
- Rate 1: Puts the RATE FADER to 50% position ( RATE Fader
Fader).
- Learn: Direct entering of the Chaser speed. When pressing this button at least three times, the Chaser speed is
set.
- <<<: Playback of the previous cue without FADE or SNAP times.
- >>>: Playback of the next cue without FADE or SNAP times.
- Temp: A Cue or chaser plays back as long as the button is pressed. Upon releasing the button, previous
condition will be restored.
- Top: Resets the Sequence to the first cue.
- Empty: Button has no function.
- Flash: Sets the Dimmer channels in the current cue to 100% of their programmed value. Starts the sequence,
if not already activated.
- Out: Sets the Dimmer channels in the current cue to 0% of their programmed value. Starts the sequence, if not
already activated..
- Toggle: To switch on and off the Sequence or Chaser.
- Fix: Will fix sequence or chaser on this executor, even when switching PAGES here (this will be displayed by an
orange background in the small EXECUTOR window).
- Load: Pressing the button on the TFT display will open a chart for this sequence where you can select and
directly load the next cue to be played back in the sequence (LOAD CUE). Start the cue using the GO button.
- Select: Makes this executor the Master Sequence.
- Swop: As long as the button is pushed all other dimmer channels are faded out, except with executors, where
„Swop Protected“ has been activated.
With the Size of Executor buttons 1 – 5, you can define how many faders and buttons are available for
controlling your sequence on EXECUTOR FADERs, and whether one to five buttons could be used for EXECUTOR
BUTTONS.
The respective titles will be displayed on the TFT display above the EXECUTOR FADERS. When the LIST function is
active, the function of the EXECUTOR buttons will be displayed above these buttons (press LIST key).
Default Button and Fader Assignment
Micro - Assignment Menu; only one button
can assingned here
Micro
Pressing the “Save as default“ key will store the current settings as default settings in the Default Button/Fader menu. For each option (1-5 Faders or 1-5 Buttons, Sequences or Chasers), there is a default that can be
stored.
Pressing the “Load from default“ key will load the stored default settings and use them for this Executor.
Pressing the “Apply to all Exec“ will overwrite all Fader or Button Executors. The prerequisite is, however, an
identical number of Fader and Button assignments.
87
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5.1.4
TIPP
Playback Options
The “Settings“ key must be pressed (dark background).
If you press the “Auto start“ key (background dark gray), the Sequence or Chaser will be automatically started
when pushing the Master Fader upwards (item 6).
If the “Auto stop“ key is pressed (dark gray background), the sequence or Chaser will automatically be switched off
when pushing the master fader downwards to the lower stop.
If „Auto start“ is active (dark background) and „Auto Stop“ is not active, the fader gets the function „Auto On“,
this means that when the fader is moved up wards from 0-position, simultanously the function „On“ is activated
and the sequence is reactivated.
If the “Auto Fix“ key is pressed (dark background) and the Sequence or Chaser is started, this Executor will be
locked to that position when switching the Executor pages and will only be released when it is switched
off
off. If an Executor is stored at that position on another page, this Executor will appear and can be used again only
after switching the locked Executor off.
If the “Swop Protected” key is pressed, the Dimmers of this Sequence will not be switched off, when another
Sequence is called up using Swop.
If the TRACKING key is pressed (dark background), the Sequence will be executed in Tracking mode. If the key is
not pressed, the Sequence will be executed in Non Tracking mode.
The TRACKING mode is normally used for theatre applications
applications.
Values that were played back in a Cue, remain unchanged for each susequent Cue, until they are modified or
overwritten by a later Cue (LTP principle). Therefore, you do not have to program values which do not change into
later cues.
Example: At the beginning of a Sequence, Dimmer channels are set to 80%. Let’s assume that the setting is to be
used for several cues. As long as the channels are not modified, they will remain at 80%. When working with this
Sequence, you may recognize, however, that the channel setting should only be at 70%. Now, you only have to
change this channel setting once
once; all subsequent Cues will automatically be “modified” to 70%.
Example: Cue 10 is made up of the changes programed in cue 10 as well all the changes in cues1 thru 9 with the
later values taking presedence over the earlier values - Latest Takes Presedence (LTP)
In NON TRACKING mode values will return to their defaults unless they are specifcally given a value in that cue.
Example: Cue 10 is made up of only the information in Cue 10. Modications to earlier cues will have no effect on
later cues. Essentially cues no longer have a relationship between each other. 5.4 TRACKING window
Key A/B or Split Xfade: If the “Split Xfade” key is pressed (displayed in dark), this function is active (
item 5.1.3 Changing Faders, Fader XF A and XF B).
Key Normal trigger If the „Normal Trigger“ key is pressed, this Sequence/Chaser will be execute with the
programmed triggers calls. Pressing this key, it will switch to „Trigger is GO“, where after the Sequence/Chaser can
only be controlled by the GO button and will ignore Follow, Sound and trigger times.
LTP Dimmers key pressed: When playing back this sequence, dimmer channels programmed into this sequence
will override all other (LTP Dimmer) instances of these channels being played back, regardless of level. They will
overwrite all other dimmer channels of those Cues that were also called up in LTP mode. HTP Executors remain
unchanged.
88
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Move in Black Options
MIB Always key pressed: Cues in which fixture intensity changes from zero and also change other parameters
, for example, a different position, color or gobo, etc., will have these values “preset” so that live changes will not
be seen on stage. You can also set a FADE or DELAY time for these channels ( 2.13 Settings in the Defaults
Menu / Playback Timing).
MIB Never key pressed: Cues which have separatly activated cues MIB fuctions are completely switched off
( 4.3 Edit Sequences).
Auto PrePos key pressed: The automatic prepositioning system will perform a move in black upon executor
start. Therefore all non-dimmer channels come up with zero fadetime and delay if the corresponding fixture was
dark when the executor was started. Switching off an executor with the Auto PrePos function enabled, tries not
to destroy the “stage look”, only dimmer channels are fading out.
When deactivating this sequence, the channels will be altered only after the respective dimmer has been set to
0.
RESTART OPTIONS
If the “Restart with first cue” key is pressed, the Sequence will restart always with the first cue.
If the “Restart with actual cue” key is pressed, the Sequence will restart exactly where it was switched off the
last time.
If the “Restart with next cue” key is pressed, the Sequence will restart one cue after where it was switched off.
If the “Release from last to first cue” key is pressed, tracked values are released when the executor jumps back to
the first cue.
PRIORITY OPTIONS
There are 3 priorities: Low (lowest), Normal (middle) and High(highest). Executors having a higher priority, cannot
be overwritten by Executors of a lower priority. In general, this applies only for LTP functions.
For LTP Executors, you can choose Off On Overwritten additionally. When all functions of this Executor
have been overwritten by other Executors, this one will switch off.
LOOPS
Normal: Loops is running as assigned
Breaking GO: GO will stop the Loop, the sequenz contuniues with the cue after the loop.
Defaults Options
Pressing the SAVE AS DEFAULT key will save the current settings as default settings.
Pressing the LOAD FROM DEFAULT key will load the saved default settings and use them for this Executor.
Micro
89
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5 . 1 . 5 Assigning Group Masters
Group masters are Faders only assigned to one group previously defined. Group masters do not have an influence
on the effects produced by the GrandMaster.
select group in GROUP-Pool.
press empty EXECUTOR FADER-button
or: open ASSIGN-Menu of the related Executor
press FUNCTION
press GROUP MASTER
select group
Changing Group Names
By pushing the key “Name“ the name of the group assigned to the executor can be changed by using the
keyboard.
or:
Push the ASSIGN key 2x (LED is on).
Push the executor button, where the name of the group should be changed.
A window appears, where you can now enter the new name.
or:
in Group Pool 3.3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS
Submaster Options:
The “Settings“ key must be pressed (dark background).
If the POSITIVE ENABLE key is pressed, this Group Master is the Master Fader for all dimmer channels of this group.
If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master (NEGATIVE INHIBIT key is pressed) for a group that includes Fixtures or dimmer channels from other groups, this INHIBIT Master must also be pushed up, to be able to use
the overlapping channels. The INHIBIT Master has priority over other group masters and can also be used as
Master Fader for all other Group Masters..
Group Overview:
Pressing the GROUP key twice will open an overview in the right display showing all assigned Group Masters.
In this overview, every Group Master is displayed with a separate small window.
- The top key contains the group name. Clicking on this key will open the Page on which it is stored. The display
above the Fader shows „HERE“.
- With the FULL key, you can set the Master to 100%. With the OUT key, you can set the Master to „0“. The yellow
status indicator next to the keys will give you the currently set value for the respective Fader.
Pressing the ALL FULL key in the title bar will set all group masters to 100%.
Pressing the X-key will close this window.
90
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
5 . 1 . 6 Assigning Special Masters
Press the ASSIGN key once (LED is on).
Press an EXECUTOR FADER button, to which a Special Master is to be assigned to.
Press FUNCTION
If the SPECIAL MASTER key is pressed, all CHASER SPEED Masters will be displayed.
Select which SPEED is to be assigned.
The following window will appear above the assigned Executor fader:
The name of the Speed Group.
The speed.
With the button, you can enter a speed directly. By pressing the button at least twice, you can set the speed.
The speed of the Speed Group can be adjusted by using the Fader.
If SOUND : BPM is selected, you can adjust the given BPM value in the Sound menu using the fader ( 2.14
Sound Signal Settings). The Sound Menu will open by touching the lower part of this window (not the headline).
or:
If SOUND : HOLD is selected, you can adjust the given HOLD value in the Sound menu using the fader (
2.14 Sound Signal Settings). The Sound Menu will open by touching the lower part of this window (not the
headline).
The name of the fader function.
The speed.
With the button, you can enter a speed directly. By pressing the button at least twice you can set the speed.
You can adjust the BPM / HOLD value with the fader.
- GRANDMASTER: this will assign the Grandmaster function to this Fader.
- MASTER EXEC FADE: this will assign the Executor Fader function to this Fader.
- MASTER PRESET FADE: this will assign the Preset Fader function to this Fader.
Executor Fader having these 3 functions, will always run synchronized to the console faders. The BLACKOUT, SET
TIME, and MANUAL FADE buttons will also affect all Faders having these functions.
5.1.7 Assigning effects
press ASSIGN
press on the small Executor window
press FUNCTION
press EFFECT
use the Encoder to select the effect and confirm by pressing on the Encoder
Micro
91
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5.1.8 Assigning BITMAP EFFECTS
press ASSIGN
press on the small Executor window
press FUNCTION
press BITMAP EFFECTS
use the Encoder to select the effect and confirm by pressing on the Encoder
5.1.3
if needed, set the button and fader functions
5 . 1 . 9 Moving, copying or deleting Executors
Press the MOVE key once to move Executors (LED is on).
Or:
Press the COPY key once to copy Executors (LED is on).Press the DELETE key once to delete Executors (LED is
on).
To move or copy an Executor button or a window above the Executor, press or click on it once.
Pressing another Executor button or window above the Executor will set the new position.
Press an Executor button or on a window above the Executor once.
If there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted Executors were to be used,
these assignments may no longer work! .
5 . 2 Small EXECUTOR Window
cyan: Chaser
green background = „Master Sequenz“
yellow: sequenz
92
After pressing the LIST FADERS key, these windows will be displayed above each of the EXECUTOR FADERS.
After pressing the LIST KEYS key twice, they will be displayed on the TFT display for the EXECUTOR buttons.
The name of the assigned sequence is displayed in the headline. The shown figure displays the number of the
sequence.
Touching the Sheet (not the header) on the touch screen or using the left mouse key will open the EDIT menu.
4.3 Editing Sequences or 4.4 Editing Chasers
5.1
Touching the title bar on the touchscreen or using the left mouse key will open the ASSIGN menu.
ASSIGN menu
The current section from the Cue Sheet will also be displayed:
Sequence:
The Outfade time of the last Cue will be displayed by a blue bar in the upper cell.
The Infade time of the cue will be displayed in the second cell.
The next Cue will be displayed in the next cell below.
Chaser:
The speed will be displayed in the upper cell.
The Fade time in percentage will be displayed in the second cell and also as a green bar.
Whilst the Chaser is not activated, you will find the type of activation in the bottom line. During execution, the
number of Cues that have completed will be displayed on the left while on the right side you will see the total
number of all Cues, which is also being displayed graphically by a bar.
The individual Fader and Button functions are displayed here:
- On the left side, the function of the fader is displayed. The yellow status indicator will give you the current fader
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
level.
- The function for the button above the fader is displayed at the top.
- The function of the button below the Fader is displayed in the middle cell.
- The function of the lower button below the Fader is displayed in the lower cell.
.
5 . 3 EXECUTOR Sheet
Micro
In the EXECUTOR sheet, you can see the sequence assigned to a FADER or BUTTON while allowing you to perform
3.1 Creating a window
modications to cues and cue data.
Touch the left corner of the title bar you can open the EXECUTOR SHEET OPTIONS window.
In this options window, you can select which Sequence is assigned to the executor by clicking on it. With the
FONT SIZE key, you can toggle the font size used in the EXECUTOR sheet between Huge, Big and Small. With the
DELETE WINDOW key, you can delete the Executor sheet or close the Options window using the CLOSE key.
In the EXECUTOR sheet, you can watch the progress of the sequence; the currently playing back Cue will be
displayed by a yellow background.
You can modify the MASTER fader using the left Encoder or by pressing the button above it.
Using the „RATE FACTOR“ Encoder, you can temporarily adjust all FADE and DELAY times. If the Sequence is
switched off, the RATE FACTOR will automatically be reset to 1.
You can set the time to be used when switching off (OFF key) using the right Encoder or by pressing the button
above it. If Default is displayed, the default time will be used 2.13 Default Menu
Using the “Arrow right“ or “Arrow left“ buttons, you can call up the next or previous Cue. With the double arrow,
you can call up the previous or next Cue without any FADE or Delay times. With the STOP button, you can switch
off this sequence.
By pressing the Edit Window button, you open the assigned sequence in the Edit menu. 4.3 Editing
Sequences
If the LOOPS key is pressed, the programmed jumps and commands will be displayed in the Sheet. If the EFFECTS
key is pressed, the calls of the Effect Groups are displayed. 4.3 Editing Sequences
If the LINK DEFAULT key of the title bar is pressed, the default sequence will automatically be transferred to the
EXECUTOR window when changing the default sequence. (Assigning the Default sequence 1.9 Layout and
Controls (items 9 and 10))
If you press the AUTO SCROLL key, the Sheet will be automatically moved upwards/downwards when working
with larger Sequences.
93
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5 . 4 TRACKING Sheet
In the Tracking sheet, all values and times/durations of a Sequence can be displayed and modified.
Create a Tracking Sheet. 3.1 Creating windows
Touch the left corner of the title bar, you can open the TRACKING SHEET OPTIONS window.
In this window, you can select sequences to be displayed in the Tracking sheet by clicking on them.
In the INCLUDED Sheet, all of the parameters of the Fixtures used in this Sequence are displayed. By clicking on a
parameter, you can move it into the EXCLUDED sheet. Parameters displayed in this Sheet will not be displayed in
this Tracking Sheet. With this function, you obtain a better overview for the Tracking Sheet when pressing the
MASK key.
With the FONT SIZE key, you can switch the font size used in this window between LARGE and SMALL.
By pressing the % key (DEC or HEX) you can switch the display of values between percent, decimal or
hexadecimal values.
With the DELETE WINDOW key, you can delete the Executor window or close the OPTIONS window using the X
key.
In this window, you can watch the progress of the sequence; the currently playing back Cue will be displayed by a
yellow background.
Colour codes used in the tracksheet:
Text CYAN:
New values or values that have changed in this cue.
Text MAGENTA:
Tracked values; these will not change in the next Cue and are not stored
Text GREEN:
Downfading dimmer values
Text RED:
“Blocked“ values.
- Button TIME = FADE / DELAY times will be displayed
If the FIX key is pressed (dark background), all selected Fixture parameters will be displayed first in the Sheet.
If the key is not pressed (indicated by a CHA), the Sheet will display all functions regardless of their
selections
selections. When selecting presets, the Fixtures/Dimmers will be sorted accordingly in the Tracking Sheet.
If the MASK key is pressed, the INCLUDED/EXCLUDED functions will be activated in the OPTIONS menu.
If the SORT key is pressed (dark appearance), the Fixtures/Dimmers will be sorted by selection and parameter.
When selecting groups or presets, the Fixtures/Dimmers will be sorted accordingly in the Tracking Sheet.
If the LINK DEFAULT key of the title bar is pressed, the default sequence will automatically be transferred to the
EXECUTOR window when changing the default sequence. (Assigning the Default sequence 1.9 Layout and
Controls (items 9 and 10))
If the AUTO SCROLL key is pressed, the Sheet will be automatically moved upwards/downwards when working
with larger Sequences.
Using the left mouse key, you can select values or times/durations (also by using the “lasso function”). Values
and times/durations can be modified using the middle mouse key. If you click and drag with the left mouse key
and then click with the middle button on the selected values, a window will open where you can enter values
directly.
To modify presets, must make a middle mouse click on the preset. A window will open where you can enter values
or load other presets direclty.
94
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
This is one of the few menus where using the mouse is the only method that makes sense.
The following window will open if you make a right mouse click on a selected value.
Use this window in the following manor:
1. Select one or more cells in the Tracking Sheet
2. Choose the DELETE, CUE ONLY, UNBLOCK or BLOCK
command
3. Execute the command by choosing the source (Selection,
All Channels of Selected Cues, Complete or Selected Channels for All Cues).
- DELETE:
Will remove all values.
- CUE ONLY:
Will copy the values of the previous step into the following step (that step must be empty).
- BLOCK:
With BLOCK, tracking values (magenta) can be converted into “stored values”. Theses values
will be displayed in red.
- UNBLOCK:
Converts blocked / stored values to tracking values (magenta).
Micro
95
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5 . 5 P age Administration
If you are in Channel Mode, the name of the currently accessible PAGE of channel faders appears on the touchscreens between
the small channel windows above your faders. 3.5.1 CHANNEL Mode.
If you are in Executor Mode, the name of the currently accessible PAGE of executor faders appears on the touchscreens between
the small executor windows above your faders
After pressing the LIST key once, the currently accessible PAGE of EXECUTOR BUTTONS appears at the bottom of the right display
including the name between the small executor windows.
Using the PAGE + & - keys you can open the access PAGES. Remember all pages output at once so changing page so no effect on
playback, only on what you currently have access to.
Or:
Hold a PAGE button down, for which another is to be called up. While holding down a button, the EXECUTOR Button LEDs will
indicate the current PAGE you are on (Example: If LED 28 is flashing, PAGE 8 is selected). By pressing another button you can
switch to a different PAGE.
5 . 5 . 1 Channel PPage
age
When pressing both PAGE keys of the Channel Mode simultaneously the display will show a summary of the CHANNEL PAGES.
Or:
If in Channel Mode, you can call up the summary for all Channel Pages by pressing the PAGE Keys in the display. By clicking on
the respective PAGE Keys you can call up the PAGE.
5 . 5 . 2 Executor Fader PPage
age
When pressing both PAGE keys for the Executor Faders simultaneously the display will show a summary of the Executor Fader
Pages.
Or:
If in EXECUTOR FADER Mode, you can call up the summary for all EXECUTOR FADER Pages by pressing the PAGE Keys in the
display. By clicking on a PAGE Key you can call up the respective PAGE.
The individual Faders are indicated by symbols in the respective PAGE Keys. The yellow bar graph will give you the currently set
value for the respective Fader. If there is a green square above the Fader symbol, a Sequence, a Group or a Special Master is
allocated to this Executor Fader. If this square is yellow, the Sequence or Chaser is active.
5 . 5 . 3 Executor Button PPage
age
When pressing both PAGE keys for the Executor Buttons simultaneously the display will show a summary of the EXECUTOR BUTTON Pages.
Or:
After pressing the LIST key once, the TFT display will show a listing of the Sequences assigned to the Buttons, and in the middle a
PAGE Key with the currently called-up EXECUTOR Page.
You can call up the summary for all EXECUTOR BUTTON Pages by pressing the PAGE keys in the display. By clicking on a PAGE key
you can call up the respective PAGE.
The keys are indicated by symbols in the respective PAGE keys. If there is a green square, a Sequence, a Group or a Special Master
is allocated to this Executor Button. If this square is yellow, the Sequence or Chaser is active.
96
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
5 . 5 . 4 Edit PAGE Name
Press the EDIT key once.
Select the PAGE key on the display.
The EDIT NAME window will open. Enter a name using the keyboard and confirm with ENTER.
5.5.5 Copying, moving and deleting PPages
ages
Copy or move a PPage
age containing the Executor faders or buttons
Press the COPY key once to copy Pages (LED is on).
Or:
Press the MOVE key once to move Pages (LED is on).
Press the PAGE key once (LED is on).
2“ for Executor fader or „3
3“ for Executor buttons (enter via numeric keypad).
„2
Press the „.“-(dot) key and then enter the page number.
Press the AT key (LED is on), enter the number of the target Page and confirm with ENTER.
Copy or move complete PPages
ages with Executor-Faders and buttons
Press the COPY key once to copy Pages (LED is on).
Or:
Press the MOVE key once to move Pages (LED is on).
Press the PAGE key once (LED is on).
Enter the page number.
Press the AT key (LED is on), enter the number of the target Page and confirm with ENTER.
Delete PPages
ages with Executor faders or buttons
Press the DELETE key once to delete Pages (LED is on).
Press the PAGE key once (LED is on).
2“ for Executor fader or „3
3“ for Executor buttons (enter via numeric keypad).
„2
Press the „.“-(dot) key and then the page number; confirm with ENTER.
A window will open; here, confirm the deleting operation with the DELETE key.
Deleting PPages
ages with Executor fader and buttons
Press the DELETE key once to delete Pages (LED is on).
Press the PAGE key once (LED is on).
Enter the page number on the keypad and confirm with ENTER.
A window will open; here, confirm the deleting operation with the DELETE key.
If there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows, in which the moved or deleted Pages were to be used, these
assignments may no longer work!
Micro
97
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
5 . 6 OFF menu (RUNNING PROGRAMS)
Pressing the OFF key twice will open the RUNNING PROGRAMS window.
All active chasers, sequences, effect groups, timecode shows and Macros are displayed here.
- CHASES ALL OFF: Switches off all (!) active CHASERS.
- SEQUENCES ALL OFF: Switches off all (!) active SEQUENCES.
- EFFECTS ALL OFF: Switches off all (!) active EFFECTS.
- TIMECODE ALL OFF: Switches off all (!) active TIMECODE SHOWS.
- MACROS ALL OFF: Switches off all (!) active MACROS.
Pressing the DETAILS key will open the View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu.
menu
- CURRENT PAGE OFF: Switches off all (!) Executors of the current Page
- ALL FADERS OFF: Switches off all (!) active EXECUTOR Faders.
- ALL BUTTONS OFF: Switches off all (!) active EXECUTOR buttons.
- EVERYTHING OFF: Switches off all (!) EXECUTORS.
- CLOSE: Will close this window.
You can also switch off Executors or Pages directly.
– [OFF key] [EXECUTOR button] [3] [TIME key] [2] [Enter]
e.g.:
– [OFFkey] [PAGE key] [3] [TIME key] [2] [Enter]
Fixtures or Groups can be released (knocked out) from direct access.
– [OFF key] [FIXTURE key] [3] [Enter]
e.g.:
– [OFF key] [GROUP key] [3] [Enter]
98
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
6.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS
6
Effects
6 . 1 Effect PPool
ool
In the Effect Pool, you can create up to 900 different Effect groups. In the individual Effects groups, different
Effects and functions can be combined and matched to each other.
For PAN/TILT values, self-created two-dimensional forms can be played back and adjusted. 6.7 Creating and
storing virtual forms
The individual Effect Groups can be subdivided into four different types:
- Effect Group with assigned Fixtures or Dimmers (key of the Effect Group is displayed in pink) - a specific effect
- Effect Group without assigned Fixtures or Dimmers (key of the Effect Group is displayed in red)- a generic
effect
- Temporary Effect Group (keys displayed in blue in the ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu). If this Effect Group is not
stored after having been created, it will automatically be deleted after it is switched off.
- Sequence Effect Group (Effect Group key displayed in orange). A specific copy of a generic effect that has been
created automatically because a generic effect has been used when creating a cue
6.1.1 Creating an Effect Group
Micro
Create an EFFECT window. 3.1 Creating windows
Select the Fixtures or Dimmers, for which an effect is to be used (selected Fixtures/Dimmers are indicated by
yellow characters).
Choose an empty Effect Group. New keys and Encoder names are displayed above the encoders. Pressing the
EDIT key for this Effect Group will open the EDIT EFFECT menu in the TFT display.
Or:
Pressing the ADD LINE key once will open the SELECT PARAMETER window. Now, select a function (e.g. PAN). After selecting a function, the SELECT TABLE window will open, where you can select an Effect for the chosen
function.
- PWM: Pulse width modulation
- RANDOM: Random fade-ins of individual channels of the selected function
- CHASE: sequential flash to 100% function
- SIN: Sinus function
- COS: Co-sinus function
- LIN+: Saw tooth ascending
- LIN–: Saw tooth descending
- TRIANGLE: Triangle function
- PHASE1/PHASE2/PHASE3: Normally used to create rainbow color effects on fixtures with color mixing. Each of
the phases is exactly out of phase with the other. This allows for an even and offset application across 3
parameters.
- By pressing the USER DEFINED key (turns dark gray), user-created two-dimensional forms can be selected for the
PAN/TILT function. If a form is to be created or modified, press the NEW or EDIT key to open the EDIT FORMS
menu. 6.7 Creating and storing virtual forms
99
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
.
In order to assign further Effects to the selected Fixtures/Dimmers in this group, press the Add Line key again. A
new line will be displayed and the Select Parameter window will open. Choose a function now and assign an Effect.
Up to 16 individual Effects can be combined within a Group.uss Edit key (LED on) and a key in the Effect Pool. The
EDIT EFFECT menu will appear in the TFT display
6 . 2 Editing Effect Groups
When choosing an Effect Group from the Effect Pool, respective keys will be displayed above the Encoders.
Pressing the EDIT key for this Effect Group will open the EDIT EFFECT menu.
Or:
Push Edit key (LED on) and a key in the Effect Pool. The EDIT EFFECT menu will appear in the TFT display.
6 . 2 . 1 Editing Effects
In the title bar, the Effect Group to be modified will be displayed with its number and name. In the second line, the
column functions are listed:
- Sel (Selection): Displays the numbers of Fixtures or Dimmers assigned to this Effect. If the Fixtures’ or Dimmers’
assignments are to be modified for an Effect, it has to be selected, this will be indicated by a red background.
Pressing the SHOW SELECTION key once will select the assigned Fixtures and Dimmers (displayed in yellow).
Select those Fixtures and/or Dimmers (will be displayed in yellow) that are to be assigned to this Effect. Now,
ress the TAKE SELECTION key once. The new number of Fixtures and Dimmers will now be inserted and adopted. If
an generic Effect Group is to be created (thats one without any selection which can then be used with any
selection), do not select any Fixtures or Dimmers, but press the TAKE SELECTION key once. The cell will now
display a “Zero”. The key of this Effect Group will be indicated in red in the Effect Pool.
- Filter: Here, a filter can be set that limits the execution of the Effect either to the odd-numbered or to the evennumbered Fixtures. To assign a filter, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once. The SELECT FILTER window will open, where you can select a filter for this Effect.
- Param (Parameter): Display of the assigned parameter for which the Effect has an influence over. To change
which parameter, select the cell and press the Encoder to the right of the display once. The SELECT PARAMETER
window will open, where you can select a different parameter for this Effect.
- Table: Here, the assigned Effect is indicated with its name.
To re-assign an Effect, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once. The SELECT TABLE window will
open, where you can select a different Effect for this function. The left part of the window displays the selected
Effect. If the Effect Group has been started, the Fixtures and Dimmers will be displayed on the Form mimic at the
bottom left of the display.
- PWM: Pulse width modulation. The pulse width can be defined as follows: Press the EFFECT SETUP key once
(key has a dark background), press the PULSE WIDTH key once (key has a green background). Now, the pulse
100
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Micro
width can be modified using the Encoder below. The pulse width can be set to between 0 and 100%. Pressing
the Encoder once shortly will automatically set the width to 25, 50, or 75%. You can also use the ALIGN
3.4.1 ALIGN function
function to set this value.
The values set for the respective Effects will be displayed in the WIDTH column. Press and hold the
Encoder and turn to the right so that the focus (blue cell frame with red background) will be moved to the
right. When moving the focus beyond the right border, further columns will be displayed (WIDTH, BASE).
- RANDOM: Random fade-ins of individual channels of the selected function. The number of channels to be
faded in can be set.
- SIN: Sinus function
- COS: Co-sinus function
- LIN+: Saw tooth ascending
- LIN–: Saw tooth descending
- TRIANGLE: Triangle function
- PHASE1/PHASE2/PHASE3: Normally used to create rainbow color effects on fixtures with color mixing. Each
of the phases is exactly out of phase with the other. This allows for an even and offset application across 3
parameters.
By pressing the USER DEFINED key (turns dark gray), user-created two-dimensional forms can be selected for
the PAN/TILT parameters. If a form is to be created or modified, press the NEW or EDIT key to open the EDIT
FORMS menu. 6.7 Creating and storing virtual forms
Pressing the SELECT key will adopt the function; the window will close discarding any modifications when
pressing CANCEL.
- Dir (direction): In this column, an arrow indicates in which direction the Effect will be executed. To reverse the
direction, select the cell and press the Encoder to the right of the display once.
- Size: In this column, each Effect is displayed with a separate value. The set value increases or decreases the size
of the selected parameter. The maximum limit for size modifications that can be set is from –200 to +200%.
Before modifying the value of a size, select the Effect first. Press the SIZE key once (green background). Now,
you can set a different size using the Encoder below. Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the size
to 100. Clicking the Encoder a second time will increase the value to 200 and at the third time will reset it “0”.
You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value. 3.4.1 ALIGN function
- Modulator: In this column, you can assign an individual Modulator to each individual Size effect. Using a Modulator, the effect size can automatically be altered. Think of it as and effect on the aplication of an effect to a
parameter.
To assign a Modulator for this effect, select this cell and press the Encoder on the right side of the Display. The
SELECT MODULATOR window will open, where you can now go to NEW MODULTOR by turning the Encoder and
clicking it to select this option. A new modulator will now be generated in the lower part of the sheet.
- Modulator: In this column, the different modulators can be discerned by their numbers.
- Table: The assigned effect for the modulator will be displayed by its name (Assignment item Table
Table,
previous page).
- From: The starting point for the automatic modification in terms of percentage.
- To: The end point for the automatic modification in terms of percentage.
101
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
- Phase: Here, an angle for moving individual modulators can be set.
- Rate: Display of the set ratio between the speed for this individual Modulator as to that of the whole Effect
Group (Assignment item Rate
Rate, below).
- Base: You can also set an average value for each Effect using the BASE VALUE option. The set value will
overwrite all previously modified values of this function and by this, will control all Fixtures/Dimmers evenly.
The value can be set to between 0 and 100%.
Before modifying the BASE VALUE, select the Effect first. Press the BASE VALUE key once (green background).
Now, you can set an average value using the Encoder below. Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set
the value to 50% (default value). Pressing the Encoder a second time, the value will be deleted and set to NONE
(no BASE VALUE). If no BASE VALUE ist set, the Cue that is playing back or a direct access value will take effect.
3.4.1 ALIGN function
You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value.
- Offset: By modifying the Offset, the starting points for the selected Fixtures and Dimmers will change. Default
setting is between 0 and 100, i.e. the first Fixture/Dimmer starts with an offset of 0, the last with a maximum
offset of 100%; all Fixtures/Dimmers in between will be distributed evenly. The maximum limit for Offset
modifications that can be set is from -100 to +100.
102
Before modifying the value of a size, select the Effect first. Press the OFFSET key once (green background). Now,
you can set a different Offset using the Encoder below. Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the
value to 0. You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value. 3.4.1 ALIGN function
- Rate: Display of the set ratio between the speed for this individual Effect as to that of the whole Effect Group.
Possible settings range between 1:16 and 4:1. At a ratio of 1:16, the rate set for the Effect Group will be divided
by 16. If the setting is 4:1, the rate will be multiplied by four.
Before modifying the ratio’s value, select the Effect first. Press the RATE FACTOR key once (green background).
Now, you can set a different ratio using the Encoder below. Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the
value to 1:1.
- Grp (Group): Display of the set number, by which the assigned Fixtures or Dimmers will be divided. In the
subdivided groups, the Effect will then fully be executed.
Before modifying the subdivision value, select the Effect first. Press the GROUPS key once (green background).
Now, the subdivision of the Effect can be set using the Encoder below. Clicking the Encoder once will automati
cally delete the set value.
- Wing: The set number will indicate, how often the assigned Fixtures or Dimmers and the Effect will be
mirrored. Possible settings range between –8 and +8.
Example: With a setting of 2, the assigned Fixtures/Dimmers will be divided in the middle. The set effect will
now be executed in the first half forwards up to the middle, and in the second half, the Effect will be executed
in reverse from the middle onto the last Fixture/Dimmer.
With a setting of -2, the assigned Fixtures/Dimmers will be divided in the middle. The set effect will now be
executed in the first half forwards up to the middle, and in the second half, the Effect will be executed in
reverse and phase-shifted by 180° from the middle onto the last Fixture/Dimmer.
Before modifying the wing value, select the Effect first. Press the WINGS key once (green background). Now, the
number of Effect wings can be set using the Encoder below. Clicking the Encoder once will delete the set value.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
- AS (Adaptive Speed): If this function is activated, the speed will automatically be adjusted when the number
of Fixtures or Dimmers changes. That means, the individual Effects of this Effect Group do not run at different
speeds when working with different numbers of Fixtures or Dimmers, but always at the same step speed.
To activate the function, select the cell. Press the Encoder right of the display once.
Or:
Activate by making a short right mouse click into the cell below AS. This will be indicated by a YES in this cell.
- Part (Partly): he sequence of an Effect can be subdivided 16 times, and an Effect can then be assigned to the
first individual subdivision. This colomn displays what the subdivision ratio this part of the Effect Group
belongs to.
Example: With a setting of 1:5, the individual Effect would always be executed in the first fifth of a Effect Group
sequence. Before modifying the subdivision value, select the Effect first. Press the PART key once (green
background). Now, you can set the subdivision of the Effect Group for the individual Effect by pressing and
holding the Encoder below. You cannot designate a section in which a particular Effect is to be executed, it
will always be executed as the first subdivision
Pressing the Encoder once shortly will set the value to ALWAYS and the Effect will be executed during the whole
period.
6 . 2 . 2 Deleting individual Effects
Select the Effect to be deleted.
Press the DELETE LINE key.
6 . 3 Executing an Effect Group
Micro
If an Effect has started, this will be indicated for the appropriate Scanner and Dimmer channels by a violett bar in
the Fixture, Channel or Fader Sheets. If you want to visualize the changes made to the values, the appropriate
3.4.8 or 3.5.7 Options of Fixture, Channel and Fader Sheets
Sheet has be set to “Output“ (Options).
Select the Effect Group from the Effect Pool. The Effect Group will be started automatically.
Or:
The names and playback keys for the Effect Groups will be displayed in the TFT display above the Encoders.
The name of the currently selected Effect Group will appear above the left Encoder.
– Pressing the right arrow will start the complete Effect. The selected Fixtures or Dimmers will now form the
Effect.
– Pressing the PAUSE key will stop or restart the complete Effect, respectively.
– You can switch off the Effect using the STOP key.
– By pressing the left arrow, the Effect will run backwards.
With the left INTENSITY Encoder, you can globally adjust the size of the whole Effect Group.
Pressing the Encoder while turning it will increase or decrease the Encoder’s resolution, depending on the setup.
When pressing an Encoder or the key above, this will bring up a Fader above the Encoder in the display. Now, you
can also use it to modify the value.
Use the SPEED encoder to set the speed for the whole Effect Group.
If you use the Encoder to increase the SOFTNESS value, the Effect will be faded in and out more softly. SOFTNESS
103
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
can be used for PWM-, RANDOM- and CHASE Effects.
Using the right FADE TIME Encoder, you can now globally set a fade in and fade out time for this Effect Group.
When switching the Effect Group on or off, this Fade Time will be faded in or out with the set duration.
Pressing the EDIT key will call up the Edit menu for this effect. 6.2 Editing Effects
Pressing the LIST key will open the VIEW ALL RUNNING EFFECTS window, where you have an overview on all
6.6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu
currently active Effect Groups.
6 . 4 Customizing an Effect Group
The global settings like e.g. Bounce, BPM, Intensity, Speed etc., are automatically stored in the Effect Group
You can customize the individual sequences of the Effect Groups by using the respective keys.
- Speed Scale: The current ratio of the SPEED setting will be displayed on the key. Pressing this key will open the
SPEED SCALE menu. Pressing a key will re-adjust the Speed setting. With MUL BY 2 or MUL BY 4, the SPEED
setting will by multiplied by 2 or 4, with DIV BY 2, 4 or 8, the SPEED setting will be divided by 2, 4 or 8. Pressing
the 1:1 key will recall the default setting again.
- Speed Group: The key will display the currently assigned SPEED group. Pressing this key will open the SPEED
GROUP menu. By pressing a key, you can designate a SPEED Group. Using the Fader of the assigned SPEED
Group, you can now adjust the speed for this Effect Group. 5.1.6 Assigning Special Masters
If INDIVIDUAL is selected (default setting), you can adjust the speed only by using the SPEED encoder.
- Bounce: If this key is pressed (dark background), the whole Effect Group will first run forwards and then
backwards, etc.
- BPM: If this key is pressed (dark background), the speed of the whole Effect Group will be controlled by the
automatic measure recognition. 2.14 Setting Sound signals
- Start Speed: Pressing this key once will store the currently set speed. The key will display the stored speed.
From now on, this Effect Group will be started with this speed, even if the speed was changed during the
execution. To delete the stored speed, use the Encoder to set the SPEED to STOP and press the START SPEED key
once. Now, no speed is stored and the key will display NONE.
- Off On Overwritten: This Effect Group will be switched off, when the OFF ON OVERWRITTEN key is pressed
(dark background) and another Effect Group is started, in which the same Fixtures/Dimmers are to be used
(default setting).
If this function is disabled, the Effect Group will not be switched off. It is still active, but does affect any Fixture/Dimmer. The key of this Effect Group in the Effect Pool will display a white/red flashing “2”. The number
indicates, at what position this Group will be in relation to the other overwritten Effect Groups. If the other
Effect Group that had overwritten this Group is switched off, this Effect Group will again affect the Fixtures/
Dimmers. This function is active by default when creating a new Effect Group.
- Sync Start: If this key is pressed (dark background), and another Effect Group had already been started, this
Group will automatically be started at the same speed and position.
- One Shot: If this key is pressed (dark background), the Effect Group will only be executed for one complete run
and will be deactivated.
104
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
6.5 Effect groups in Cues
During normal SAVE processes, you can also save Effect Groups in Cues. In the Cues, the settings for Call (GO, GO-,
Pause and OFF), Intensity, SPEED, SOFTNESS and IN/OUT FADE TIME are saved. In the Cues, no further
settings from the Effect Group will be saved (function as with presets).
Or:
It is also possible to create Cues, to which an own Effect Group can be assigned. If temporary Effect Groups are
used when creating the Cues, a copy of the Cue will also be saved, i.e. it will not be depending on the
original Effect Group anymore.
Start an Effect Group in the Effect Pool by selecting it.
Press the STORE button once.
Press the EXECUTOR button to which the call is to be saved. The Effect Group call will be saved in the Cue with
all settings mentioned above. If this Cue is called up, the Effect Group will be started.
When calling up Effect Groups, its size, speed and softness can be faded in or out. If in the Effect Group a FADE
TIME is set, the intensity and speed or softness of the Effect Group will automatically be faded in or out when this
Group is started.
In the Executor Sheet or in Edit Sequence, press the EFFECT button (will be displayed dark grey). The window will be
divided into two halves. The upper part will display the Cue, the lower part the calls of the individual Effect Groups
for the selected Cue, including the respective parameters.
Select a Cue in which calls or parameters of Effect Groups are to be modified (selected Cue will be displayed with a
blue frame and a magenta background).
The lower chart displays all calls of Effect Groups from this Cue.
Select an individual call to be modified (will be displayed with a blue frame). In the right display, the setting will be
adopted and displayed above the Encoders and can be customized at will. If intensity, speed or softness are to be
faded in or out with the set Fade Time when the Effect Group is called up, make one right mouse click into the
cells behind the value in column F (Fade). The column will show a Y for YES. Press UPDATE to confirm the
modifications and save them in the Cue.
You can modify the cells Name, Intens, Speed, F, Soft and Fade directly by a right mouse click.
Micro
105
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
6 . 6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu
In this menu, all currently playing back Effect Groups will be displayed.
Press the EFFECT key twice. (On older consoles, this key is not labeled and is positioned between the VIEW
and GOTO keys. An appropriate label can be ordered from MA or from your local dealer)
Or:
When choosing an Effect Group from the Effect Pool the respective key will be displayed above the Encoders.
Press the LIST key on the touch screen.
- By pressing the ALL OFF key, you can switch off all Effect Groups simultaneously.
- You can leave the menu with the CLOSE key.
- In the left part of the menu, all manually called-up Effect Groups will be displayed. Pressing the OFF key on the
right side of MANUAL, all these Effect Groups will be switched off.
- The middle part of the menu shows all Effect Groups that areplaying back via EXECUTOR faders. Pressing the
OFF key right of the EXECUTOR will switch off these Effect Groups. 5.1.1 Assigning Effect Groups to
EXECUTOR faders
- The left part of the menu shows all Effect Groups that are playing back via Cues. Pressing the OFF key on the
right side of CUELIST, all these Effect Groups will be switched off.
- The lower part of the menu shows all Effect Group calls performed since the last Cue was stored, including
their respective playback parameters. When storing the next Cue, all calls in this Sheet will also be stored.
It is also possible to modify individual calls. To do so, select the respective call (will be displayed with a blue
frame). The setting will be adopted, displayed above the Encoders and can be adjusted with them. You can
delete a complete call by making a right mouse click into the NAME column. If you only want to delete a single
parameter, make a right mouse click on the parameter.
6 . 7 Creating and Storing Virtual Forms (EDIT FORMS)
6 . 7 . 1 Creating Virtual Forms
From this menu, you can create two-dimensional forms for use with PAN/TILT parameters. When creating Forms,
the movements can directly be output to the Fixtures. The created Forms will automatically be stored in the Form
Pool.
6.1.1 Creating an Effect Group, item 3
Calling up this menu:
6.2.1 Editing Effects, item Table
Press the PREDEFINES key once. A window will open, where several prepared Forms will be displayed. Select
one of these Forms; this Form will now be displayed on the the black window.
106
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
6.7.2 Modifying Forms
The EDIT FORMS window will open by pressing the EDIT key.
Make a left click with the mouse on at least three positions of the marked form. With each click on the form, a
new red dot will be displayed on that position. In order to delete one of the dots, middle click with the mouse on
this dot.
To reshape the form, click and drag with the mouse on one of the red dots. If you click the right mouse key during
the reshaping (while holding the left mouse key), you can define the reshaping each time.
By pressing the key, you can program in which way the lines shall be drawn when reshaping the form:
- ANGLE: straight line
- ARC: outer arc
- ARROW: inner arc
By reshaping the form, the lines will be expanded and, respectively, the extended positions of the form will be
reported to the Fixture faster.
If the extended lines and, consequently, the longer ways for the Fixture are to be transmitted with the same
speed, you have to press the EQUALIZE DOTS key once.
The form can be modified in its horizontal or vertical size using the Hori: and Vert: sliders. By pressing the darkgrey key below the modified sliders shortly, both values can be set simultaneously. By pressing the “< >“ key,
both sliders can be coupled, so that the size can be modified simultaneously.
Using the ROTATION slider, the form can be turned from 0° to 360°.
By pressing the MIRROR key, the form can be mirrored.
You can leave the EDIT menu with the CLOSE key.
With good knowledge in maths, you can also use formulas for PAN and TILT.
Syntax to enter a formula manually:
The standard display of mathematic formulas will be executed. The following is allowed:
Mathematic Basic Operators: +, –, *, /
Make a left mouse click on the respective fields –
now enter the formula via keyboard.
The form will be confirmed by pressing CONFIRM.
Micro
Numerical constants: integers, floatingpoint numbers or exponential figures
Example for valid numerical constants: 2.71818
1.2e – 2
0,4
Other constants:
pi
corresponds to the circle figure π
Variables:
x
Mathematical functions:
–
sin(x)
or
sinus(x)
–
cos(x)
or
cosinus(x)
–
abs(x)
corresponds to the absolute amount
–
sqrt(x)
corresponds to the square root
–
pow(x; y)
corresponds to the y Power of x
Arguments errors with x = 0 und y < = 0 or with x < 0 and y are no integers
Examples: sin(3 * x)
sqrt(abs(x)) * sin(x)
sin(x) * cos(3 * x) * pi/2
(cos(x) * abs(x) + 1) / pow(x;2)
(cos(0.5 * x) * abs(x) + 0.5) / 2
107
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
6.8. Modulators
INDEX
While the modulators that are used for the effects will only influence the whole effect, it is now possible for each
feature to use a modulator for effects, and for the speed, size and shifting of effects within the modulators of the
Fixture and Channel Sheets. The modulators run within the Programmer, i.e. they are not permanent. You can only
save changes as Cues; effects transferred with the TOP button to the modulators will remain unchanged. For each
attribute of a fixture, four modulator settings are available, each of them being individual.
Starting with version 5.0 effects can no more saved in cues. You have to take the effects
into the modulators by pressing the TOP-button. See chapter 6.8 MODULATORS. Thi is the
only limitaion for the effects; they are perfect for preparation of modulators or for life
acts.
Assigning modulators to a fixture:
select fixtures (here the fixtures 3-5 from the Channel Sheet)
open FIXTURE or CHANNEL SHEET
in OPTIONS, press the LAYER CONTROL button; it has a violet background and shows, which values are displayed
in the Sheet (in the SPEED graphics of the Channel Sheet, and in PHASE in the FIXTURE Sheet); the violet or white
triangle shows, which value is being entered into the active Sheet using the Encoder (in the SPEED graphics in the
Fixture Sheet).
select the FEATURE to be executed by the modulator. (here: Dimmer in the Fixture Sheet)
In the Select menu, select for which features the modulator values are supposed to be valid. In order to do so, press
on the right arrow and select using the Encoder, confirm by pressing on the Encoder, or select the menu by pressing
on the text button.
- SINGLE only the attribute selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet will be changed
- SINGLE for ACTIVE only the attributes selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet and now being active will be
changed
- FEATURE only the feature selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet will be changed
- FEATURE for ACTIVE only the features selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet and now being active will be
changed
- ALL all attributes of the selected fixture will be changed
- LL for ACTIVE all attributes selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet and now being active will be changed
- DEFINED only the defined attributes will be changed In order to do so, press on the left arrow and select the desired
attributes from the menu (attributes with a green background have been selected); this setting remains valid for the
period that the show remains loaded.
- DEFINED for ACTIVE only the defined and active attributes will be changed
108
select a modulator; in order to do so, press on the right arrow and select it using the Encoder, confirm by pressing
on the Encoder, or select the menu by pressing on the text button.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
- select MODULATOR PROPERTIES using the left Encoder below the Screen, chose an effect or a setting and
confirm by pressing on he Encoder on the side of the Screen.
NONE
no effect selected
PWM Impulse Width Modulation
RANDOM Random fade-ins of individual channels of the selected function
TABLE here, specific effects have a special background (identical to TABLE in EDIT EFFECT)
FORM here, forms that were previously defined and are in the FORM pool memory have a special
background
- MODULATOR SIZE: here, you can enter the size of the effect (in the graphics, 100% are entered)
- open the Calculator using the Encoder below the Screen, enter the value und confirm with ENTER
- MODULATOR SPEED: here, you can enter the effect speed in BeatsPerMinute
- open the Calculator using the Encoder below the Screen, enter the value und confirm with ENTER
- MODULATOR PHASE: here, you can enter the angle for shifting the modulator
- open the Calculator using the Encoder below the Screen, enter the value und confirm with ENTER
All entries are executed immediately and can be controlled from the STAGE view or, even better, from the 3D
VISUALIZER.
- delete the settings by pressing 3x CLEAR; all effects will be deleted from the Programmer immediately.
or
Save setting as Cue:
press STORE
press on an empty cell in the small Executor window or an empty Executor button
The effect will be saved as a Cue; in the Sheets, the white text on a violet background will change to yellow on a dark
background. If PROGRAMMER ONLY had been activated, all features will disappear from the Sheet. This Cue can now
be executed or edited like a normal sequence.
Applying EFFECTS to the Modulators:
By transferring effects to modulators, you are enabled to execute changes very rapidly. As the effect will be
permanent, you can delete a temporary change after its execution or save it as a Cue.
start the Effect button in the Effect pool
press TOP
press the Effect button of the currently running effect in the Effect pool
The effect stops (disappears from the ALL RUNNING PROGRAMS menu) and its settings can now be seen in the
modulators. All fixtures involved are marked by a red bar; all settings taken from the effect, have a dark violet
background in the modulators (all changed modulators have a violet background).
Micro
109
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
7
BITMAP Effects
Besides the effects mentioned in chapter 6, you can use the Bitpmap Effects function to run graphics in a fixture
matrix. You can either create Bitmap graphics on a PC and then import them, or directly create them in the DRAW
mode. With CREATE TEXT, you can also create texts as Bitmap graphics. The „setting“ for the effects is a fixture matrix
to be created in SETUP. In the Editor, you can assign effects (e.g. rotation, zoom, etc.) and a layout to the fixture
layout. Bitmap effects can be assigned to Executors and be controlled very easily, just like normal effects.
TAKE CARE THAT THE FIXTURE TYPE USED HAS THE FUNCTIONS TO BE USED IN THE EFFECT.
7.1 Creating a Layout for a BITMAP Effect
Assign the fixtures in the setup:
In SETUP, you can create a matrix that will be visible in the Stage view; that helps creating Bitmap effects.
press SETUP
press FULL ACCESS
press STAGE SETUP
set COWLS and ROWS using the Calculator (number of vertical and horizontal rows of the matrix)
use WIDTH and HEIGHT to set the vertical and horizontal gap between the rows
use MAKE to execute the setting
Press „X“ to leave the menu.
Create a layout:
Here, you can create layouts that can later be assigned to a Bitmap effect.
open the LAYOUT VIEW menu using CREATE A WINDOW.
press CHOOSE LAYOUT and use the Encoder to select + confirm a free layout number in the overview.
open the OPTIONS (press the yellow button in the upper left corner).
press SETUP to open the MANIPULATE / SETUP LAYOUT menu.
click on the LABEL line and enter a name for the layout; confirm with ENTER.
select the fixtures to be used in the layout (on the STAGE, FIXTURE or CHANNEL Sheet).
enter the values for ROWS and COLUMNS (number of rows and columns making the grid); pressing on the
digit cell will open the Calculator; after entering the values, confirm with ENTER. The menu will now show the
selected grid where you can place your fixtures.
Transferring fixtures into the layout
110
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
- MOUSE FRAME; if the button is activated (text turns green), you can draw a blue frame on the grid. This frame
forms the target for the commands CLEAN, REMOVE, and FILL. If the button is not active (text is grey), you can fill the
grid using the FILL command, or you can deliberately position individual fixtures on a free cell.
- TAKE SELECTION; the selected fixtures will be transferred into the layout and you can position them using the
WIZZARD command.
- ADD SELECTION; when there are already fixtures positioned in the layout, the selected fixtures will be added.
- CLEAN FRAME; fixtures within the blue frame (drawn with the active MOUSE FRAME) will be taken out of the layout
and „bunkered“ as red squares adjacent to the grid.
- REMOVE FRAME; fixtures within the blue frame (drawn with the active MOUSE FRAME) will be deleted from the
layout, but can reintegrated again into the layout using the ADD SELECTION command.
Positioning fixtures within the layout:
The order in which fixtures are arranged, will influence how the effect will appear later.
The default setting is Left-Right, Top-Bottom, and Wrap Off – with this setting, the stage output will correspond to
what is displayed in the Preview window. Changes applied to this setting will not appear in the Preview window of the
Bitmap Editor, so that it is advisable to check them in the STAG view.
- LEFT - RIGHT / RIGHT - LEFT; places the ID number starting point to the left / right margin
- BOTTOM - TOP / TOP - BOTTOM; places the ID number starting point to the bottom / top margin
- WRAP OFF; arranges the fixtures horizontally in an ascending order of their ID numbers;
- WRAP ON; arranges the fixtures vertically in an ascending order of their ID numbers;
If a Bitmap effect runs on the same fixture matrix, but with differently filled layout, this will produce mirrored
representations. (see example on the left)
Using the default setting will take the stage output as displayed in the Preview window; if LEFT and RIGHT are
exchanged, the stage output will be displayed mirrored. You can save both layouts under different names and allocate
them to the effect.
FILL; all fixtures taken over into the layout will be placed in it using the selected settings (as far as there is enough
space available – fixtures in excess will be „spared“ in a red square adjacent to the grid.
or
position each fixture individually; in order to do so, click (mouse or finger) on the red square and draw it on a free
cell in the grid.
Press „X“ to leave the SETUP menu.
leave the LAYOUT VIEW menu using OPTIONS and DELETE WINDOW.
Micro
Use DRAW to switch over to the drawing mode.
In this menu, you can create a graphics in a selected layout by hand or mouse, or you can modify already created
graphics. Besides changing the layout, you can also change all values of the fixtures involved. Save the drawn
graphics as a bitmap or save the individual layout steps as a Cue. You can delete all changes by pressing CLEAR 3
times.
111
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
open LAYOUT VIEW
pick a layout with CHOOSE LAYOUT
pressing DRAW will bring you into the drawing mode
choose DRAW MODE.
- FREE; allows you freehand drawings using the mouse or your finger
- BLOCK; forms a rectangular frame
- COLOR; opens the color menu for fixtures with color changers Choose a color and insert the new color by
pressing on the Color button in the Select menu. When using ACT ON CMY, this color will be assigned
to the selected cells.
choose ACT ON
- GREY; a dimmer value will be assigned to the selected cells
- COLOR; a color value will be assigned to the selected cells
The selected cells receive a yellow frame and will disappear, the next time you touch the screen. Only if the selected
cells have an assigned dimmer value, these cells will be kept (grey scale according to dimmer value) and you can
select the next cells. Each selected cell will immediately loose its dimmer value – this way, you can delete individual
cells from the graphics. And this is also, how to create a graphics with different dimmer values.
- COPY;
- SELECTION; only the selected cells (yellow frame) will be copied
- TOTAL; all active cells will be copied
- MOVE; using the arrow keys, you can move the graphics in the desired direction
- MIRROR; using the arrow keys, you can mirror the graphics
saving or deleting settings
- using SAVE, you can save the graphics as sequence to a free Encoder or
- using BITMAP WIZARD, to switch to the WIZARD menu
- using SAVE BITMAP, you can save the created bitmap
- or the other way round: load a bitmap graphics in the Wizard, return to the Draw mode, and go on processing the
graphics there
or delete all selections and setting pressing CLEAR 3 times.
Press „X“ to leave the SETUP menu.
leave the LAYOUT VIEW menu using OPTIONS and DELETE WINDOW.
112
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
7.2 Creating / Changing BitMap effects
press EDIT and an empty button in the BITMAP EFFECTS window.
using CHOOSE LAYOUT, select a previously created layout from the overview; the current layout is indicated by
its name and number and with the number of rows and lines below the CHOOSE LAYOUT button.
Micro
open the BITMAP WIZARD to load, create or adapt a bitmap.
Creating a graphics
- CREATE TEXT; to create and save a text bitmap.
press CREATE TEXT, enter text and text size, and name the file.
with TAKE, transfer it to the Wizard, with TAKE SAVE save it and simultaneously transfer it, or just save it with
SAVE.
- SAVE BITMAP; to save a bitmap on the console’s hard disk.
- LOAD BITMAP; to load a bitmap from the console’s hard disk.
- DELETE BITMAP; to delete a bitmap.
- IMPORT BITMAP; to import a bitmap from floppy disk.
press „X“ to return to the EDIT menu
choose a background color
TILES (tiling function) sets the graphics as multiple tiles one after the other.
using BACKGROUND, choose the background color. Choose color and brightness in the Select menu and press the
button for the desired color.
COLOR CORRECTION / GREY SCALE CORRECTION
- set the offset values using + or - or the Calculator (pressing on the black number cell).
select a scaling
- SCALE 1:1; will transfer the bitmap 1:1 into the selected layout
- SCALE TO FIT WIDTH; will scale the bitmap to the optimum width for the selected layout
- SCALE TO FIT HEIGT; will scale the bitmap to the optimum height for the selected layout
- SCALE TO BEST FIT; will scale the bitmap to the optimum appearance for the selected layout
- using the Encoders below the screen to set the bitmap starting position; after switching the page, you can also turn
the bitmap around and change its rotation point.
The cross-wires and the projection frame are very useful when setting up the bitmap effect.
- OFFSET: here, you can change the bitmap-to-matrix position - the projection frame will be offset along the x or y axis
- ROTATION OFFSET: here, set the pivot point for a rotaton - the cross-wires will be offset along the x or y axis
- ROTATION: here, enter the bitmap position
- WIDTH: here, enter the bitmap width
- HEIGHT: here, enter the bitmap height
113
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
press „X“ to return to the EDIT menu
enter the values for the individual functions (e.g. horizontal shift or rotation).
Enter preset values: (if TOGGLE is active = is green, you can combine multiple settings)
- ROTATE RIGHT will insert „0° - 360°“ into the Rotation column
- ROTATE LEFT will insert „360°“ into the Rotation column
- SCROLL LEFT will insert „-5.0 – 5.0“ into the OFFSET X column
- SCROLL RIGHT will insert „5.0 – -5.0“ into the OFFSET X column
- ZOOM IN will insert the „100% - 50%“ into the SCALE X and SCALE Y columns
- ZOOM OUT will insert the „100% - 200%“ into the SCALE X and SCALE Y columns
or
Enter individual values:
- click on the cell in the respective column and open it by pressing on the Encoder; enter values and confirm with
ENTER
-
TABLE; here, you can select the effect
FROM TO; here, you can enter the starting and end points
PHASE; here, you can enter the angle to shift the effect
RATE stands for the ratio d
set ACT ON; depending on the setting and type of BITMAP, the buttons below are active (bright – values can be
entered) or inactive (dark – no modifications possible). The values allocated to the bitmap are marked by a violet bar
over the respective column in the Fixture or Channel Sheet.
- GREY: dimmer values are assigned to the graphics element
- TRIGGER: presets are assigned to the graphics element
- Preset 1 - the preset is assigned to the graphics background
- Preset 2 - the preset is assigned to the graphics
- Background - the preset is assigned to the matrix outside the graphics
- COLOR: color values are assigned to the graphics element
define the order using the 4 Encoders
- MASTER here, you can set the dimmer value
- SPEED here, you can set the effect speed. (however, the graphic’s movements also depend on the settings FROM
– TO, SPEED SCALE, and RATE)
- FADE here, you can
- MASTER FADE here, you can set the time to fade out and fade in the effect after start and stop
enter a name for the BITMAP EFFECT in the LABEL line and confirm with ENTER.
114
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Placing a BITMAP EFFECT on a fader / button:
press ASSIGN once
- press on an Executor button not yet assigned
or
- press on an Executor fader (small Executor window EMPTY)
in the ASSIGN menu, press the BITMAP EFFECT button
in the overview, select the desired effect using the Encoder, and leave the menu by pressing „X“
7.3 Starting the Effect
open the BITMAP EFFECTS WINDOW
press the button in the BITMAP EFFECTS pool
Or, if the effect had been placed on a fader or a button:
start the effect using the fader or button
As is the case with the effects, you can modify the speed while the effect is running
WARNING! If you open the BITMAP WIZARD in the EDIT menu, the effect will stay active!
Micro
115
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
8
Remote Control
8 . 1 Timecode
All sequences, chases and cues on the grandMA can be synchronized by using Linear Timecode (LTC) or MIDI
Timecode (MTC).
Timecode synchronization can be used to trigger one or more controllers to synchronize with an audio or video
recording. SMPTE 24-, 25- and 30 Drop and Non-Drop Frames are encoded time information, e.g. recorded on a
separate track of a multitrack tape (frequency range of 1–2 kHz). Normally, this Timecode is already added when
compiling the music, e.g. for presentations, but it can also be recorded afterwards in a regular recording studio. If
the music is recorded in stereo, a third track is needed for the Timecode.
All sequences programmed into the grandMA can be synchronized by Timecode.
During the playback of the tape, the Timecode information is transmitted to the connected controllers. Each
controller has an internal memory that triggers the activation of a specific program at a given point of time. On
the grandMA, the EXTERNAL LTC Timecode can be connected via a jack socket and the MTC via Midi IN on the rear
of the unit.
8.1.1 Introduction to the Timecode System
116
Here the major advantages of the new Timecode System:
- Timecode shows are organised in a pool. The basic handling of timecode shows like edit, copy, delete, etc. is
totally compliant with the rest of the console‘s syntax.
- Timecode shows are completely embedded into the command line. So you can now start timecode show
number 5 from a macro.
- GOTO commands are supported and are used as the default when recording normal GOs. This means that the
timecode show is referancing absolute cue numbers.
- Cue names and numbers are displayed in the timecode show.
- All kinds of executor fader movements are recordable. So you can now record the change of a chaser speed or a
manual crossfade.
- Automatic fader data reduction, reducing the amount of recorded fader movements dramatically and allowing
easier manual editing afterwards.
- Free choice of editing in graphic or text mode. Text mode supports filtering so that you can watch only the
executors that you want to.
- Blind programming.
- No restrictions to the number of timecode shows running at one time; memory permiting of course.
- No restrictions for “no mouse please, users”. The timecode show can be fully edited with the encoders and/or
the touchscreens.
- Timecode shows can be “write-protected”. So if you only want to watch your show running, you will not
accidentally change something.
- Copy / Paste functions between different timecode shows is now possible. Timecode shows can be merged
together.
- Autostart feature for timecode shows, e.g. the show will automatically load and run upon detection of the
correct SMPTE signal.
- Repeat function with definable number of repeats for timecode shows with internal synchronisation.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
8 . 1 . 2 Creating a Timecode Show
Graphically with the touch screens or mouse:
Open a timecode pool window.
Touch one of the timecode show keys, you will get the timecode control bar for this show in the display on the right.
Enter the name for the timecode show using the PC keyboard.
Press the EDIT field in the timecode control bar, and the timecode editor will appear.
Using the command line:
EDIT TIMECODE X ENTER . Brings up the timecode editor and the timecode control bar for timecode show X. There is
no hardware key for TIMECODE on the grandMA, but you can enter this in the command line or into a macro by using the
text keyboard.
Combining the two methods:
EDIT and then touch a key in the timecode pool.
If the timecode show that you have selected was empty, there will be only the empty editor in front of you and you can
now start recording or manual editing.
8 . 1 . 3 Playing back a Timecode Show
Graphically with the touch screens or mouse:
Brings up a timecode control bar for the desired timecode show when touching a key in the timecode pool.
Use the cells with the cd player-like symbols to control the show playback.
Using the command line:
COMMAND TIMECODE X ENTER. COMMAND is one of the executor commands that you will find above the page keys.
You can use GO+ , PAUSE, <<< , >>> , ON and OFF.
Combining the two methods:
COMMAND (as described above) and then touch a key in the timecode pool.
Description of playback commands:
Status
Command Line
Description
STOP
OFF
Show is stopped, no output is generated.
PAUSE
PAUSE
Show is stopped, output is generated for current time.
PLAY
GO+
Show is running.
RECORD
STORE
Show is recording.
JUMP BACK
<<<
Show jumps to the next breakpoint before current time.
JUMP FORWARD
>>>
Show jumps to the next breakpoint after the current time.
If a show is generating output, the corresponding key in the timecode pool will show the current time. In case of
recording, this key is also blinking red with the note “REC”.
External / Internal Sync
Micro
PLAY and RECORD on the sync setting in the options menu for their behaviour.
If sync is set to internal, time runs continuously, based on the internal time base.
If sync is set to “SMPTE“, the current time of the timecode show depends on the SMPTE input signal. If MIDI is set, MTC
(Midi Timecode) will be used.
In the headline of the timecode pool you will find a SMPTE input indicator. Regardless of the shows using SMPTE, it will
always display the current SMPTE input signal together with the SMPTE frame format.
If a show is using SMPTE (external synchronisation), the local time within the show can differ from the external SMPTE
117
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
time. By using the timecode offset in the options menu, you can set up a time offset, which is subtracted from
the external SMPTE time.
Shows which are using internal sync can have a user definable repeat. These settings are also found in the
options menu.
Pre Roll & After Roll, Dropout Elimination
Due to the fact that SMPTE is an analogue signal, fluctuations can occur. Very often there are temporary errors in
the recorded SMPTE signal which are called dropouts.
As such misleading small errors should of course not affect the board, it filters out these errors automatically.
Therefore the desk is filtering out these errors.
ROLL.
This filter is controlled by two values: PRE ROLL and AFTER ROLL
PRE ROLL defines the time that a signal must be error free before it is accepted by the console.
A small pre roll means that your console reacts faster to incoming SMPTE signals.
AFTER ROLL defines the time that a signal must be continuously in error or missing before it is assumed to be
off. During the after roll time, the console continues the show, using its internal time base.
A small after roll means that your console stops faster after the SMPTE signal has stopped, but that it is also
reacting faster to errors in the SMPTE signal.
The settings for pre roll and after roll can be found in the context menu of the timecode pool
pool. This can
be accessed by right clicking on the headline of the Timecode pool.
The names for pre roll and after roll have a historical significance. At the beginning of the timecode era , the
huge tapes in the machines which contained timecode and audio signals where really visibly rolling .
Manually Changing the Current Time
If the show is playing back or recording with external sync, it is not possible to change the time manually.
There are many different ways to change the current time of your show when using the internal time base:
Graphically with the mouse:
- left mouse click somewhere into the timeline
With the encoder:
- Turn the time encoder (leftmost) to change the current time. Each click on the encoder means one frame.
- If you p ress and turn this encoder simultaneously, each click means one second.
- If you press the encoder without turning, you can enter an absolute time.
With the “jump to breakpoint” commands:
- You will find them as the outer playback symbols in the timecode control bar and as command line functions
<<< and >>>.
- Time will jump to the next available breakpoint in the given direction.
With the event encoder (second) in the bar:
- Whenever you select a new event , time will jump to the exact time of that event.
118
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
8 . 1 . 4 Recording a Timecode Show
Recording is enabled only if the timecode show is not write-protected (options menu).
Recording will always be „live on stage“ and can be done in three ways:
a) Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation. The current time is given by the SMPTE
signal and every executor command or fader movement will be added to the timecode show until you stop or pause the show. Your actions and pre-recorded items already in the show will be live on stage. You can repeat the
recording process step by step to add more and more details to your show.
b) Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation. Basically the same as with external
sync, time is running continuously, but you where to start and where to stop.
c) Semi-automatic manual recording. In this mode time is not running, although your show is in
recording mode. Between each executor command that you want to be recorded, you can set the recording time
manually with an encoder or by direct absolute input (simply press the first encoder). This is probably the best way
of editing for the experienced user, who already has a time table in front of him. Even fader commands can be
recorded this way.
Starting to record:
- Automatic recording is started by pressing the record symbol in the timecode control bar (the red symbol).
The depending on the sync-setting (in the options menu) you will record with internal or external synchronisation.
Automatic Recording can also be started from the command line in a similar way to recording a macro: STORE
TIMECODE X ENTER or STORE and press a key in the timecode pool.
- Manual recording is started by pressing the MANUAL RECORD key in the timecode editor.
Stop recording:
- Recording is stopped when you PAUSE or STOP the timecode show.
- Automatic recording with internal sync will also be interrupted if you enter a new time.
- Recording is NOT stopped when you close the timecode editor. So be aware of what is being recorded, otherwise
you will discover a huge timecode show at some later point.
After recording
recording, particularly if you have recorded fader movements, it is a good idea to use the DO FADER
DATA REDUCTION (in the options menu). This keeps your show slim and easier to edit. The fader data reduction
process guarantees, that the compressed signal will not differ more than 1 frame in time and 1% in value from the
original. Usually recorded fader events will be reduced to 20% or less of the original amount.
The Length of the Show
During recording, the length of the show is automatically extended if needed. This also happens if you manually
add events after the current length (see manual editing).
The length of a show becomes very important if you plan to use internal sync and repeat. In combination with the
“when reaching the end” setting (to be found in options menu), it is worth taking into consideration how long
your show should be.
The length of the timecode show can be changed in the options menu.
8 . 1 . 5 Manual Editing of a Timecode Show
Editing is only enabled, if the timecode show is NOT write-protected (options menu).
Track Management
Micro
A timecode show consists of TRACKS:
A TRACK has a specific function. At the moment, only EXECUTOR TRACKS are implemented, but in the future,
it is conceivable to have tracks implimented for submasters, global speeds etc., too. This way, one track would
119
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
always relate to one specific executor. It is not possible to have two tracks for the same executor.
A TRACK consists of SUBTRACKS
SUBTRACKS:
A SUBTRACK has a specific function that relates to its “parent track”. For example, a subtrack for an executor
track could have the crossfade function. One subtrack always relates to one specific function. It is not possible to
have two subtracks for the same function.
Every executor track has at least one subtrack for executor commands. Subtracks for fader movements are added
if needed.
A SUBTRACK contains EVENTS
EVENTS:
An EVENT contains specific TIME and DATA information. The DATA is interpreted according to the function of the
assigned subtrack.
Adding Tracks
When recording TRACKS are automatically added, but of course you can also add tracks manually:
- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key or make a right click with the mouse in the track display of the timecode show
editor (on the left side, below the sort key).
- Select ADD NEW TRACK.
- Choose an executor from the list, or simply press a physical executor button. You can even enter EXEC 17
ENTER in the command line. An executor track for this executor will be added to your timecode show if it did not
exist already.
Changing the Executor
Changing the executor of an already existing track is very similar to adding a new track:
- Choose the track that you want to change (with the track encoder or by touching it)
- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key.
- Select CHANGE EXECUTOR from the list. The rest is similar to adding a new track.
Adding Subtracks
When recording SUBTRACKS are added automatically. Of course you can also add subtracks manually. Subtracks
can only be added to already existing tracks:
- Choose a track (with the track encoder in the bar or by touching it).
- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key or right click with the mouse on the TRACK.
- Select ADD NEW SUBTRACK.
- Choose the type of the new subtrack from the list.
Deleting Tracks or Subtracks
- Choose a track (with the track encoder in the bar or by touching it).
- Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key or right click with the mouse the TRACK.
- Select DELETE TRACK.
- If the track contains events, you will be asked for a confirmation, otherwise the track will be deleted
immediately.
- If you delete the first subtrack (like executor command track), the whole track with all its subtracks will be
deleted.
Expanding / Collapsing Tracks
120
Tracks can be EXPANDED or COLLAPSED
COLLAPSED. An expanded track will show all of its subtracks, while a collapsed
track will hide all its subtracks except for the first one. For an executor track, the first subtrack is always the
executor command subtrack.
This functionality only affects the display. “Hidden“ subtracks are always played back.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
An expanded track is marked with a “+” in front of it, a collapsed track indicated by a “-“.
Click on this mark to change the expand/collapse status of the track.
The TRACK FUNCTIONS menu contains functions to expand/collapse all tracks simultaneously.
Selecting Tracks
Tracks can be SELECTED individually. A selected track is displayed in a darker colour.
mode. For some functions it is important whether a
Only selected tracks are shown in TEXT display mode
track is selected or not. For normal operations however, in graphic display mode, you do not have to worry about
this.
Click on the track name cell (you may have to do this twice, because the first click is chooses the current track) or
press the track encoder within the bar to change the selection status of a track.
The TRACK FUNCTIONS menu contains functions to select/deselect all tracks simultaneously. These functions are
also available as direct “R” (Reset all tracks to unselected) and “S” (Set all tracks to selected) keys.
At the moment, selecting tracks does not affect the playback functionality, it is only a display and edit function.
For future versions, however, we plan to have that as a special playback mode, to enable playback output for
selected tracks.
Sorting Tracks
Perhaps you have a large number of tracks in your show, but currently you are only interested in some of them.
Select these tracks and press the SORT key. The selected tracks will be sorted and displayed at the very top of the
track display.
If you have selected all (or no) tracks and press SORT, they are sorted into their natural order, e.g. the order in
which they appear on the console.
The sorting of tracks is part of the show and is stored with the show. It is only a display function and not affect
playback functionality.
Adding Events
Graphically with the mouse:
- Choose the ADD mouse tool. The cursor will show an arrow with a large “+”.
- Click anywhere in a track. At the position you clicked with the mouse a new event will appear.
- To edit this new event right click on it.
With encoders and keys:
- Set the current time with the time encoder (first one) to where you want to add the event.
- Use the track encoder (second one) to select the track on which you want to add the event.
- Press the ADD HERE! key.
- At the given position, a new event will appear and now you are ready to edit the event.
When you are adding events on an executor command track, the timecode editor will try and predict the most
likely command at that particular point in the track.
For example if you have an executor with a sequence, containing 3 steps, and you simply add one event after the
other, it is assuming:
GOTO STEP1 , GOTO STEP2 , GOTO STEP3 , OFF
Or if you are adding a new event after a FLASH UP ON command, it will predict the new event as FLASH UP OFF.
For chaser, the editor never predicts GOTOs, instead it uses conventional Gos. The editor is also assumes, that you
only want to switch the chase on, and then off again, regardless of how many steps the chase has.
Micro
121
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Attention, mouse users:
Please be aware that if you have chosen the ADD mouse tool, this tool stays active. So wherever you click with
the mouse – something will be added. If you switch on “always reset mouse tool” in the options menu, the risk of
accidentally adding something is reduced.
Selecting Events
Events can be SELECTED individually. A selected event is displayed in red. All selected events together are called
the selection. You can MOVE, DELETE or COPY this selection.
Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode:
- Choose the SELECT mouse tool. The cursor will show a selection frame.
- Left mouse click somewhere in a track, keep mouse key pressed, and drag a frame.
- Upon release of the mouse key, all events inside the frame are selected.
Selection with the mouse in text mode:
- Left mouse click somewhere in the list, keep mouse key pressed, and drag vertically a frame.
- Upon release of the mouse key, all text lines (events) inside the frame are selected.
With the CREATE SELECTION function:
- Press the CREATE SELECTION key, the CREATE SELECTION menu appears.
- Choose to either make a selection on the current (green) track only, or on all selected tracks.
- Choose one of the three commands:
- A) BEFORE TIME
Events that are before the current time will be selected.
- B) ALL
All events on given tracks will be selected
- C) AFTER TIME
Events that are after the current time will be selected.
Selecting the Current Event
Only one event can be defined as the current event. In the graphic mode, this event will blink. In text mode, this
text line (event) will be yellow. Its position is shown in the timecode control bar.
You can select the current event one way or the other:
Graphically with the mouse:
- Choose the SELECT mouse tool.
- Make a selection that contains only one event, or click only on one event.
With the encoders in the bar:
- Select the track with the track encoder (second one).
- Select the event with the event encoder (third one).
With the XY-encoder in text mode:
- Simply scroll through the list.
Deleting Events
122
Graphically with the mouse:
- Select the DELETE mouse tool. The cursor will show an arrow with a large “-“.
- Drag a frame or click on an event. Events that you click on or that are inside the frame will be deleted.
With the DELETE SELECTION key:
- Make a selection or select the current event.
- Then press DELETE SELECTION. If more than one event is going to be deleted, you will be asked to confirm that.
Attention, mouse users:
Please be aware that if you have chosen the DELETE mouse tool, this tool stays active. So wherever you click with
the mouse – it will be deleted. If you switch on “always reset mouse tool” in the options menu, the risk of
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
accidentally deleting something is reduced.
Moving Events
Graphically with the mouse:
- Choose the MOVE mouse tool. The cursor will show a hand with a little arrow. The corner of the arrow is the “hot
spot” of the cursor.
- Left click INSIDE the selection or on an event and keep mouse key pressed.
- Drag the mouse horizontally. The selection/current event will follow.
With encoder within the bar:
- Make a selection or select the current event.
- Turn the MOVE encoder (furthest to the right). For every click of the encoder, you will move the selection/
current event by one frame.
- If you press and turn the encoder for every click you will move one second.
- If you press it without turning, you can enter a new start time for your selection/current event. This input can
be a relative movement if you use signs ( “-1.5” will move your selection 1.5 seconds backwards in time).
In text mode:
- Edit the Time column (by right clicking with the mouse or press the XY-encoder).
- The movement will be relative if you use the signs, otherwise it will be absolute.
Editing an Event
You can only edit an already existing event (see Adding Events).
Editing an event means to change its data. If you want to change its time, look for MOVING EVENTS.
Graphically with the mouse:
- Right click on an event and the Edit menu appears according to the type of the event.
With the event encoder in the bar:
- Select current event with the track and event encoder.
- Then press the event encoder. Edit menus will appear.
In text mode:
- Scroll to the event that you are looking for.
- Edit the appropriate column by right clicking or pressing on the XY encoder. The parameter column is only
editable for GOTO commands and for fader events.
Special fast edit for fader-events in graphic mode:
- This method is not exact enough for speeds, but for master fader events it is recommended.
- Click with the middle mouse key on an event and keep the mouse key pressed.
- Drag the mouse vertically with middle mouse key pressed. The value of the fader event will now follow.
Micro
123
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
8 . 1 . 6 Special Procedures
Recording Crossfades
Crossfades for executors are recorded as a combination of commands and fader movements.
These commands are:
XGoUp Crossfade will start upwards
XGoDn Crossfade will start downwards
Xend
Crossfade has ended
parameter, just like a GOTO command, therefore a crossfade may
XGoUp and XGoDn have a cue number as parameter
start on any cue, not only on the next one.
Try to record a crossfade and have a look at the outcome. You will see, that the global crossfade setting
CROSSFADE PERMANENT / RELOAD affects the recording.
In the first case, a pattern of XGoUp, XgoDn, XGoUp… Xend is recorded, while in the second case only XGoUps are
recorded.
Nevertheless you can change the global crossfade mode afterwards without affecting the playback of your
recorded timecode show.
If you edit a crossfade manually, be aware that the crossfade fader movement alone does not do
anything
anything. Although faders are moving, no crossfade is started. You have to place the crossfade commands on the
command track to make the crossfade work.
Accordingly, if you want to move a crossfade in time, you have to move both
both, the fader events on the fader track
and the crossfade commands on the command track.
At first glance, this procedure of recording a crossfade may seem to be complicated, but it has a lot of advantages:
- The crossfade commands are displayed in text mode, making crossfades more readable
- Crossfades relate to absolute cue numbers, like gotos.
- Crossfades are not destroyed by running fader data reduction
- You can jump into the middle of a crossfade, or run backwards into a crossfade, and it will be correctly initialised.
(This will happen quite often when using external time code!)
124
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
8 . 2 Remote Control via Touchboard
On the rear of the grandMA, there is a 25-pin SUB-D socket (DC REMOTE CONTROL) to connect a standard Touchboard
with up to 16 channels.
PIN 1 ... 16:
Input Channels 1 to 16
PIN 21+22:
+5 Volt (max. 100 mA Output)
PIN 17+18 und 24+25:
Earthing
The Touchboard input sockets only function as switches:
0 bis +2 Volt:
Off
+5 to +15 Volt:
On
8 . 2 . 1 Assigning Playback keys
press TOOLS .
press TOUCHBOARD REMOTE
The menu REMOTE TOUCHBOARD CONFIGURATION displays the commands; „Empty“ means, that there is no
command assingned to this button
Press the STORE key once (LED is on).
Press a key on the Touchboard, where a Playback key is to be assigned to, once.
Select a key in the REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu. Press the Playback button that you want to assign. The
selected button will now be assigned.
In the TOOLS menu, you can switch the Touchboard function on or off using the ON / OFF key.
Deleting assignment:
press DELETE
Press the Touchboard key or the appropriate key once.
The assigned playback keys will always be executed directly.
The assigned playback keys will be executed in combination with the previously selected commands.
Example: If an OFF key is programmed on a TOUCHBOARD key, but PAUSE is activated ( 1.9 Layout and Controls,
item 11), not the OFF command, but the PAUSE command will be executed when pressing this key.
Micro
125
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
8 . 3 Remote Control by DMX IN
DMX IN can be used to MERGE the signals of a second control board with those of the grandMA and transmit them
to the stage via the same data line. If, during this process, channels from the grandMA and from the second control
board are mixed up, only the higher value will be transmitted. DMX IN will only be linked to DMX OUT A and will not
be output via Ethernet.
For DMX-Merge information 2.9.1
Via the DMX IN socket, assigned commands can be called up from an external DMX console. The DMX input has
only the function of a switch that will release at approx. 10%.
8 . 3 . 1 Assigning Playback Keys
Press the TOOLS key once.
Call up the DMX-IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REMOTE key.
Press the STORE key once (LED is on).
Select a key in the DMX-IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
Press the Playback button that you want to assign. The selected button will now be assigned.
or:
Enter the Executor Fader to be assigned using the Command Line (e.g.: „Executor Executor 1.5“ means Exe-Fa
der 5 on Page 1) and confirm with Enter.
The assigned Playback buttons/Fader will be displayed on the individual keys. Only EXECUTOR buttons and faders
can be assigned to the respective DMX channel.
8 . 3 . 2 Assigning DMX Channels
Make a right mouse click on the key. A menu will open in which you can assign one of the 512 DMX channels to
this key. Identical DMX channels can be assigned to more than one key.
By pressing the PAGE 1 key, you can open another page (PAGE 2) with keys.
8 . 3 . 3 Deleting Assignments
To delete an assigned Playback key, press the DELETE key once (LED is on). Press the respective DMX IN key
once.
8 . 3 . 4 Using the DMX Input
In the TOOLS menu, you can switch the DMX input function on or off using the ON / OFF key.
If the DMX input is activated, you can use the assigned keys by switching on the respective DMX input. For clarity
when looking at this window, the keys in the DMX-IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu will have a red background
when switching on the respective DMX channel.
The assigned playback keys will always be executed directly.
The assigned playback keys will be executed in combination with the previously selected commands.
Example: If an OFF key is programmed on a DMX-IN channel, but PAUSE is activated ( 1.9 Layout and Controls,
item 11), not the OFF command, but the PAUSE command will be executed when calling up this DMX-IN channel.
126
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
8 . 4 Remote Control by MIDI
On the rear of the grandMA, you will find the MIDI IN, MIDI THRU and MIDI OUT sockets. Assigned commands can
be called up using e.g. an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer. Devices like these can be plugged into the Midi IN
socket. Only note commands are currently supported. The incoming signals will be automatically transferred to
MÍDI THRU. Also Midi Show Control (MSC) can be processed or sent.
8 . 4 . 1 Midi Show Control
The console can receive MSC commands which will be used to trigger the Master sequence only.
Push the key “Midi Show Control“ within the Tools menu; the menu Configuraton Midi Show Control will be
opened.
To receive MSC, set the device or the groups into the window „Midi IN“. You can switch between Midi Enabled
and Midi via Ethernet via the key below the window „Midi IN“. After pushing the key „Store“ all settings will be
stored and the function will be started
To send MSC, set the device or the group into the window „Midi OUT“. By the key „Send“ you can change
between sending Device, Group or ALL.. You can switch between Midi Enabled and Midi via Ethernet via the key
below the window „Midi OUT“. After pushing the key „Store“ all settings will be stored and the function will be
started.
8 . 4 . 2 Assigning Playback Buttons
Press the TOOLS key once.
Call up the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REMOTE key.
Press the STORE key once (LED is on).
Select a key in the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
Press the Playback button that you want to assign. The selected button will now be assigned.
The assigned Playback buttons will be displayed on the individual keys of the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION
menu. Only EXECUTOR buttons can be assigned to the respective MIDI note.
8 . 4 . 3 Selecting the MIDI Channel
Pressing the Channel key will open a menu in which you can select one of the 16 Midi channels by a mouse
click.
8 . 4 . 4 Assigning the Pitch
By pressing the KEY OFFSET key, you can transpose the incoming notes by one octave downwards. This can be set
for up to three octaves.
8 . 4 . 5 Deleting Assignments
To delete an assigned Playback button, press the DELETE key once (LED is on). Press the Key once.
Micro
127
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
8 . 4 . 6 Using the MIDI Input
In the TOOLS menu, you can switch the MIDI input function on or off using the ON / OFF Key.
If the MIDI input is active, you can call up the assigned keys by pressing the respective note keys on the MIDI
keyboard. For optical convenience, the key in the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu will have a red
background when pressing a note key.
.
8.4.7 MIDIOUT
For MIDI_OUT Commands use the following syntax in the Command Line:
MIDI Note:
MIDI Control:
MIDI Programm:
9
MiNote 0-127, 0-127
MiCtr 0-127, 0-127
Miprog 0-127
Macros und QUIKEYS
9 . 1 Creating Macros
With macros, you can combine sets of command line entries and key strokes for recalling in batchs. These can
also be:
- Playback buttons (e.g. GO, Fader, Pause, etc., incl. number of the Executor)
- Call-ups of Views
- Call-ups of Delete operations
- Other Macro calls
- Call-ups of Clear operations
Press the STORE key once (LED is on).
Press the MACRO key once (LED is on). The SELECT MACRO window will open.
Enter a name for the Macro using the keyboard.
- Press the TIMED key (will turn dark-gray) if the Macro is to be executed over the same amount of time as it
takes to
record it. The alternaitive is that the Macro will be played back as fast as possible.
Confirm with ENTER.
LED in the MACRO key flashes.
Now, enter all operational steps to be executed by this Macro.
To stop recording the macro press STORE, MACRO and then ENTER (LED in the MACRO key is now off).
This completes the MACRO Programming procedure.
9 . 1 . 1 Activating Macros
128
Press the MACRO key once (LED is on). Enter the number of a Macro via keypad and confirm with ENTER.The
macro will now be executed.
Or:
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Press Edit (LED on) and one of the VIEW soft keys.
Select MACRO from the assign a MACRO or a VIEW dialog box
The SELECT window will open – select which MACRO you would like to assign.
Now the Macro has been assigned to the VIEW key and can be activated at any time.
9 . 1 . 2 Macro PPool
ool
In the Macro Pool you can call up Macros directly by touching directly on the display.
Make a right mouse click on an „empty“ position on one of the three TFT displays or on an external monitor. The
3.1 Creating Windows.
CREATE A WINDOW menu will open.
Select MACRO pool and the MACRO window will open .
By press an MACRO soft key you can be activated at any time.
9 . 1 . 3 Editing Macros
Press the EDIT key once. Select a Macro from the MACRO Pool.
Or:
Press the EDIT key once. Press the MACRO key once, enter the Macro number and confirm with ENTER. The
EDIT MACRO window will open.
– In the LINE column, the individual commands are numbered.
– In the COMMAND column, all stored commands are displayed one by one.
– For each command the time between steps where the macro was recorded is displayed in the DELAY column.
This times can be edited or ignored for playback purposes.
Pressing the ADD LINE key will insert a step in front of the chosen position. Now, you can enter a command
using the text keyboard. If you want to use a Delay time when performing a command, click in the cell, enter
a time using the keyboard, and confirm with ENTER.
To delete a command, select one of the lines and press the DELETE LINE(S) key.
To modify a command, select one and press the EDIT LINE key. Now, you can enter a new command.
If you want to modify the Delay time, click into the cell, enter a different time using the keyboard, and
confirm with ENTER.
Pressing the EDIT MACRO NAME will open the EDIT NAME window. Now, you can enter a new name using the
keyboard and confirm this with ENTER.
If the TIMED (MARCRO) key is switched on, the calls of this Macro will be executed with the set DELAY times.
Pressing this key once will switch the display to MACRO NOT TIMED. In the Sheet, the DELAY times will be
displayed on a dark background, and the Macro will be executed without delay times.
You can leave the menu with the CLOSE key.
Micro
129
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
9 . 2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS
You can display and call up various keys, commands and functions using the QUIKEY pool
(Display Softkeys).
Create a QUIKEY window 3.1 Creating a Window
Press the EDIT key and click or touch on a key in the QUIKEY pool .
or:
Make a right click with the mouse on a key. The QUIKEY OPTIONS pool will open.
Clicking on one of the functions will assign it to the key. Using this method it is possible to
customise the console allowing quick and easy access to commonly used functions.
identsich mit den hard- oder softkeys
FLIP:
Moving Head Fixtures (this function is used to control the manner in which a Moving
head fixture moves between two positions):
– Pressing 1x: The head will be turned so that it is pointing to the same
position but with
different values for Pan & Tilt. All lights that have 360
degrees or more of Pan and 270
degrees of tilt can point at the same position using two (or more) sets of Pan & Tilt values.
– Pressing 2x: For fixtures with more than 360 degrees of Pan, a third set of
Pan and
Tilt values is possible while still pointing to the same position on stage. If the fixture only
has 360 degrees of movment it will return to its
original position.
– Pressing 3x: The head will be returned to the original position. When using head Fixtures,
the FIXTURE SHEET will show a yellow square left of the PAN value, symbolizing the current
head position.
Mirror Fitxures:
The PAN/TILT value will be inverted, the mirror will be positioned so to easily allow the
creatation of symetrical looks.
130
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
9.3 Agenda Menu
In this window you can set the time of day and date for the automatic execution of Macros. It is also possible to set
relative trigger points using sunrise, sunset, dawn and dusk as a reference.
You can select a different Edit Date by using the encoders or the keys on the display.
Pressing this key, you can toggle between day, week, month or year in this display.
- If DAY is chosen, the ADD, DEL and EDIT keys will be displayed.
Pressing the ADD key will include a new column in the sheet, where you can set the programming for automatic
control.
If a column is selected, you can delete it by pressing the DEL key.
If a cell is selected, you can change the function / time by pressing the EDIT key.
All created events will be displayed in this sheet.
Selecting a cell within a column and pressing the encoder will open a window where you can enter the following:
- Start:
Absolute: The Macro will be started at the set time.
- Dawn:
The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for dawn.
- Sunrise:
The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for sunrise.
- Sunset:
The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for sunset.
- Dusk:
The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for dusk.
2.15 Menu TIME & DATE
Time:
If ABSOLUTE is selected in this line under „Start“, a time can be set for the Macro to start.
If DAWN, SUNRISE, SUNSET or DUSK is selected in the start column, you can enter between -1 to +1 hour.
Consequently, the Macro will be started either 1 hour earlier or later than the calculated time.
Duration: If the unit is powered up later than the trigger time a setting in this column specifies the amount of time
(up to 8 hours), after the original trigger time, that the macro should still be triggered.
Repeat: NONE will execute the event only once.
DAILY, WEEKLY, MONTHLY or YEARLY will execute the event repeataly according to the set frequency.
Link: Here you can specify which Macro is to be triggered by the event.
You can enter a comment, using the keyboard.
First: If an event is displayed with black background in the sheet, this Event will be repeated on the current day.
This cell shows the date, on which the Event was first executed.
Last: Here, you can enter that last date that the Event will be executed. If an event is displayed with black
background in the sheet, this event will be repeated on the current day. This cell shows the date, on which the
event was last executed
Agenda Options
Touch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar.
Or:
With a right click using the mouse on the title bar, you can open the Agenda Options window.
The table will show all created events. By clicking with the mouse or the encoder you can select and edit specific
events
Micro
131
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
10 Command line
1 0.1 Introduction
The following chapter describes the functionality of the grandMA family of consoles
that can be achieved using the command line. “Command line operation” means
using physical keys or the keyboard as opposed to using the mouse or touchscreen.
10 . 1 . 2
Quikeys
10 . 1 . 3
Double functions of hard keys
On some grandMA consoles, particularly the grandMA replay unit, you may not find
all of the described hard keys. In spite of this small disadvantage, you can create a
QUIKEY pool window on the screen and arrange the missing functions there. Then
simply use these “soft keys” instead of the hard keys.
Some keys have more than one function due to space considerations. Some hard
keys have an alternative function at the second or even the third push.
Hard key
First press
Second press
ASSIGN
CHANNEL
EXEC
GOTO
IF
MOVE
PRESET
TIME
VIEW
EFFECT
GROUP
PAGE
ASSIGN
CHANNEL
EXEC
GOTO
IFOUTPUT
MOVE
PRESET
FADE
VIEW
EFFECT
GROUP
PAGE
LABEL
DMX
FADER
LOAD
IF
INSERT
FEATURE
DELAY
VALUE
VIEWKEY
Call up an effect view
Call up a submaster view
Call up a total page view
10 . 1 . 4
Messages
Third press
Sometimes the command line asks you a question upon the execution of a
command. It can also inform you about something that went wrong with your
command.
If such a message or a question window appears on the display, use the NEXT and
PREVIOUS hard keys to select the appropriate answer (the key with the thick blue
border) and then hit ENTER. Also ESC can be used for simple messages or warnings.
If there is a more complex question and you hit ESC, the action is considered to be
CANCELED. Every command line action that succeeds will appear in the history of
all command line windows.
10 . 1 . 5
Command line window
10 . 1 . 6
Using the PC keyboard
10 . 1 . 7
Using the command line history
Of course you want to be able to see the commands that you give to your console. Open a
command line window on the screen. There you can see what you enter and what you have
entered previously.
Some users may find it convenient to use the PC keyboard for command line input. Open a
command line window on the screen. Whenever this window has the input focus (title is
shown in deep blue), all keystrokes of the PC keyboard go into the command line. If the input
focus goes somewhere else, the PC keyboard will no longer work with the command line.
Touching the title or the bottom line of the command line window will give the input focus
back to it.
To permanently lock the the PC keyboard to command line input, press the SCROLL LOCK key.
You will hear a beep and the SCROLL LOCK lamp will be on, indicating that the PC keyboard
is now locked to command line operation.
If the PC keyboard is locked, you can not use it for other operations like naming presets etc.
But another push of the SCROLL LOCK key will unlock it.
If you are using the PC keyboard as command line input, you can only enter valid commands
and values. If you try to enter FIQQQ the command line will audiably warn you upon the
entry of the First Q. This is because the only two commands that the command line
recognises that start FI are FIXTURE or FIX.
In most cases it is not necessary to enter the full name of a keyword, the letter F is totally
sufficient for FIXTURE. You can find all keywords and their shortest form in section 9.2
command overview.
It is possible to recall previous commands from the history into the current command line.
There they can be re-executed or edited and executed.
a) - Left click with the mouse in the history of a command line window
- Or scroll with the XY encoder if the command line window has the focus
- Or use the UP and DOWN cursor keys on the PC keyboard if the command line window has
the focus (or the PC keyboard is locked to the command line).
b) Edit the command line if you want
c) Press ENTER. The command line will be executed.
132
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
1 0 . 2 Command Overview
Here comes the complete list of all possible keywords in the command line.
Keyword:
Shortcut:
Hard key:
As it appears in
Shortest possible form
meaning.
the command line. of the keyword when
explanation see chapter 3.
using PC keyboard. command line.
+
+
+
<<<
<
<<<
>>>
>
>>>
ALL
ALL
QUIKEY
ALL_CHASES
ALL_C
CONSOLE
ALL_SEQUENCES
ALL_S
CONSOLE
ASSIGN
AS
ASSIGN
AT
A
AT
CHANNEL
C
CHANNEL
CLEAR
CL
CLEAR
CLEAR_ACTIVE
CLEAR_A
QUIKEY
CLEAR_ALL
CLEAR_ALL
QUIKEY
CLEAR_SELECTION CLEAR_S
QUIKEY
COPY
CO
COPY
CUE
CU
CUE
DEF_GO
DEF
Yellow GO
DEF_GODEF_GOYellow GODEF_PAUSE
DEF_P
Yellow Pause
DELAY
DELA
2 x TIME
DELETE
DMX
DMX_BTN
EDIT
EFFECT
ESC
EVEN
EXEC
FADE
FADER
FADERBUTTON1
FADERBUTTON2
FADERBUTTON3
FEATURE
FIX
FIXTURE
D
DMX
DM
ED
EF
ES
EV
E
FADE
FADER
FADERBUTTON1
FADERBUTTON2
FADERBUTTON3
FE
FIX
F
Micro
DELETE
DMX
CONSOLE
EDIT
EFFECT
ESCAPE
QUIKEY
EXECUTOR
1 x TIME
2 x EXEC
Hit Executor
Hit Executor
Hit Executor
2 x PRESET
FIX
FIXTURE
Operation:
How to enter the Short description of the
keyword into the
For a more detailed
Plus
Minus
Go Back with no time
Go Forward with no time
All selection (with ODD/EVEN)
Accessing all executors with chases
Accessing all executors with sequences
Assign <source> <destination>
At , give value
Channel
Progressively clear programmer
Deactivate programmer
Total clear of programmer
Clear selection
Copy <source> at <destination>
Cue
Go forward for default executor
Go back for default executor
Pause for default executor
Enter delay mode or give delay time
Delete <destination>
DMX address
Remote DMX button
Edit <destination>
Effect
Escape , close dialogs
Even selection (with ALL/ODD)
Executor
Enter fade mode or give fade time
Fader, access executor faders
Middle button of executor section
Lower button of executor section
Upper button of executor section
Single feature like PAN
Fixing executors
Fixture
FLASH_UP
FLASH_UP_OFF
FORM
FULL
GO
GOGOTO
GROUP
IF
IFOUTPUT
FLASH_U
FLASH_UP_O
FO
FU
GO
GOGOT
G
IF
IFO
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
FULL
GO
GOGOTO
GROUP
2x IF
IF
INFO
INSERT
INVERT
selection
LABEL
LEARN
INF
I
INV
Exe-key
2 x MOVE
QUIKEY
LA
L
2 x ASSIGN
LEARN
LOAD
MACRO
MIDI_BTN
MOVE
NEXT
ODD
OFF
ON
PAGE
PAUSE
PRESET
PREVIEW
PREVIOUS
LO
M
MI
MO
N
OD
OF
ON
PA
PAU
PR
PREV
P
2 x GOTO
MACRO
CONSOLE
MOVE
NEXT
QUIKEY
OFF
ON
PAGE
PAUSE
PRESET
PREVIEW
PREVIOUS
SELECT
SE
SELECT
SEQU
STORE
SWOP
SWOP_OFF
TEMP
THRU
TIMECODE
TOGGLE
TOP
S
ST
SW
SWOP_O
TE
T
TI
TOG
TOP
SEQU
STORE
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
TEMP
THRU
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
TOP
Upflash executor
End of Upflash
Form, used by effects
Full, equals 100%
Go forward
Go backwards
Goto <cue>
Group
If (logical AND for selections)
If Output, create selection from
output
Info - Window
Insert <source> at <destination>
Invert <destination> , inverting
Label;give a name
Learn, change speed of running
programs
Load <Cue>
Macro
Remote Midi Button
Move <source> at <destination>
Next device of current selection
ODD selection (with ALL/EVEN)
Off, switch something off
On, switch something on
Page
Pause something
Preset type or Preset
Preview something
Previous device of current
selection
Select <executor> , select default
executor
Sequence (Cuelist)
Store
Swop executor
End of swop
Temporary run executor
Through, to enter ranges
Timecode show
Toggle running status of executor
Call first cue of executor
133
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
TOUCH_BTN
UNPRESS
UPDATE
VALUE
VIEW
VIEWBTN
TO
UN
U
VA
V
VIEWB
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
UPDATE
3 x TIME
VIEW
2 x VIEW
Remote Analog input button
Release of command
Update
return to value mode
View, contents of screen
Viewbutton, hardkey beside
screen
1 0 . 3 Command Reference
In this chapter, all commands are explained along with their syntax, demonstrating
all possibilities of using comand line entry.
10.3.1 K
ey word classifications
Key
In the following descriptions, the term starting keyword will appear often.
This “starting keyword” is a keyword that you start a new command line operation
with.
Basic operational keywords
A basic operational keyword in the command line determins a basic operation.
These keywords can only appear as starting keyword in the command line.
The only exception from this rule is the AT command. AT can
follow a list of object keywords and will still be interpreted as
operational keyword.
Operational keywords expect object keywords as targets for their operation.
Sometimes they also use helping keywords.
Keyword
Operation
ASSIGN
AT (operational form)
COPY
DELETE
EDIT
IFOUTPUT
INSERT
INVERT
LABEL
MOVE
PREVIEW
STORE
UPDATE
stage
output.
134
Assign one object to another, like assigning a
sequence to an executor.
Set a value to something.
Make a copy of an object.
Delete an object.
Edit an object.
Create a selection depending on an objects stage
output.
Insert an object at another location.
Invert the selection.
Change name of an object
Move an object to another location.
Have a look at an object without stage output.
Store data into an object.
Update data of active object. Active objects create
Executing Keywords
Executing keywords may be used as starting keywords, or as source in an assign operation.
As starting keywords they expect object keywords as targets for their operations.
Keyword
<<<
>>>
FIX
FLASH_DOWN ~_OFF
FLASH_UP ~_OFF
GO
GOGOTO
LEARN
LOAD
OFF
ON
PAUSE
SELECT
SWOP ~_OFF
TEMP
TOGGLE
TOP
Object Keywords
Operation
Go back with no time
Go forward with no time
Fix an executor. This executor will ignore page changes.
Temporary down flash of executor.
Temporary up flash of executor
Go forward.
Go backwards
Goto cue
Learn speed
Prepare next step of executor, wait for GO.
Switch off something.
Switch on something.
Pause
Select default executor.
Temporary up flash for executor and downflash for all others.
Temporarily run an executor.
Toggle executor on and off.
Goto first cue.
Object keywords are used as targets by basic operational keywords and by executing
keywords. They represent data, that can be manipulated.
Keyword
ALL_CHASES
ALL_SEQUENCES
CHANNEL
CUE
DMX
DMX_BTN
EFFECT
EXEC
FADER
FADERBUTTON
FIXTURE
FEATURE
FORM
GROUP
MACRO
MDI_BTN
Meaning
All executors assigned as chasers.
All executors assigned as sequence.
A conventional light.
One step or memory of a cuelist.
A DMX channel.
A Remote triggered by incoming DMX signals.
An freely editable effect generator.
An executor is the physical front end for executing
sequences etc.
A executor fader.
The button of an executor column.
A complex light that has more than just a dimmer channel.
A feature inside a fixture, like PAN or IRIS.
A 1 or 2 dimensional path, used by effects.
A collection of fixtures and channels.
Can do complex command line operations.
A Remote triggered by incoming MIDI signals.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
PAGE
A page is one set of visible executors.
PRESET
A memory that can be used indirectly as a placeholder.
SEQU
A sequence consists of one or more cues.
TIMECODE
A timecode show consists of many timed playback
instructions for executors. Can be synchronised with incoming SMPTE or MIDI signals.
TOUCH_BTN
A Remote triggered by hardwired analogue 0/10 V inputs.
VIEW
Stores a display arrangement.
VIEWBTN
A physical button that can call views and macros.
Helping keywords
Helping keywords are context sensitive and thus have different functions depending on
where they are used and what they are used with.
Keyword
+
AT (helping form)
DELAY
FADE
FULL
IF
THRU
UNPRESS
Immediate Keywords
Used …
Whenever you start a new command line with numeric values, this default keyword will
be used.
If the command line is empty, the current default keyword is shown by LED in the physical
key and the command line window
The following keywords can be the default keyword:
CHANNEL, PAGE, FIXTURE, MACRO, GROUP, PRESET, SEQU, VIEW, CUE, EFFECT, EXEC
The default keyword is also used by operational keywords.
Assuming that the default keyword is GROUP. Then you are typing in:
DELETE 1 ENTER. As a result, GROUP 1 will be deleted !
An exception to this are the keywords CHANNEL and FIXTURE. If they are the default
keywords, operational keywords will use CUE as the default keyword !
If CHANNEL is the default keyword. STORE 5 ENTER will do STORE CUE 5 !
Everywhere …
Everywhere …
by COPY/MOVE etc.
In executing commands ,AT, STORE etc
In executing commands, AT,STORE etc
As value 100 %
In selections
In ranges
After executing keywords
These keywords expect no additional parameters.
Keyword
ALL
CLEAR
CLEAR_ACTIVE
CLEAR_ALL
CLEAR_SELECTION
DEF_GO
DEF_GODEF_PAUSE
ESC
EVEN
NEXT
ODD
PREVIOUS
VALUE
UPDATE
Operation
Restores selection after ODD/EVEN NEXT/PREVIOUS.
Progressively clear the programmer.
Clear the values in the programmer.
Totally clear programmer at once.
Clear the current selection.
Go forward for default executor
Go back for default executor
Pause the default executor.
Escape from input or menu.
Select even devices inside current selection.
Select next device inside current selection.
Select odd devices inside current selection.
Select previous device inside current selection
Switch back from fade or delay to value mode.
Update data of active object. Active objects create stage
output.
The DEFAULT keyword
Micro
135
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
10 . 3 . 2
Ranges and Range Lists
Many commands are able to operate on a list of objects.
Instead of typing
DELETE SEQU 1 ENTER
DELETE SEQU 2 ENTER
DELETE SEQU 10 ENTER
you can write
DELETE SEQU 1 THRU 2 +10 ENTER.
A range can have the following formats:
X
only object X
X THRU Y
from object X to object Y
X THRU
from object X to the last object (very dangerous!)
THRU Y
from the first object to object Y (very dangerous!)
THRU
all objects (very dangerous!)
Please note that ranges have a direction. This is particularly important when
creating selection. FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 is very different than FIXTURE 10
THRU 1.
Ranges can be combined to Range Lists:
OBJECT_KEYWORD Range1 +/- [OBJECT_KEYWORD] Range2 …
It is not necessary to repeat the OBJECT_KEYWORD in the range list.
10 . 3 . 3
Detailed keyword list
+ (Plus )
a) As starting keyword
keyword, + enlarges the current selection. Everything
that follows after the plus will be interpreted as a selection:
+ CHANNEL,FIXTURE,GROUP,SEQU,CUE,EXEC,PRESET,EFFECT
b) In object lists it is including objects:
… OBJECT 1 + OBJECT 2 ….
c) In front of values it is changing the value to a positive relative value:
CHANNEL 1 AT +10 ENTER will increase the dimmer value by 10%.
d) As a starting keyword
keyword, and repeated
repeated, + is increasing the dimmer
values of the current selection by 10% every time you press +.
- (Minus)
a) As starting keyword
keyword, - reduces the current selection. Everything that
follows after the minus will be interpreted as a selection:
- CHANNEL/FIXTURE/GROUP/SEQU/CUE/EXEC/PRESET/EFFECT
b) In object lists it is excluding objects:
… OBJECT 1 THRU 10 - OBJECT 2 ….
c) In front of values it is changing the value to a negative relative value:
CHANNEL 1 AT -10 ENTER will decrease the dimmer value by 10%.
As a starting keyword
keyword, and repeated
repeated, - is decreasing the dimmer values
136
of the current selection by 10% every time you press -.
<<< (Go backwards with no time)
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every object that follows after the <<< will try to go back one
step with zero fade time
time.
<<< (target object list) [ENTER]
Target type
EXEC
EFFECT
TIMECODE
PAGE
SPEEDMASTER
Operation
Go backwards one step with no fade time
Start running backwards without fading in
Jump to the previous breakpoint
Does a <<< on all executors on that page.
Does a <<< on all chases using that speed master
(executor assigned to a speed master)
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).).
>>> (Go forward with no time)
c) As starting keyword, every object that follows after the >>> will try to go forward one
step with zero fade time.
>>> (target object list) [ENTER]
Target type
EXEC
EFFECT
TIMECODE
PAGE
SPEEDMASTER
Operation
Go forward one step with no fade time
Start running forward without fading in
Jump to the next breakpoint
Does a >>> on executors on that page.
Does a >>> on all chases using that speed master
(executor assigned to a speed master)
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN)..
ALL
ALL is clearing any sub-selection made with ODD EVEN NEXT and PREVOIUS.
ALL_CHASES
ALL_CHASES is an alias for the expression ALL EXECUTORS THAT ARE ASSIGNED AS CHASES. It
can be used wherever EXEC could be used. Example:
PAUSE ALL_CHASES ENTER
ALL_SEQUENCES
ALL_SEQUENCES is an alias for the expression ALL EXECUTORS THAT ARE ASSIGNED AS
SEQUENCE. It can be used wherever EXEC could be used. Example:
OFF ALL_SEQUENCES ENTER
ASSIGN
ASSIGN (source objects) (destination objects) [ ENTER ]
Source objects :
a list of objects which are of the same type.
Destination objects: a list of objects which are of the same type
Source object type
Executing keyword
P ossible destination object type
EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
SEQUENCE
EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3
GROUP
EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3
EFFECT
EXEC,FADERBUTTON1/2/3
VIEW
VIEWBTN
MACRO
VIEWBTN
Executor buttons and view buttons as hard keys automatically perform the ENTER.
Fix _No
DMX_No
to patch or repatch fixtures
DMX 1 = absolute DMX number
DMX 1.2 = Universum number.DMX number
AT
a) As operational keyword:
AT TYPE 1: Inputing dimmer values directly
[ (destination objects) ] AT values [ FADE fades] [ DELAY delays] ENTER
Destination objects: A list of objects that can create selections. Usable keywords are:
CHANNEL,FIXTURE,GROUP,SEQU,CUE,PRESET,EFFECT.
If no destination objects are given, the current selection will be used.
Values:
VALUE_X [THRU VALUE_Y] in percent
Fades:
FADE_X [THRU FADE_Y ] in seconds
Delays:
DELAY_X [THRU DELAY_Y] in seconds
Values, fades and delays are decimal numbers with dots ( e.g. FADE 1.5 ).
Examples:
CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 20 FADE 2.5 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTER
Will put channels 1 through 10 at 20% and give them all a fade time of 2.5 seconds. It
will also stagger a delay time across all 20 channels, with channel 1 having the longest
delay time and channel twenty having no delay time at all.
CUE 1 AT FULL ENTER
This will set the dimmer of all devices contained in CUE 1 of the default executor to
100%.
AT TYPE 2: Copying values with filtering:
[ (destination objects) ] AT [set AT filtering] (source objects) ENTER
Destination objects: Same as above.
Source objects: A list of objects that can supply values. Usable keywords are:
CHANNEL,FIXTURE,GROUP,SEQU,CUE,PRESET.
Set AT filtering: Keep AT pressed. After half a second the AT filter menu will appear.
Change the filtering while you keep AT pressed.
If the source objects are CHANNEL, FIXTURE or GROUP, the operation will be a
FILTERED COPY INSIDE THE PROGRAMMER All values except default values will
be copied if they pass the filter !
Examples:
FIXTURE 2 THRU 10 AT ( select CMY colour mixing) FIXTURE 1 ENTER
Micro
This command will copy the CMY colour of fixture 1 to fixtures 2 THRU 10.
You can copy patterns: Set fixture 1 to BLUE and fixture 2 to GREEN.
FIXTURE 3 THRU 10 AT (select colour) FIXTURE 1 THRU 2 ENTER
Fixture 3 will be BLUE, 4 is GREEN, 5 is BLUE, 6 is GREEN …
Source and destination devices can overlap:
FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 AT (select all features) FIXTURE 2 THRU 10 + 1 ENTER
This will perform a circular copy, shifting the values from device to device.
If the source objects are SEQU,CUE or PRESET, the operation will be a FILTERED EXTRACTION TO
THE PROGRAMMER
All values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if they pass the
filter !
Examples:
FIXTURE THRU AT (select PAN/TILT) CUE 1 ENTER.
This will bring all PAN/TILT information contained in CUE 1 of the default executor
active into the programmer.
CUE 5 AT (select GOBO) CUE 4 ENTER.
Devices of cue 5 get the gobos of cue 4 (of course only if the gobos were programmed into
cue 4).
CUE 5 AT (select GOBO) CUE THRU 4 ENTER
Devices of cue 5 get the gobos of the STATUS of cue 4 ! This is very different to the
previous example !!!
b) As helping keyword
keyword: See COPY MOVE and INSERT.
2x AT
Will set the defaul value for selected fixtures (set in SETUP / DEFAULTS/ DEFAULT AT)
CHANNEL
a) as starting keyword
keyword:
CHANNEL ENTER
CHANNEL becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
CHANNEL (range list) ENTER
Select channels in range list.
CHANNEL (range list) AT … (see AT)
Apply values to channels in range list.
Channel numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 … 9999].
b) as target for the following executing commands
commands:
ON
activate dimmer value in programmer.
OFF
deactivate dimmer value in programmer and deselect channel.
PAUSE
PARK dimmer value of channel.
GO
UNPARK dimmer value of channel.
CLEAR
Progressively performs:
1) If there is a selection -> Clears the selection. No device is selected.
ODD/EVEN/Sub-selection is reset to ALL.
137
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
2) If there is an activation -> Clears the activation in the programmer without
destroying stage output.
3) If there is stage output from programmer -> Clears the selection.
Clears the activation. Clears the programmer totally, all values returned to default
or to playback control. ODD/EVEN/Sub-selection is reset to ALL.
COPY
COPY (source objects) AT (destination objects) [ ENTER ]
Source object types Compatible destination object types
EXEC
EXEC
FADERBUTTON/123
DMX_BUTTON
MIDI_BUTTON
TOUCH_BTN
FADERBUTTON/1/2/3
DMX_BUTTON
MIDI_BUTTON
TOUCH_BTN
Currently there are some limitations for copying CUES:
1) A range list of cues can be
a.
A single cue
e.g. CUE 1
b.
A range of cues. e.g. CUE 1 THRU 10
2) Also the destination object must be a CUE.
Therefore the syntax COPY CUE 1 SEQU 1 AT SEQU 2 ENTER is not allowed.
Instead you must write COPY CUE 1 SEQU 1 AT CUE 2 SEQU 2 ENTER.
Please note, that CUE 1 SEQU 1 equals the term SEQU 1 CUE 1. Whenever the term
contains CUE, you are copying CUES !
CUE
General Format:
Expression
Normal meaning
In case of STORE
CUE
Current active cue of running New cue at the end
default
executor in default executor
CUE X
Cue X of default executor
CUE X SEQU Y Cue X of sequence Y
SEQU Y CUE X Same as above !
CUE EXEC Z Current active cue of running New cue at the end
executor
Z
in executor Z
CUE X EXEC Z Cue X of executor Z
X
Cue number in format A.B with intervals [ 0…999].[0…999] , B is
optional.
“CUE 0” is invalid, but “CUE 0.5” is valid.
Y
Sequence number in interval [ 1 … 999 ]
Z
Executor number in format PAGE.INDEX with intervals [ 1 …
64].[1…60] ,
or in format INDEX with interval [1…60] using current page.
Either X or Y,Z can be range lists. Range lists with X and Y,Z are not allowed.
138
Therefore:
CUE 1 THRU 10 SEQU 1
is valid
CUE 1 TRUE 10 SEQU 1 THRU 5
is invalid
a) as starting keyword
keyword:
CUE ENTER
CUE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
CUE (range list) ENTER
Select devices included in cue(s).
CUE (range list) AT … (see AT)
Apply values to devices included in cue(s).
b) as target for the following operational commands
commands:
AT
Extract data from cue
COPY
Copy one cue to another
EDIT
Edit a cue
IF
Select devices which are Part of the cue.
IFOUTPUT
Search for stage output of cue
INVERT
Invert selection of cue
LABEL
Change name of cue
MOVE
Move cue to another position
PREVIEW
Preview cue
c) as target for the following executing commands
commands:
ON
activates content of cue in programmer.
OFF
deactivate content of cue in programmer.
PAUSE
PARK all features included in cue.
GO
UNPARK all features included in cue.
LOAD
Prepare cue X as next cue for executor Z.
GOTO
Executor Z is calling cue X
DEF_GO
Is performing a GO on the default executor.
DEF_GOIs performing a GO- on the default executor.
DEF_PAUSE
Is performing a PAUSE on the default executor.
DELA
Y
DELAY
a) With executing keywords and executors
(Executing keyword) (Executor List) DELAY X.X ENTER
The execution command is performed on all listed executors with a snap delay
overwrite of X.X seconds. Does not work with PAUSE or flashing commands.
b) Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels:
[Selection] AT DELAY X.X [TRHU Y.Y] ENTER
Individual delays for the feature shown in the preset bar will be set to X.X seconds.
If no selection is given, the current selection is used.
Please note that the given delay may be a range. In this case, delays will be aligned
the given selection.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
over
The given delays can be signed, which will result in relative changes of individual
delays.
Giving individual delays can be combined with giving individual fades and values
into one AT command.
c) Clearing individual delays:
[SELECTION] AT DELAY ENTER
Works very much like b), but no value for the delay is given.
d) Setting default snap delay:
(No selection present) DELAY X.X ENTER
The next cue will be stored with X.X seconds snap delay default for all snap
channels.
e) As snap delay when storing a cue:
STORE (List of Cues) DELAY X.Y ENTER
The given cues will be stored with a snap delay default of X.Y seconds for all snap
channels.
f) Switching to delay display mode:
DELAY ENTER
All sheets wich are set to AUTO display mode, will display delays instead of values.
This effect is only temporary. All sheets will switch back to value mode upon ending
of the next command line operation.
DELETE
DELETE (object list) ENTER
Some forms of delete will need no ENTER in the end:
DELETE (hit key in a pool)
DELETE [CUE] X (hit executor button)
DELETE (hit viewkey)
All objects in the list must be of the same type.
Deleting an object that is assigned to an executor will also delete the executor.
Deleting an object that is assigned to a viewkey will also delete the viewkey.
Object
Comment
CUE
If no sequence or executor is specified, the
sequence of the default executor is used. If the
last cue of a sequence is deleted, the whole
sequence is deleted.
DMX_BTN
EFFECT
EXEC
FORM
GROUP
functionality.
is currently recording.
Micro
Do not delete effects which are used by sequences.
Deleting an executor does not delete the sequence,
group etc. assigned to it.
Do not delete forms which are still in use byeffects.
Deleting a group will also delete its submaster
MACRO
You can not delete a macro that
MIDI_BTN
PAGE
PRESET
Deleting a page will delete all executors on that page.
Deleting single presets is done with the syntax PRESET X.Y
with X=preset type and Y=preset
number. DELETE PRESET X will ask for confirmation and delete
all presets of the given type.
DMX
NO
NOTT IMPLEMENTED YET
YET..
DMX is accessing directly a DMX address.
DMX_BTN
A DMX_BTN (dmx button) is a remote function triggert by incoming DMX signals.
The DMX_BTN simulates an executor keypress, therefore it is working only in combination
with an assigned executor. DMX_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS / REMOTE DMX menu.
Calling a DMX_BTN manually:
DMX_BTN X ENTER
Linking a DMX_BTN to an executor:
ORE DMX_B
TN X EXEC/FADEREBUTT
ON1/2/3 Y
.Z ENTER
ST
Y.Z
STORE
DMX_BTN
EXEC/FADEREBUTTON1/2/3
Using EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor button.
X must be in the range from 1 to 96.
EDIT
a) Simulating a right click of the mouse for editing an input field or a
cell in a grid:
EDIT (click somewhere)
b) Starting EDIT / UPDATE procedure:
The whole procedure works as follows:
- EDIT object ENTER
- Only one object can be edited at once. If the edit / update procedure is still
running for another object, you will be asked to update the old one first.
- Programmer is cleared, and the values and selection of the object is loaded into the
programmer.
- All titles of fixture and channel sheet will show the name of the “edit object”.
- Change values and selection in the programmer as required.
- UPDATE starts flashing as soon as values are changed.
- Hit UPDATE. You will be asked for a confirmation and then changed values and selection is
stored back into the object.
- ESC will quit the EDIT / UPDATE procedure without updating the object at any time.
Objects that can be edited in this way are:
Syntax, start with EDIT …
Comment
CUE ENTER
[CUE] X ENTER
CUE X SEQUENCE Y ENTER
executor
Edit active cue of default
Edit cue X of default executor
139
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
CUE X EXEC Y.Z ENTER
CUE X (hit executor)
SEQUENCE X ENTER or hit key in
GROUP X ENTER or hit key in the
pool window
900 … upwards
Will edit first cue of sequence X
sequence pool window
Although a group has no values, group
the selection can be edited.
PRESET X ENTER or hit preset type on
Will edit first non-empty preset
the preset control bar of fixture sheet.
of type X
PRESET X.Y ENTER or hit key in preset pool window
c) Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT / PREVIOUS
object:
EDIT NEXT [ENTER]
EDIT PREVIOUS [ENTER]
If you use the NEXT and PREVIOUS hard-keys, ENTER is not necessary.
Next and previous will continue edit/update with the next/previous non-empty
object in the context of the current “edit object”.
Examples:
- EDIT PRESET 1 ENTER. Starts edit/update for first non-empty PAN/TILT preset.
EDIT NEXT goes on to the next non-empty PAN/TILT preset.
- EDIT SEQUENCE 1 ENTER. Starts edit/update for first cue.
EDIT NEXT goes on to second cue.
d) Opening an edit screen:
Some objects can not be edited in the programmer. They have edit screens to
manipulate them. Only one edit menu for only object can be open at one time. If
you open an edit menu for an object, all other edit menus will close. Edit menus
can be closed with the ESC key.
EDIT EFFECT X ENTER
or
EDIT (hit key in effect pool)
EDIT EXEC X.Y ENTER
or
EDIT (hit executor)
EDIT FORM X ENTER
or
EDIT (hit key in form pool)
EDIT MACRO X ENTER
or
EDIT (hit key in macro pool)
EDIT TIMECODE X ENTER
or
EDIT (hit key in timecode pool)
EFFECT
a) as starting keyword:
EFFECT ENTER
EFFECT becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
EFFECT (range list) ENTER
Start effects in range list.
Effect numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 … 999].
Effects are numbered in a certain way:
1 … upwards
User created effects
899 … downwards
Automatic created effects used by cuelists
140
Temporary effects, created from preset effects. These effects
are not visible in pools.
b) as target for the following operational keywords:
ASSIGN
Assign an effect to an executor
EDIT
Open edit menu for effect
IF
Deselect devices that are not included in effect
IFOUTPUT
Select devices that have stage output from the effectINSERT/
LABEL
Change name of effect
c) as target for the following executing commands:
GO
Run forward, start with fade in
GORun backwards, start with fade in
>>>
Run forward, no fade in
<<<
Run backwards, no fade in
PAUSE
Pause, stand still
OFF
Switch off, fading out
ESC
ESC (Escape) will progressively perform the following actions:
a) Is there something in the command line ? Yes -> clear commandline !
b) Is edit/update procedure running ? Yes -> cancel edit update
c) Is there an open window or a message box ? Yes -> close it !
d) Is there an edit menu open ? Yes -> close it !
EVEN
EVEN creates a sub-selection from the current selection.
If you have selected 10 fixtures and then select EVEN
EVEN, only the 2nd, 4th,6th,8th and 10th
fixture in this selection stays selected. The others have become “temporarily deselected”,
waiting to be fully selected again by the ALL command.
EXEC
EXEC X [THRU [Y]]
Executors X to Y of current page
EXEC P.X [THRU [Q.Y]]
Executors X of page P to exec Y of page Q
EXEC X [THRU [Y]] PAGE P [THRU [Q]] Executor X to Y of page P to Q
- Executor number X/Y must be in the range of [ 1 .. 30 ] where [1..10] is adressing the fader
executors and [11 .. 30] is addressing the button executors.
- Page numbers P/Q must be in the range of [1 .. 64 ].
a) as starting keyword:
EXEC ENTER
EXEC becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
EXEC (range list) ENTER
Select devices included in objects to given executors.
EXEC (range list) AT … (see AT)
Apply values to devices included in objects assigned to given executors
b) as target for the following operational commands:
ASSIGN
SEQUENCE,GROUP and EFFECT objects can be assigned with
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
the command line to an executor.
EXECUTING COMMANDS can be assigned with the command
line to an executor´s button. For fader executors, the
keyword EXEC specifys the lower key.
DELETE
Delete an executor. This does not destroy the object that is
assigned to the executor.
EDIT
Edit the object that is assigned to the executor.
IF
Deselect devices which are not part of executor´s object´s
selection.
IFOUTPUT
Select devices which have stage output from this executor
INVERT
Invert current selection by the selection of executor´s object.
LABEL
Change name of executor´s object.
PREVIEW
Preview executors object. If the object is a sequence, and the
executor is running, the next cue will be previewed.
c) as target for ALL executing commands.
Please look at 9.3.1 Executing Keywords for a summary or look at those keywords for
details.
FADE
a) With executing keywords and executors
(Executing keyword) (Executor List) FADE X.X ENTER
The execution command is performed on all listed executors with a fade overwrite
of X.X seconds. Does not work with PAUSE or flashing commands.
b) Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels:[Selection] AT FADE X.X
[TRHU Y.Y] ENTER Individual fades for the feature shown in the presetbar will be
set to X.X seconds. If no selection is given, the current selection is used.
Please note that the given fade may be a range. In this case, fades will be aligned
over the given selection.
The given fades can be signed, which will result in relative changes of in
dividual fades.
Giving individual fades can be combined with giving individual delays and
values into one AT command.
c) Clearing individual fades:
[SELECTION] AT FADE ENTER
Works very much like b), but no value for the fade is given.
d) Setting default in & outfade:
(No selection present) FADE X.X ENTER
The next cue will be stored with X.X seconds basic fade and outfade for all non-snap
channels.
e) As in & outfade when storing a cue:
STORE (List of Cues) FADE X.Y ENTER
The given cues will be stored with a basic fade and outfade of X.Y seconds for all nonsnap channels.
Micro
f) Switching to fade display mode:
FADE ENTER All sheets wich are set to AUTO display mode, will display fades instead of
values. This effect is only temporary. All sheets will switch back to value mode upon ending of
the next command line operation.
FADER
Format
Meaning
FADER X [THRU [Y]]
Fader X to Y of current page
FADER P.X [THRU [Q.Y]]
Fader X of page P to fader Y of page Q
FADER X [THRU [Y]] PAGE P [THRU [Q]] Fader X to Y of page P to Q
- Fader number X/Y must be in the range of [ 1 .. 20 ]
- Page numbers P/Q must be in the range of [1 .. 64 ].
Only one command is implemented for the fader keyword:
FADER (list of faders) AT (value list) [ENTER] This command will set the faders to the given
values.
F ADERBUTTON1
The same as EXEC, but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is explicitely pointing to the MIDDLE button.
FADERBUTTON2
The same as EXEC, but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is explicitely pointing to the LOWER button.
FADERBUTTON3
The same as EXEC, but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is excplicitely pointing to the UPPER button.
FIX
a) As starting keyword
keyword, it is used to fix / unfix EXECUTORS. A fixed executor is
physically present on all pages.
FIX (executor list) [ENTER]
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
FIXTURE
a) as starting keyword:
FIXTURE ENTER
FIXTURE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
FIXTURE [ 1 … 9999] ENTER Select fixtures in range list.
FIXTURE [ 1 … 9999] AT … (see AT) Apply values to fixture.
b) as target for the following executing commands:
ON
activate all feature values in programmer.
OFF
deactivate all feature values in programmer and deselect fixture.
PAUSE
PARK all features of fixture.
GO
UNPARK all features of fixture.
FLASH_DOWN
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after FLASH_DOWN reduces its
intensity channels to zero with no time.
FLASH_DOWN (executor list) [ENTER]
141
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
b) As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS
UNPRESS, every executor that
follows returns its intensity channels to their previous levels.
FLASH_DOWN (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]
a) In an assign command
command, this function can NOT be used. You have to use
the Assign menu for putting it on an executor button. It is simply called FLASH
there.
Note: It is almost impossible to use this command by typing it into the command
line. Rather use it when it is assigned to a button or as part of a macro!
FLASH_DOWN_OFF
Same as FLASH_DOWN … UNPRESS.
Please look at the FLASH_DOWN command description.
FLASH_UP
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after FLASH_UP outputs
all intensity channels of the current cue to 100% of their programmed value.
FLASH_UP (executor list) [ENTER]
b) As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS
UNPRESS, every executor that
follows after FLASH_UP returns all intensity channels of the current cue back to
their previous state.
FLASH_UP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]
c) In an assign command
command, this function can NOT be used. You have to use
the Assign menu for putting it on an executor button. It is simply called OUT
there.
Note: It is almost impossible to use this command by typing it into the command
line. Rather use it when it is assigned to a button or in a macro !
FLASH_UP_OFF
Same as FLASH_UP … UNPRESS.
Please look at the FLASH_UP command description.
FORM
a) as starting keyword it has no function.
FORM[ 1 … 999] ENTER
FULL
Full is an alias for 100% dimmer value (open).
a) As starting keyword, it is immediate, opening all dimmers of the current
selection:
b) After the AT command in value ranges like:
... AT FULL ENTER
... AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER
GO
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every object that follows after the GO will try to go
forward one step.
GO (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]
If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the pre-programmed times.
Target type
Operation
EXEC
Go forward one step
EFFECT
Start running forward
TIMECODE
Start playing forward
PAGE
GO on all its executors.
SPEEDMASTER
GO on all chasers using this speed master
(executor assigned to a speed master)
SUBMASTER
Unpark all channels involved in this group.
CHANNEL, FIXTURE, GROUP
Unpark devices.
PRESET X (Preset Type)
Unpark all channels of current selection of that
preset type.
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
GO-
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every object that follows after the GO will try to go backwards
one step.
GO- (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]
If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the default GO- times.
The default GO- times can be changed in the SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.
Target type
EXEC
EFFECT
PAGE
SPEEDMASTER
Operation
Go backwards one step
Start running backwards
GO- on all its executors.
GO- on all programs using this speed master
(executor assigned to a speed master)
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
GOTO
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after the GOTO will try to go
directly to a given step.
GOTO [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [FADE Y] [DELAY Z] [ENTER]
Using the keyword CUE is optional.
If W (cue number) is not given, you will be prompted for it.
If executor is not given, default executor will be used.
If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the default GOTO times.
The default GOTO times can be changed in the SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.
b) In an assign command
command, this function can be put directly on to an executor button (see
ASSIGN).
In actual fact you will end up with an LOAD assigned to the executor button as it has to ask for
the cue number.
GROUP
142
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
a) as starting keyword:
GROUP ENTER
GROUP becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
GROUP (range list) ENTER
Select groups in range list.
GROUP (range list) AT … (see AT)
Apply values to groups in range list.
Group numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 … 999].
b) as target for the following executing commands:
ON
activate devices contained in group.
OFF
deactivate and deselect devices contained in group.
PAUSE
PARK all devices of group.
GO
UNPARK all devices of group.
IF
IF is performing a logical command within selections. It never enlarges the current
selection. It leaves only those devices selected which are included in both selections:
Assuming that we have two groups (we will use real names to make it clearer):
PAR64
includes ALL PAR64 lamps
FRONT_TRUSS
includes ALL lamps on the front truss.
PAR64 IF FRONT_TRUSS ENTER
will therefore select all PAR64 which are
on the front truss !
General Syntax:
[ (selection1) ] IF (selection2) ENTER
If selection1 is not given, the current selection will be used.
IFOUTPUT
IFOUTPUT is selecting devices depending on the current stage output.
General syntax:
IFOUTPUT (object list) [ENTER]
If the object list is a hit on an executor´s button, or a click into an object pool window,
ENTER is not needed.
Examples:
IFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTER
All devices which have stage output
from executor 1 will be selected.
IFOUTPUT PRESET 1.1 ENTER
All devices which have the preset 1.1
active on stage will become selected. Very nice for selecting all fixtures that have a
“blue star” currently on stage.
IFOUTPUT (selection) ENTER
All devices of the given selection that
have a stage output at the moment become selected.
IFOUTPUT CUE/SEQUENCE/EFFECT works accordingly.
INSERT
INSERT (source objects) AT (destination ) [ ENTER ]
Micro
Example: INSERT GROUP 10 THRU 15 + 20 AT 1 ENTER
Insert is working ONLY with SORTABLE objects. Sortable objects are:
PRESET, GROUP,MACRO,VIEW,EFFECT,FORM,TIMECODE,SEQUENCE
Insert will try to make sufficient free space at the given destination by moving non-empty
objects.
INVERT
INVERT (selection) [ENTER]
INVERT is inverting the selected status of devices.
Example1:
Fixtures 1 through 5 are already selected.
INVERT FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 ENTER
Fixtures 6 through 10 are selected.
Example2:
All even fixtures of GROUP X are already selected.
INVERT GROUP X ENTER
All odd fixtures of GROUP X are selected.
Special case:
INVERT ENTER
The selected status of all devices that have ACTIVE channels in the
programmer is inverted.
LABEL
LABEL (object list) [“NEW NAME”] ENTER
All objects in the object list will be renamed to “NEW NAME”.
Directly entering the new name is only possible with the PC keyboard.
If the name is not given directly within the command, you will be prompted for it.
If more than one object is to be labeled, the given name will be enumerated for every
object:
LABEL PRESET 4.1 THRU “COLOUR1” ENTER
Preset 4.1 is named “COLOUR1”
Preset 4.2 is named “COLOUR2” and so on.
Please note that executors do not have a name of their own. Instead they show the name
of the object assigned to it. In this way, labeling of an executor does not change the name
of the executor, but of its object. Relabeling of executors can be very quicky done:
LABEL hit executor
executor,, enter new name.
Of course you can not change the name of an empty executor.
LEARN
a) As starting keyword, every executor that follows after LEARN will use repeated learn
comands to define a new speed.
LEARN (executor list) ENTER
b) In an assign command
command, this function can be put on an executor button (see
ASSIGN).
The LEARN function works with CHASERS ( a sequence assigned to an executor in chaser
143
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
mode) and with EFFECTS (regardless if they are assigned to an executor or not).
Note: It makes no sense to use this function by typing it into the command line. The
LEARN function will calculate and average the timing between 2 to 4 LEARN
commands and adapt its speed to that.
LOAD
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after the LOAD will go to
a given cue upon the next MANUAL GO command.
LOAD [CUE] [W] [EXEC X] [ENTER]
Giving the keyword CUE is optional.
If W (cue number) is not given, you will be prompted for it.
If executor is not given, default executor will be used.
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
MACRO
a) as starting keyword, given macros will be executed.
MACRO [ 1 … 999] ENTER
b) as target for the following commands:
EDIT
Open edit menu for macro
INSERT/MOVE Change visible number of macro
STORE
Start to record a macro from live actions. Macro recording is indicated
by a flashing macro key. Macro recording is stopped with the command STORE
MACRO ENTER..
MIDI_BTN
A MIDI_BTN (midi button) is a remote function triggert by incoming midi note on/
note off signals.
The MIDI_BTN simulates an executor keypress, therefore it is working only in
combination with an assigned executor. MIDI_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS /
REMOTE MIDI menu.
Calling a MIDI_BTN manually:
MIDI_BTN X ENTER
Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor:
STORE MIDI_BTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTON1/2/3 Y.Z ENTER
Using EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor
button. X must be in the range from 1 to 72.
MOVE
MOVE (source objects) AT (destination objects) [ ENTER ]
Source objects :
a range list of objects which are all of type X.
Destination objects: a range list of objects which are all of type Y
Object types X and Y must be equal or compatible (see COPY)
If object type is sortable, MOVE object_a AT object_b will exchange objects.
144
If object type in not sortable, object_b will be overwritten with object_a, then the original
object_a will be deleted.
Sortable objects are
are:
PRESET, GROUP,MACRO,VIEW,EFFECT,FORM,TIMECODE,SEQUENCE
Nonsortable objects are:
EXEC,CUE,PAGE,VIEWBTN,DMXBTN,MIDIBTN,TOUCHBTN
The following objects can not be moved
moved:
CHANNEL,FIXTURE,DMX,FEATURE,FADER
NEXT
a) Create a subselection from the current selection:
If you have selected more than one fixture and then say NEXT
NEXT, only the first fixture stays
selected and the others become “temporarly deselected”.
The next time you say NEXT
NEXT, only the 2nd fixture within the current selection is “really
selected” and so on. The
ALL command will clear this subselection.
b) Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with NEXT object:
c) Cursor Right in open dialog windows.
In all temporary dialog windows and message boxes, you can use the NEXT key to move the
input focus in that window to the right. Together with PREVIOUS and ENTER you can,
for example, choose the appropriate answer in a message box.
ODD
ODD is creating a sub-selection from the current selection.
If you have selected 10 fixtures and the say ODD
ODD, only the 1st , 3th,5th,7th and 9th fixture in
this selection stays Selected. The others become “Temporarily deselected”, waiting to be
fully selected again by the ALL command.
OFF
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every object that follows after the OFF will be switched OFF.
OFF (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]
If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the default OFF time.
The default OFF times can be changed in the SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.
Target type
Operation
EXEC
Switch off executor
EFFECT
Switch off effect (fading out)
TIMECODE
Stop timecode show
PAGE
Does OFF on all its executors.
SPEEDMASTER
Does OFF on all programs using this speed master (executor
assigned
to a speed
master)
SUBMASTER
“Knock out” all channels involved in this group.
CHANNEL,FIXTURE and GROU “Knock out” all given devices.
PRESET X (Preset Type)
“Knock out” all channels of current selection of that preset
type.
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
“Knock out” means to clear the programmer completely for a channel.
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
ON
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every object that follows after the ON will be switched ON without
changing the current step.
ON (target object list) [FADE X] [DELAY Y] [ENTER]
If fade or delay are given, they overwrite the pre-programmed times.
Target type
Operation
EXEC
EFFECT
PAGE
SPEEDMASTER
Switch on executor
Switch on effect (fading in in last direction)
Does On on all its executors.
Does On on all chasers using this speed master
(executor assigned to a speed master)
SUBMASTER
“Knock in” all channels involved in this group.
CHANNEL,FIXTURE and GROUP“Knock in” all given devices.
PRESET X (Preset Type)
“Knock in” all channels of current selection of that preset type.
“Knock in” means to activate the programmer for a channel with its current value. This function
can also be used to make “snapshots” of running programs.
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
PAGE
a) As staring keyword, the given page will become the current page.
P AGE TT.X
.X ENTER
T
Type of page in range [1..3]
Type 1 means Dimmer pages
Type 2 means Fader executor pages
Type 3 means Button executor pages
X
For dimmer pages in range [ 1.. amount dimmers divided by 20 ]
For executor pages in range [1..64]
PAGE X ENTER
Will select fader and button executor page together
PAUSE
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every object that follows after the PAUSE will be paused.
PAUSE (target object list) [ENTER]
Target type
EXEC
EFFECT
PAGE
SPEEDMASTER
Operation
Pause an executor
Pause an effect
Pauses all executors on the page.
Pauses all chasers using this speed master
(executor assigned to a speed master)
SUBMASTER
“Park” all channels involved in this group.
CHANNEL,FIXTURE and GROUP “Park” all given devices.
PRESET X (Preset Type)
“Park” all channels of current selection of that
Micro
preset type.
“Park” means to freeze the output for a channel with its current value. Parked
channels are shown with a bright blue background in the sheets. Although a
channel is parked, it can still be used normally for programming purposes.
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
PRESET
a) as starting keyword:
PRESET ENTER
PRESET becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
PRESET TT.X
.X ENTER
Call Preset X of type T.
X Preset number in range [ 1…999]
T Preset type in range [1…9]
b) as target for the following operational commands:
EDIT
Start edit / update procedure for preset
IF
Deselect devices which are not part of the preset.
IFOUTPUT
Search for stage output of preset
PREVIEW
PREVIEW (object) [ENTER]
Only one object can be previewed at one time.
Preview will show the content of the object in the fixture / channel sheets
without outputing to stage (blind). Programmer contents is not destroyed but
using Preview.
Preview will be indicated by all sheets, showing PREVIEW in their titles.
Preview is cancelled by the next command line operation.
PREVIOUS
a) Create a subselection from the current selection:
If you have selected more than one fixture and then say PREVIOUS, only the last
fixture of the selection actually stays selected. The others become “temporarily
deselected”. The next time you say PREVIOUS, only the 2nd last fixture within the
current selection is actually selected and so on. The ALL command will clear this
subselection.
b) Continue EDIT / UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object.
c) Cursor Left in open dialog windows.
In all temporary dialog windows and message boxes, you can use the PREVIOUS
key to move the input focus in that window to the left. Together with NEXT and
ENTER you can , for example , choose the appropriate answer in a message box.
SELECT
a) As starting keyword, it is used to select the DEFAULT EXECUTOR.
SELECT hit executor
SELECT EXEC X ENTER
145
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
The default executor can be identified by its green title in the executor mini
displays.
The default executor is reacting to the DEF_GO,DEF_GO- and DEF_PAUSE
commands and to their physical counterpart, the three big yellow buttons.
During programming it can be very convenient to make the executor you are
working on the default one. Many commands assume to work with the default
executor if no other executor is given.
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN)..
Pushing this button will select the executor of the button as default executor.
SWOP (executor list) [ENTER]
b) As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS
UNPRESS, every executor that follows after
SWOP reduces the intensity of all programmed dimmer channels to 0% while restoring the
intensity of all other executors to 100%
SWOP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]
c) In an assign command
command, this function can NOT be used. You have to use the Assign
menu to define it on an executor´s button.
Note: It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line. Use it
when it is assigned to a button or as part of a macro!
SEQU
SWOP_OFF
a) as starting keyword:
SEQU ENTER
SEQU becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
SEQU (range list) ENTER
Select devices included in sequences.
Sequence numbers must be in the range of [ 1…999]
SEQU (range list) AT … (see AT) Apply values to devices included in sequences.
b) as target for the following operational commands:
EDIT
Opens edit menu for sequence
IF
Deselect devices which are not part of the sequence.
IFOUTPUT
Search for stage output of sequence
INVERT
Invert selection of sequence
c) as target for the following executing commands:
ON
“Knock in” all devices contained in sequence.
OFF
“Knock out” all devices contained in sequence.
PAUSE
PARK all devices contained in sequence.
GO
UNPARK all devices contained in sequence.
Same as SWOP … UNPRESS.
Please look at the SWOP command description.
TEMP
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after TEMP performs a GO if it
wasn´t already running..
TEMP (executor list) [ENTER]
b) As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS
UNPRESS, every executor that follows after
TEMP is switched OFF.
TEMP (executor list) UNPRESS [ENTER]
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
Note: It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line. Rather
use it when it is assigned to a button or in a Macro! TEMP does not really exist as a function.
It is always translated into a pair of GO/OFF commands. You will see that if you record TEMP
in a timecode show.
STORE
THRU
SWOP
TIMECODE
STORE (object list) [ENTER]
All objects in the object list must be of the same type.
If no object is given, a new cue is stored into the default executor.
If the destination of the store command is not empty, you will be asked for
confirmation.
In case of storing over existing cues, you will furthermore be asked about the
desired store mode. e.g. merge, overwrite or remove.
If you start storing by pressing the ST
ORE hard key
key,, a temporary
STORE
window will appear
appear..
The settings in this window affect the way , the store command is handled.
Defaults for these store options can be found in SETUP / DEFAULTS menu.
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after SWOP increases the
intensity of all programmed dimmer channels to 100% while reducing all other
executors to 0% ( as long they are not protected against swop).
146
THRU can only be used within other commands to create ranges.
X
THRU Y
Range from X to Y
X
THRU
Range from X to the end
THRU Y
Range from the beginning to Y
THRU
Range from the beginning up to the end.
The meaning of “beginning” and “end” depend on the context:
FIXTURE 10 THRU ENTER will select all fixtures from 10 upwards.
Thru can of course also be used to create ranges of values like
CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER
or
CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTER
a) as starting keyword:
TIMECODE ENTER
TIMECODE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD.
b) as target for the following operational keywords:
EDIT
Open edit menu for timecode show
LABEL
Change name of timecode show
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
c) as target for the following executing commands:
GO
Start playback
PAUSE
Pause playback, keep output
OFF
Switch off, release output
>>
Jump forward to next breakpoint in show
<<
Jump backwards to last breakpoint in show
TOGGLE
a) As starting keyword
keyword, every executor that follows after TOGGLE performs a GO
if it wasn´t running or an OFF if it was running.
TOGGLE (executor list) [ENTER]
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
ASSIGN TOGGLE (executor list) ENTER
TOP
a) As starting keyword, every executor that follows after TOP is performing a GOTO
FIRST STEP.
TOP (executor list) [ENTER]
b) Put this function on an executor button (see ASSIGN).
ASSIGN TOP (executor list) ENTER
TOUCH_BTN
A TOUCH_BTN (touch button) is a remote function triggert by incoming 0-10V
signals. The TOUCH_BTN simulates an executor keypress, therefore it is working only
in combination with an assigned executor. TOUCH_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS /
REMOTE TOUCH menu.
Calling a TOUCH_BTN manually:
TOUCH_BTN X ENTER
Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor:
STORE TOUCH_BTN X EXEC/FADEREBUTTON1/2/3 Y.Z ENTER
Using EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the executor button. X
must be in the range from 1 to 16.
c) It loads the UPDATE dialog , where you can update changed PRESETS and CUES.
VALUE
VALUEClassification : immediate keyword
VALUE has no other meaning than switching back to value mode if desk is in a time mode
such as FADE or DELAY.
VIEW
a) as starting keyword, given views will be called.
VIEW (range list) ENTER
View numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1 … 999].
b) as target for the following commands:
ASSIGN
A view can be assigned to a VIEWBTN
INSERT/MOVE
Change visible number of view
STORE
Store a view.
Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screen of
your desk.
VIEWBTN
a) as starting keyword, given view buttons will be called.
VIEWBTN (range list) ENTER
Viewbutton numbers in the range list must be in the interval [ 1..6] The screen has 6 view
buttons.
b) as target for the following commands:
ASSIGN
Assign a view or a macro to a view button. Syntax is:
ASSIGN VIEW X VIEWBTN Y ENTER
ASSIGN MACRO X VIEWBTN Y ENTER
STORE
STORE a view and assign it to the view button.
UNPRESS
UNPRESS is used only in combination with functions of executor´s buttons that cause
an action upon unpress. These functions are FLASH_UP,FLASH_DOWN,SWOP,and
TEMP.
Please look at these commands for details about UNPRESS.
UPDATE
UPDATE does the following things, sorted by priority:
a) If the UPDATE dialog is open, it closes the UPDATE dialog.
b) If the EDIT / UPDATE procedure is active, the edited object is updated, and EDIT / UPDATE procedure is finished.
Micro
147
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
11 Saving and loading a SHOW
A unnamed show will always saves as NEW SHOW; rename it immediatelley, for the next show will saved with
this nameand will overwrite the previous show. Write protection is noct possible.
Please make sure to frequently save the current show on harddisk during the programming procedure. A good idea
is to change the name of your show on a regular basis so that you can go back to previous days programing. A backup on floppy disk is always a good idea.
Automatic save:
With the AUTOSAVE key, you can set an automatic save according to the time displayed on the key. Avoid using
this during a live Show or in very loud environments. When using the AUTOSAVE function a BACKUP of the Show
will be made with each saving operation (max. 10). These backups can be used to restore previously saved
Shows. You can display these backups using the SHOW BACKUP key..
press BACKUP
press AUTOSAVE, until the desired time is set. With OFF, you switch off Autosave.
select your Archive Medium: hard disk (on the console), file server (external memory) to be set using
FileServer in Archive Media.
When Autosave is active, the time to the next saving point will be indicated on the bottom margin.
Quick save:
press twice BACKUP - the fastest way to save the show
select Enumerate
- set Enumerate to OFF; you can save the Show immediately.
- set Ennumerate to ON; you can save the Show immediately, plus a consecutive number will be added to the
current name.
select your Archive Medium: hard disk (on the console), file server (external memory) to be set using File
Server in Archive Media.
11.1 Saving the Current Show on the harddisk
press BACKUP
press HARD DISK
save Show
- SAVE Show As: Enter a name for the show and confirm with ENTER. The show will be saved under the new
name.
- SAVE Show: the Show is saved immediately with the current name.
- SAVE Show Enumerate; the Show is saved immediately and a consecutive number will be
added to the current name.
148
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
.
11 . 2 Loading a Show from the harddisk
press BACKUP
press HARD DISK
press LOAD Show.
Press on the desired SHOW in the list. This will load the Show. .
The PLEASE CONFIRM window with the following options will open:
- YES: To save the current Show before loading the new one.
- NO: To load the new Show without saving the current one.
- CANCEL: To abort this process.
The show will be loaded.
11.3 Loading a empty Show
press BACKUP
press HARD DISK
press Load Show .
type the new name and confirm with Enter . The PLEASE CONFIRM window with the options will open:
- YES: To save the current Show before loading the new one.
- NO: To load the new Show without saving the current one.
A complete new and empty show will opwn.
Additionally, you can save an „empty“ Show to hard disk or floppy so that you can use it later when needed. This
way, you can also transfer demo shows, standard settings, etc. to others..
11.4 Deleting the current show
The currently loaded Show cannot be deleted! In order to delete the currently loaded Show, you have to load
another Show first.
11 . 5 Deleting a Show from the harddisk
press BACKUP
press HARD DISK
press DELETE Show
Show. In the list, click on the Show that is to be deleted; the Show will be deleted
immediately.
- If you press the Stay button, before deleting a Show, the Delete menu will not close automatically.
11.6 Saving the Current Show on floppy disk
Micro
All data necessary for the SHOW can be saved on to floppy disk (even all Fixtures to be used in the show and all
users with all settings for this show). Thus, you can transfer the whole show to another grandMA console or for
archive storage. The current Show will be saved including its name.
press BACKUP
press Floppy DISK
Format the floppy disk:
149
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
press FORMAT! to make sure that the show will be saved safely.
Saving a show:
- press Save Show, confirm with OK or cancel the operation with Cancel.
- press Save Show, enter a new name for the show, and confirm with ENTER.
insert an empty IBM/PC formatted 3.5´´-floppy disk, remove the write protection (small opening on the floppy
closed).
must be closed
confirm with OK.
The SHOW will be saved, after the window has been closed. The whole operation can take some minutes. You can
only save 1 show to a floppy.
if needed, use YES to save the same show on a second floppy , or finish the operation with NO.
in the end, remove floppy from the drive.
11.7 Loading a Show from Floppy disk
press BACKUP
press Floppy DISK
press LOAD Show.
insert the floppy containing the Show.
press OK (operation can take some minutes). The Show is being loaded.
in the end, remove floppy from the drive, as otherwise the console will not boot on the next restart.
Warning! You can only load shows that were created with versions 3.2 or later. If you have to convert shows created
with an earlier version, please contact the hotline (see below).
11.8 Loading a Demo Show
press BACKUP
press Demo Show.
press LOAD Show.
select the desired show using the Encoder, and load it by pressing on the Encoder.
150
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
11.1
0 PPARTIAL
ARTIAL SHOW READ (loading parts of a Show)
1.10
As of version 5.0, you can import parts of another show in to an existing show. Besides the Setup, you can also take
over show elements like Groups, Presets, Sequences or individual Cues, Worlds, Forms, Effects, Layouts, Bitmap
Effects, Macros and Matrices. Take care that all connected elements are being taken over, i.e. when a sequence refers
e.g. to Presets, you have to import the Sequence plus the Presets.
The PARTIAL SHOW READ function is carried out in 2 phases:
SETUP transfer – here you have to decide, which fixtures of the imported show you want to transfer. If these fixtures
do not correspond to the current fixtures, you can add them. If overlapping occurs, only the current or the imported
fixture can be transferred. If both fixtures are to be used in the current show, the only way is to change the ID and
Patch numbers of these fixtures in the respective show – it is not possible to do that in the PARTIAL SHOW READ
function.
Data transfer – here, you can select elements of the imported show. Elements having the same name, will be
overwritten or merged, depending on the command used.
TIP: Save the current show to a floppy in advance or make a backup.
Take care that the maximum number of channels that the console can handle will not be exceeded.
press BACKUP
choose the Medium - internal disk (Hard Disk), external memory (FILE SERVER) or removable disk (FLOPPY
DISK).
press INITIALIZE - the SELECT SHOW for PARTIAL SHOW READ will open
select the show, you want to load elements from, and confirm by pressing on the Encoder
- Mind the limitations (number of parameters)
In the DEVICE MATCHING TABLE, the current Setup (green background) and the Setup of the imported Show (grey
background) will now be displayed. Fixtures appearing in the same line, have the same ID number – here, the user has
to decide whether to keep the current fixture or to take the imported fixture. It is possible that the settings of fixtures
of the same type will change (position in the Stage view, defaults); Effects, Cues, etc. will, however, not be changed.
And it can happen that for fixtures of different types, programs change, if e.g. some imported fixture’s features, a Cue
refers to, are missing.
select VIEW; you can select fixtures in all views.
- with ALL, all fixtures of the current Show (on the left) and of the imported Show (on the right) are displayed.
Micro
151
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
- with MATCH, all overlapping channels are displayed; you must choose, which fixtures to overwrite in the current
Setup. Overwriting objects, even partially, in the current Setup, can affect the whole show – after starting the
operation with 2x OK, the modification cannot be undone any more. If you do select none, the fixtures of the
current Show are kept (the fixtures in the left half of the menu keep their green background).
- with NO MATCH, you find all fixtures that do not overlap, i.e. that can be taken over without having been
selected.
The lmaps on the left side (current setup) also can be selected, they will be deleted from current setup.
- NEW here lamps are displayed, you are importing from loaded show into the current show (color has changed
from grey to green)
- IGNORED here lamps are displayed, you will not import into the current setup (lamps in the right part, color
stays grey) or lamps, which are deleted from the current show (lamps in the left part, color has changed from
green to grey)
select the fixtures and press on the Encoder next to the screen – the colors of the selected fixtures will
change.
or
Select in the WIZARD:
- NO NEW DEVICES – DEFAULT; will always be executed, if no other change was entered. Here, you cannot
change the setup of the current show.
- ADD UNMATCHED DEVICES – Harmless; here, only those parts of the imported show will be transferred that
do not overlap with the current setup – i.e. the current setup will not be changed, but only extended. No risk of
ruining the current show.
- USE OLD DEVICES – Dangerous; here, the complete setup of the imported show will overwrite the setup of
the current show. Only those parts that do not overlap will be kept.
confirm with OK, NEXT.
confirm PLEASE CONFIRM with OK.
confirm WARNING
After opening the files, the BACKUP menu will open again
152
press MERGE CONTENTS
select the desired show elements – will receive a dark green background.
- move the blinking frame using the Encoder. Using the Encoder, open or close the sub-folders (marked with a +
or – sign), or select individual elements.
- the text note „has changed. It is older“ in red: This element is older than that having the same name in the
current show. (the creation date of this element is added in brackets)
- the text note „has changed. It is newer“ in green: This element is newer than that having the same name in
the current show. (the creation date of this element is added in brackets)
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
select a User Profile
- User Data is merged into my profile: The profile elements of the selected profile will be loaded into the profile
of the current user.
- User Data is merged into the original profile: The profile elements of the selected profile will be loaded into
the profile of the user having the same name, or (if the user does not exist in the current show) the user will be
created.
If MY PROFILE (yellow button) is chosen, after multiple profiles were selected, the current user’s profile will
successively be overwritten by the selected profiles – not a good deal.
Load parts of a Show
- COPY;–the selected elements will be inserted into the current show, or, if there are elements having the same
name, the current elements will be overwritten by the copied elements.
- MERGE;–the selected elements will be inserted into the current show, if there are elements having the same
name, the current elements will be merged with the copied elements.
Here a concise overview:
- Remove unchanged Items: Will delete all elements in the overview that were not changed, i.e. these
elements will not exist in the current show.
- Remove already imported Items: Will delete all elements in the overview that were already imported using
the COPY or MERGE command.
leave the menu by pressing on the „X“
12 Update Software
You can only download the update from our HOMEPAGE (www.malighting.de) using an IBM compatible PC.
After the download execute the file. It is a self extracting archive. You will be asked to insert some empty floppy
disks into drive A: , press OK and your update disks will be created.
Do not update the grandMA right before running a show! Updating the software is a serious thing. MA
Lighting can not always guarantee that your old show will play back correctly after an update !
Update by floppy disk:
press SETUP
UPDATE SOFTWARE If is should not be possible, to enter this menu (e.g. because a previous update had not
been completed properly), you can open it using the F4 key on the keyboard.
press Update Software from Floppy
when asked to, insert the floppy and confirm with OK.
Micro
153
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Before changing disks, make sure that the green LED on the floppy drive is off.
The update can last up to 10 minutes. After updating , it is possible to do a reset.
By pressing the soft key “VERSION INFO“ you can read about new functionality and fixed bugs of the latest
update. To renew the Fixtures Library, insert the optional available FIXTURE UPDATE floppy and press the “Update
Fixture Library from Floppy“ button. This may last a few minutes. After processing the note „Fixture Library Update done“ appears. Additionally here is a possiblity to import older fixtures made with version 3.2/.3.3..
Update via network: (for that, the new software has to be loaded onto the console)
grandMA, grandMA-Light, grandMA Ultra-Light , grandMA MICRO, NSP, OFFLINE Editor and grandMA Replay-Unit,
connected via a network, can be updated among themselves.
Proceed very carefully! This operation may be carried out by qualified grandMA users only. Futhermore, this
operation requires an impeccable network not overloaded at this moment. IN NO CASE MAY THE CONSOLES
HAVE THE SAME IP NUMBERS – THIS WOULD DESTROY THE OPERATING SYSTEM!
Updating the software is only possible, if the first three number groups of the grandMAs’ IP addresses are
identical, e.g. 192.168.177.X).
press SETUP
press UPDATE SOFTWARE
select a console from the table. If a console is not being displayed, it has a software version that cannot be
updated via network; you have to do that individually using a floppy.
press UPDATE CONSOLE (or cancel the operation with CANCEL)
WARNING! As of version 5.0, the selected console will receive the software version of the very console, the
update was started from; i.e. it is not possible, to „get“ a software update.
confirm the successful operation on PLEASE CONFIRM.
After the successful update, the console should disappear from the overview. Repeat this operation for all
consoles.
- using SHOW SAME VERSION, you can call up all consoles of the session already having the same software
version.
ATTENTION PLEASE! Deactivate
Anti-Virus or Firewalls. Those
can affect proper operation.
Updating without floppy disks:
Using the OFFLINE – EDITOR, you can very quickly update consoles in a network connected with one another
and having internet access.
on the internet site www.malighting.de, go to SUPPORT / SERVICE and download the grandMA OffLine
Editor program to your PC.
start the grandMA OffLine Editor on your PC
in the grandMA OffLine Editor, press the SETUP button
with UPDATE CONSOLE, update the consoles and NSPs (see above)
154
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
13 Utility Menu
(with external keyboard)
You will need this menu, if the main program or the actual show is damaged due
to a crash or some other error.
In the Utility Menu, you can load or delete an old grandMA operating system.
You can also delete shows here. You can delete the current show (this show is
automatically loaded upon power-up of the console). You can renew the Firmware for the second built-in Computer (Motorola) and you can also renew the
grandMA operating system via floppy disk.
During the Boot-up process you will see all loaded program segments (blue
background) on the display. In order to access the Utility Menu you have to push
any key as soon as the message : ??? TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY
KEY ??? is displayed with red background during the boot-up process. The
menu will open after approx. 10-20 seconds.
Press 1: Restore grandMA operating system
If you press the „1“ key on the keyboard, you will see a list with all systems existing
on the harddisk. By pressing one of the displayed keys (a, b, c...) the respective
system will be installed. You have to confirm installation by pressing “o“. VERY
IMPORTANT - this is the letter “o“, not the number “0“ .As soon as the installation
is completed, the display will show UPDATE DONE next to STATUS. You can start the
console by pressing the “ESC“ key twice.
Press 2: Delete grandMA operating system
Upon every update, a safety copy of the system will be automatically created on
harddisk. In order to delete an older system from harddisk, press „2“ on the keyboard.
You will see a list with all systems existing on the harddisk. By pressing one of the
displayed keys (a, b, c...) the respective system will be deleted. You have to confirm
the delete process by pressing “o“. VERY IMPORTANT - this is the letter “o“ not
the number “0“. After deletion is completed, the display will show DELETE DONE
next to STATUS. You can start the console by pressing the “ESC“ key two times.
Press 3:Delete (old) grandMA shows,
Upon every update, a new folder for the shows will automatically be created
to cleanup the harddrive on the harddisk. During every update, the console will save
all old shows, converted to suite the new system software, in the youngest folder.
From the time of the update, all new created shows will be automatically saved in
this folder, too.
In order to delete shows from an older system version from the harddisk, press „3“
on the keyboard. You will see a list with all shows in all system versions existing on
this harddisk. By pressing one of the displayed keys (a, b, c...) the respective shows
will be deleted. You have to confirm the delete process by pressing “o“. VERY
Micro
IMPORTANT - this is the letter “o“ not the number “0“. After deletion is completed,
the display will show DELETE DONE next to STATUS. You can start the console by pressing
the “ESC“ key twice.
Press 4: Delete current show
If you press „4“ on the keyboard, the current show (this show will be automatically loaded
upon power-up of the console) will be deleted. You have to confirm the delete process by
pressing “o“. VERY IMPORTANT - this is the letter “o“ not the number “0“. After the
deletion is completed, the display will show DELETE DONE next to STATUS. You can start
the console by pressing the “ESC“ key twice.
Press 5: Update firmware with display
If you press „5“ on the keyboard, you can renew the Firmware for the second built-in
Computer (Motorola). In order to update the software: insert the current update disk
labeled „LAST DISK“. You have to confirm the update process by pressing “o“. VERY
IMPORTANT - this is the letter “o“ not the number “0“. As soon as the update is
completed, the display will show UPDATE DONE next to STATUS. You can start the console
by pressing the “ESC“ key twice.
Press 6: Update grandMA
In order to update the software: insert the current update disk labeled „LAST DISK“. You
have to confirm the update process by pressing “o“. Shortly after, you will be asked for
“DISK 1“. Now insert this disk and confirm by pressing “o“.VERY IMPORTANT - this is the
letter “o“ not the number “0“. The disk will be read (might take a little while). Following
that, you will be asked for „DISK 2“. Insert disk 2 and confirm again with “o“. VERY
IMPORTANT - this is the letter “o“ not the number “0“ (this will take a little longer
now). As soon as the update process is completed, the display shows UPDATE DONE,
PLEASE REBOOT next to STATUS. Now please reboot the console by using the combination
CTRL-ALT-DEL or the RESET key on the rear of the console.
IMPORTANT: Vermeiden Sie unbedingt das Downdaten des Pultes auf die Version
4.36X und anschließendes oder späteres Updaten auf Version 5.xxx. Dieser Vorgang zerstört das Betriebssystem. Falls dieser Vorgang doch durchgeführt wurde,
wenden Sie sich bitte an die Hotline oder rekonstruieren Sie das Betriebssystem mit
der beigelegten Diskette.
155
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
14.2 General Instructions
14.2.1 Differences between Replay Unit and the
grandMA or grandMA light
The Software is identical for all of the units. However tow 1 external monitor
can be connected. The UPS Functions as well as the 2048/4096 channels are
also fully supported as on the grandMA or grandMA light.
Connectors for external keyboard, mouse and monitor are located on the rear of
the unit (these are not included as standard).
Encoder, Trackerball, Wheel, more than 5 Executor Faders and 5 Executor Buttons as well as quite a few other keys on the grandMA and grandMA light are
not available with this unit. Nevertheless most of the functions (except for the
executors) can be reached and activated using the mouse and tow external
monitor.
14.2.2 Working with Mouse, Keyboard and Monitor
With these tools almost all functions of the grandMA can be operated on this
unit. The 3 keys of the mouse will take on the functions of the keys on the
console. All required keys (such as CUE, COPY, NEXT, a.s.o.) have to be set up as
“Quikeys” in advance ( 9.2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS), so that they
can be operated via the mouse. Values within the fixture or channel sheets can
be modified with the middle mouse key. A Command Field will appear on the
monitor when clicking on those fields above the (non-existing) encoders. You
can operate this Command Field with the mouse also.
14.2.3 Working in Stand Alone Mode (Playback)
This means working with the Replay Unit without the use of external mouse,
keyboard and monitor. In this mode you can only activate Playback via the
existing elements on the front of the unit. Please note, that you will only have
5 Executor Faders and 5 Executor Buttons available. These Executors
correspond with the first 5 Executors on the grandMA and grandMA light. There
is no access to any of the other Executors. This becomes particularly important
when programming the show on the grandMA but “running” the show
afterwards on the Replay Unit.
14.3 Specification and Technical Data
14.3.1 Integrated Harddisk and Diskdrive
The harddisk does not only save a backup for the operating system, but leaves
enough space for countless shows with hundreds of sequences. Shows can
also be saved on disk for archive purposes or transfering to other grandMA
consoles. The floppy disk drive also allows you to update the software, which
can be downloaded from the MA Homepage (www.malighting.de) on the
internet.
14.3.2 Ethernet and other Options
In addition to the 4 DMX output ports the hardware of the grandMA replay unit is designed to
transmit larger numbers of channels via Ethernet. ESTA is currently working on a standard
protocol for this form of transmission, which will guarantee a compatibility between units of different manufacturers, similar to the DMX norm. In addition to DMX input, Sound, SMPTE
timecode, it offers a printer port and a RS232 interface for faster communication with any kinds
of peripheral units.
14.3.3 System Maintenance and Software Updates
The software of the grandMA family is in a process of constant expansion and improvement. Due
to the control via menus and display softkeys it is possible to realise the feedback of our
customers and technical advances in our software updates. The hardware is only the basis and
offers sufficient capacity to guarantee that its owner will always participate in the fascinating
technical developments.
14.3.4 Peripherals
Peripheral units, such as a wireless remote control, are still in the development process. A 3D
visualisation software is available.
14.3.5 Capacity:
– grandMA replay unit controls 2048 parameter, 4096 parameteras option via ethernet
(dimmers and attributes of 8 or 16 bit) with softpatch to 4096 DMX addresses.Up to 16384
parameter with NSPs.
– A freely configurable monitor offers flexible operation and precise adaptation to any individual
working mode.
– Playback works on the basis of dipless crossfade either in Tracking or Non-Tracking mode.
– The internal harddisk allows for virtually unlimited storage capacity of presets, memories, cues
and effects.
14.3.6 Front PPanel
anel Layout
– 5 Faders as Executor-, Effect or Group-Faders, each with 3 directly assigned buttons.
– 5 Executor Buttons for direct retrieval of Sequences, Chases and other functions.
14.3.7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration
– Basic configuration available on harddisk.
– Fixture library with more than 280 multifunctional fixtures.
– All fixtures and channels can be named individually.
– Free Softpatch with MIN, MAX and INVERT of all four DMX lines.
– Definition of new fixture types on screen.
156
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
14.3.8 Display of output and data entry
– Steps can include loops with counter or timer.
– Numeric dimmer channel listing.
– Channel fader symbols.
14.3.14 Executor Faders and Buttons
– Fixture parameter spreadsheets for status report on moving lights and dimmers.
– Executor faders and buttons with multiple assignment options.
– Different additional options available.
– Working mode of faders and buttons can be freely assigned.
- Optionally assignment of several executors for one single cue list.
– A block of special function buttons can be applied to any executor.
14.3.9 Selection and Data Input
– Selection via Group Keys with Mouse.
- Hold and Move Mode with middle mouse key.
14.3.14 Fader working modes
– Align option for proportional change of any group of values.
– Brightness Master in HTP or LTP Mode.
– Preset softkeys for the moving light features.
– Manual X-Fade.
– Keys can be freely moved within the window.
– Speed, Fade Time, Rate for chaser and sequences.
– Presets grouped together for the 10 different function types.
– Keys of different preset groups with different colours.
– Free assignment of channels to be controlled in which preset.
14.3.15 Button working modes
- Direct access even during Playback.
– ON/OFF, GO+, GO-, Pause, Flash up and Flash down.
14.3.1
0 Automatic effect generator
14.3.10
– A number of complex effects applicable to any channel.
– Library of all different movements.
14.3.1
1 Store Options
14.3.11
– Single cues, chase effects, sequences or effects.
– Selective programming for LTP and tracking mode.
– Basic fade times for fading channels and basic delay for switching parameters.
– Optional individual fade and delay for every single channel.
– Overwrite, Merge, Insert and Add-on option.
- Cue Lists in Tracking or Non-Tracking Mode.
– Optionally insert in Cue Only Mode.
14.3.12 Playback Options
– Fast GO and GO- (<<< and >>>) without fades.
14.3.16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols
– Infading or outfading values of main sequence is marked in different colours in the channel list.
– Lists of sequences including names of steps and times
- Parameter modifications directly in the spreadsheet.
14.3.17 Overwriting a program sequence
– Constant access to all effects and channels.
– CLEAR and RELEASE functions.
– UPDATE function for fast correction of programs.
– EDIT function for direct modification of playback parameters.
14.3.18 Adjustment of Hardware
– Software Equalizer for Audio Input.
– Free assignment between Program Pool and Playback faders or Playback buttons. – Preselection of certain settings (Defaults).
– Playback via fader or GO-button with stored timings.
– Free grouping of functions for selective programming.
– Chaser effects with Auto Run, Audio or manual X-Fade.
- Preselection of save mode, times and the standard operation of playback functions.
– Auto Loop / Single / Reverse / Bounce / Random.
– Sequence with individual timings per step.
14.3.19 Connectivity
– Go button mode / Auto Timed / Sound.
– 4 DMX 512/1990 Output Lines via 5-pin XLR Sockets.
– DMX Input with 5-pin XLR Socket and DMX Thru.
Micro
157
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
– Audio Input Line for Mono Audio Signals >20 mV with 6,3mm socket.
– SMPTE Timecode Entry for LTC Timecode >200 mV with 6,3mm socket.
– MIDI Interface with IN/OUT/THRU.
– External control input for direct voltage signals via 25-pin SUB D socket.
– 2 SVGA Output Lines for one colour monitor and a service monitor via 15-pin
sockets.
– Parallel printer port Centronic via 25-pin SUB-D socket.
– Ethernet Interface for networking (Backup), DMX-transmission and Remote
Control with RJ45-socket (10/100 Base-T) according IEEE 802.4.
– 2 serial interfaces RS-232C for future extensions (9-pin SUB-D sockets).
– Connections for external Keyboard (Mini-D, PS2-Type) and Mouse (Mini-D,
PS2-Type).
– Power Supply via IEC/CEE 22 Inlet Mains Supply Plug (90 – 230V
autoselecting)
.
14.3.20 Operating system
– Operating system for industrial applications named VXWORKS (no DOS, no
WINDOWS).
– Fast cold boot time (approx.1minute).
– Software update via download from Internet.
– Off-Line Editor available.
14.3.2
1 Hardware
14.3.21
– Pentium Processor with min. 450 MHz Processor Speed and 256MByte RAM.
– 12 MByte non-volatile Flash Disk for Operating System, System Software and
Installation Data.
– Built-in Hard Disk for Show Data, Library, etc..
– Integrated 3.5" Floppy Drive for easy software updating and external storage
of Show Data.
– Reset Keys on front and rear housing.
– Built-in UPS (Un-interruptable Power Supply) to withstand main power failures
up to 10 minutes.
– Professional protection against electromagnetic interference in compliance
with all relevant European EMC regulations
.
14.3.22 Weight and Dimensions
- Robust Steel Housing (485 x 430 x 140 mm).
- Weight: 24,25 lb. (11 kg
158
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
15 Potentialities of Network connections
In the grandMA family, there are multiple networking possibilities. In the following description, we will use the
abbreviation grandMA or “unit“ for any grandMA, grandMA light, grandMA ultra-light, grandMA RPU, grandMAOffline, and grandMA 3D, as they are all equipped with the same software options and only differ in their hardware
(Offline and 3D, however, cannot create any DMX). The PDA remote control is not a unit in the above sense, and will
not be explained. The MICRO can only network with a 3D.
If in the network there is a device having a transmission rate of more than 10Mbit, the whole network will be reduced
to that transmission rate.
grandMA plus grandMA 3D (PC): For visualization purposes on a PC
2 grandMAs connected:
Backup system or Single user
grandMAs connected:
Multi User system
grandMAs connected:
Playback system, e.g.: as channel expansion
grandMA 3D (PC) with one or two NSPs as a complete console with DMX output
grandMA Micro with grandMA 3D (PC)
15.1 Preparing the network settings:
pres TOOLS
Pressing the MA Network Configuration button in the TOOLS menu will open this menu.
.
Save Show before changing the IP adress
The change it, just click on the IP address; this will open a window containing the current IP address that can be
changed directly. This IP address cannot be used on different consoles within the network. Simply alter the individual
IP address of each unit to unique numbers within your network. Make sure that the first three number blocks (in this
case: 192, 168, and 0) are identical for all units. By pressing the Save and Reboot button, the new address will be
saved and the console be restarted..
This is where the name of the console is displayed. This name will be displayed on each unit in the network and will
facilitate the assignment of individual units in larger networks. To change, just click on the name, overwrite it in the
window that will open, and confirm.
define the station name
define the station priority
set Invite Me
define the session name
to set the Session Password (option): If another user wants to log into this session
session, he has to do so using this
password.
to set the Session Style:
Micro
159
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
- Playback: Preset for a Playback connection (only Playback data will be transferred, the databases of the devices
are different
different).
If the 3D - Visualizer is to be connected to this console, you have to activate FULL TRACKING or
MULTIUSER.
- Full Tracking: Preset for Backup System or Single User. will automatically switch to schaltet sich automatisch
um auf Multi User, if a session with multiple consoles is opened
- Multi User: Preset for Multi User systems.
My State - display: MASTER
15.2
SLAVE
Preparing a Session (also neeeded to run NSPs)
The left table will show all sessions stating its names and the “Unconnected“ group (all not connected
consoles). If a session is displayed with a red background, you can only log into this session using a password
(join) above item 3: Forced Login. When clicking on a session (blue background), the units of this selected
session will be displayed in the right table.
The right table will only show the units of the selected session (also grandMA-Offline and grandMA 3D).
If a unit is displayed with a red background, it is not enabled for network connections.
above, item: Allow
Invitations.
The Master priority will only interest you, when you want to create sessions with more than 3 units. By clicking
into the cell (here Normal), you can switch between Low, Normal or High. The unit with the highest priority will
always have the Master function in a session, no matter, regardless of which device the session was started
This is where the current status will be displayed: Master, Slave or Idle.
160
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
15.3 Creating a Session
- Before you start a Session, make sure that the appriate settings from chapter 14.2 have
been made.
. made when starting a Session.
- Connections always have to be
- Only now canthe different units (3D, Offline, grandMAs,...) be integrated in this
Session
After all settings are made, press the Start New Session button and confirm with OK
OK. The name of the unit will
automatically be accepted as Session name.
or:
If you want to assign a name to the Session, click into the empty cell on the side of “Session Name“, enter a name
and confirm. Then press the Start New Session button and confirm with OK
OK.
In the left table, the created Session will be displayed with its name and on a light green background. This unit will
now be the only Master in this Session. Now, you must integrate another unit into this Session.
15.3.1 Expanding the Session
Before units can cooperate with each other, you have to integrate the second one (or further units, theoretically up
to 10 units) into this Session.
- The Show of the second unit (and of all others) must be saved before, as these
- even on the 3D - will always be overwritten by the first unit (that had created the
Session).
- All users that are not present on the first unit (that had created the Session) will be
deleted. If needed, you would have to set them up again.
- Master priorities have to be defined (see on the right side)
Attaching Units from the Master
In the left table, click on „Unconnected“. The table on the right will show all units that are the „free“.
In the right table, click on the unit (3D, Offline, grandMA, ..) (will get a blue background).
Press the Invite Stations button and confirm with OK
OK. The data of the „invited“ unit will be overwritten!
Attaching from another Unit
In the left table, click on the Session, which is to be joined.
Press the Join Session button and confirm with OK
OK. The own Show data will be overwritten now!
Master Priorities
Micro
All units of the same priority: The unit that had created the Session, remains the Master. If the Masters
fails, the Slave (2nd unit) will automatically become the Master. When there are more than 2 consoles,
coincidence will decide, so you should assign priorities.
If there are more the 2 unit: e.g.: 1st unit grandMA (priority “Normal“), 2nd unit grandMA light (priority
“Normal“), 3rd unit grandMA RPU (priority “Low“). When the Master fails, the 2nd unit (grandMA light) will
automatically become the Master, die RPU will remain Slave.
In the left table, click on “Session“.
The right table will now show all units of the Session. Under „Status“, the current priority will be displayed. In this
case, for the Light only „Slave“ will be displayed, the same priority as for the Master
Master. For the RPU
RPU, “Slave will
161
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
be displayed, i.e, the set priority of the RPU is „low“, i.e. lower as that of the Master
Master.
As soon as the connection is established, the normal operation of the units can start.
Differences between Full Tracking, Multi User and Playback
next page.
The Session will be kept, if not:
- interrupted manually by pulling the EtherNet cable (or deactivating the EtherNet converter)
- terminated automatically due to of a detected communication problem
- terminated due to a hardware problem either on the Master or on the Slave
14.3.2 Resolving or leaving a Session
When resolving a Session, the Session will be kept for all units. Even if a unit leaves the Session, the Show will be
kept for the unit.
Master unit
You can resolve the complete Session by pressing the Leave Session button on the Master.
You can also exclude a unit from a Session; to do so, click on this unit in the right table (blue background). By
pressing the Disconnect Station button, it will be excluded.
Slave unit
When pressing the Leave Session button, this unit will leave the Session.
You can also exclude a unit from a Session; to do so, click on this unit in the right table (blue background). By
pressing the Disconnect Station button, it will be excluded.
15.4 Full Tracking
When a Session is in Full Tracking, all data relevant for the Show plus the operations will be executed
simultaneously on all units, except when currently working with Worlds
next page
15.5 Multi User
No Pages on other units will be switched over, no Selections of Fixtures transferred, and no View switchings
transferred. Using Worls will have a major effect in this case
next pages.
15.6 Playback
When creating a Playback connection, the Shows will be kept on all consoles (!!). The Remote Controlling of
Executors has to be, if you want that, switched on or off by using the Exe Sync button in the World pool.
See Worlds next page.
TIPP
As ‘backup’, we recommend getting advice from the MA hotline (see below) or your local distributor when
building complex networks
Abort or Reconnection of a session (Autoconnect)
162
If a session was disconnected (for example OFF without leaving the session), slave desk tries to reconnect to the
session after switching on.
Abort Autoconnection:
press Abort: Connection will not re-established; desk works as stand-alone with the current show
Allow Autoconnection:
press X or after approx.. 4 Seconds automatically: Connection with session (see picture: session GMedi of
desk with IP 192.168.177.113) will be re-established (only when session master is available)
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
Scan 1
Scan 2
Scan 3
Pan/Tilt
Pan/Tilt
Pan/Tilt
World 1
Dimm
Dimm
Dimm
Gobo
Gobo
Gobo
15.7 Worlds
World 2
In the World pool, you can create, call up or manage so-called “Worlds“.
Worlds can be created individually. Worlds can be used e.g. to split up complete Scanners (all Attributes) or individual Attributes of Scanners or just Dimmer channels or all Scanners and Dimmers for programming purposes and, what is even more important, to run Executors.
World 3
Creating Worlds
TIPP
e.g.: In a World, the Scanners 1-10 are saved with the Dimmer and Color function. If you call up this World,
only these Scanners will be displayed in the Fixture Sheet. Furthermore, only the Dimmer and Color functions
can be modified. In the Channel or Fader Sheet, the Dimmer channels will no longer be displayed.
Selecte Scanner or Dimmer channels.
If you just want to store some Scanner attributes, you can activate these by double-clicking on them (these
Attributes will be displayed in red for the selected Scanners).
Press the STORE key shortly.
By clicking a button in the World pool, the World will be stored and operational. You can also give it a name
directly by using the keyboard.
If not all Attributes are stored in a World, this will be indicated by a small red triangle in the left upper corner of
the appropriate button.
Working with Worlds
For the programming (creating the Show), Worlds are a great deal of help when it comes to creating Cues. If
you select a World, only the assigned Scanner and Dimmer channels will be displayed, ready to be modified and
stored.
NOTE: Starting a console will always reload the last setting; if a World was active when the console was shut down
last time, only this World will be displayed on the next start. In the stage window, only fixtures of this World can be
seen – in the stage window, however, under SETUP, all registered fixtures can be found.
If you are in a network session that means that different users (units) can use different or overlapping Worlds.
Call up a World by clicking on it (will be displayed in dark green).
CONTROL shows, if you have full control over the selected World (green) or just a partial Playback control (yellow)
Full World. By pressing the Full button, all existing Scanner and Dimmer channels will be displayed again
(complete World). The button will be displayed in green.
If you see a warning symbol on a button, it means that this World is presently being used by another User (user).
With the Exec Sync function, multiple users (units) can start calling Executors simultaneously
(synchronously). In order to do so, this function must be switched on on both appropriate units by pressing this
button (will be displayed in green).
This special function only serves synchronizing two different Worlds (Playback). And this function has to be
switched on in a Playback session, if the Playback commands are to be transferred.
Micro
163
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
COLOR CODE
Colors in the FIXTURE, CHANNEL and FADER window
Entry or function
Status
Channel
number/
attribute
grey
Dimmer
channel value
Scanner
attribute values
Channel or attribute
not used or released
by 3x CLEAR
not selected,
but value of
any Executor
Dimmer not selected,
master starting value
sequence has not changed the
Dimmer not selected,
last fade on master
sequence has reduced the
value (DOWN)
Dimmer not selected,
last fade on master
sequence has increased the
value (UP)
Not selected,
was manual
Manual selection
not selected,
no value
grey
grey
not selected, but
starting value >0%
grey
yellow
yellow
not selected, but
grey
blue-green
yellow
value
not selected, but
starting value 0
grey
green
yellow
not selected, but
starting value 0
grey
magenta
yellow
not selected, but
changed manually
selected,
but not active
active
grey
white on dark
red background
grey
white on dark last change
red background
grey
yellow
New manual
yellow
white on red
activation or
background
Fader/Encoder movement
Selection by CLEAR
not selected, but
grey
white on darkdeleted
changed manually
red background
Activation by CLEAR
not selected, but
grey
white
deleted changed manually
Not selected, but
only starting value
grey
yellow
value of any
Executor (except master)
Not selected, but
not selected, grey turquoise on dark
white on dark
preset activated
value of preset
red background
red
background
Selected, after preset
selected,
yellow
turquoise on red
already active
value of preset
background
164
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
last fade on
white on red
background
white on dark
red background
white
yellow
white on red
background
COLOR CODE
Activation by CLEAR
deleted
white square (only fix)
violet bar (fix)
ID number green (only fix)
blue bar
blue background
violet background
not selected,
grey
white on turquoise white
value of preset
background
PAN position of a moving head fixture. 3 settings possible
these attributes are currently used by an effect
ID number(s) are selected and can be moved in the Fixture Sheet only the sorting order of the sheet will be changed, has no other eff ects
the channels are „parked“. On the DMX output, no changes
will be output (the last value will be kept); internally, however, they can
be changed and saved.
the fixture has been switched to No Master in the „Dimmer Option“ or
„Fixture Options“ menu; these fixtures will not react on the reagieren
nicht auf den GrandMaster, i.e. for GrandMaster on 0, they will react on
changes made using the wheel
or
the Group master, to which these fixtures belong, has not been opened.
MODULATOR settings have been changed.
Colors used for the screen display in the Executer Fader
Color or symbol
white triangle
shows the priority when overwriting in LTP mode
(title bar)
no triangle = medium priority
green
this sequence is the master sequence (SELECT + Executor No.) All store
(title bar)
commands will always affect this sequence, on the Micro, only the yellow
keys that are available in a sequence will have an effect on this sequence
orange (cues)
this sequence is fixed and, even after switching the pages, will be visible
for several sequences
(sequences or chasers that are on this position, but on a different page, will only
be covered, but otherwise not affected, even if they are currently running.
The master sequence can also be fixed (green + orange).
When scrolling through the pages, fixed sequences can cover other sequences on the same position - this will not affect
the operation as such. After resetting the fixed sequence, sequences that had „disappeared“ can be reloaded from the
pool.
Micro
165
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
COLOR CODE
Colors used for displaying the DMX output sheet
Color or symbol
Dimmer values yellow
Dimmer value light grey
Dimmer value cyan
Dimmer value magenta
Dimmer value green
Dimmer value blue
Dimmer value white with red
background
Dimmer value white with
background
Dimmer value white (bold)
Background blue-green
Background black
value of an Executor (changes while sequence is running)
default value of the fixtures
entered value or value that has been changed in this cue
tracked value
value has been reduced
manual activation or fader/Encoder movement
not selected, but changed manually selection deleted with dark red
CLEAR
not selected, but changed manually activation deleted with CLEAR
empty = DMX channel is not patched
dash = DMX channel is patched, no values will be output by the current
cue
Colors used for the screen display in the Group Sheet
Color or symbol
grey area
grey area with
blue frame
blue area
group with several fixtures
group with several
fixtures are selected
group consists of one fixture
Colors used for the screen display in the Group Master
Color or symbol
Text white (starting with a + sign)
Text pink (starting with a - sign)
Pink bar + blinking LED
Yellow bar
name of the group master
For this group master, the NEGATIV INHIBIT option has been selected
The motoriyed fader has been blocked when adjusting it and has not
reached the given value<
if the pink bar is on zero, only the dark red background can be
seen.
shows the position of the group master
if the yellow bar is on yero, only the black background can be seen
166
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
COLOR CODE
Colors used for the screen display in the Worlds Sheet
Color or symbol
red triangle in the upper left corner
of the World button
Warning sign
on the World button
This world does not contain all attributes
of the fixtures
This World is being used by another
user
Colors used for the screen display in PRESET POOL
Red triangle
The preset can olny be used for those fixtures, it was
created and saved for
Text very faint
The preset was deleted in SETUP and cannot be applied any more
Blue frame
Preset is selected
Green area
These presets can be applied to the selected fixtures - the higher
figure shows the number of fixtures, on which the preset is applied to (the
small figure is the button number)
Yellow area
These presets
can be applied to the selected fixtures - the higher figure shows the number of fixtures, on which the preset is
applied to
(the small figure is the button
number)
Colors used for the COMMAND LINE
Black
Red
Green
Blue
Command was executed
Command was not executed. An entry was missing or a command
not possible, because e.g. a triggered button was empty
Macro was executed
Time code was executed
was
Colors used for the VIEW BUTTONS
Yellow
Orange
Brown with green text
Micro
here, the screen dumps of several monitors are saved, i.e with this
button, you can also switch other monitors.
the saved screen dump only refers to this monitor
this View is currently shown on the monitor
167
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
COLOR CODE
Colors used for the screen display in the Tracking Sheet
Color or symbol
Dash
Dimmer value cyan
Dimmer value magenta
No value entered (the default value will be output)
Entered value or value that has been changed in this cue
Tracked value (is defined by the previous cyan-colored value
and is not saved, i.e. if you change the cyan-colored value in a cue
above, all magenta-colored values following will also change)
Note: The tracked values will only be executed within the sequence, if the Tracking option had been selected in
the Assign menu< otherwise, the values will not be executed, although they appear in the Sheet. If only some of
the fixtures are to be tracked, you have to block those values not to be tracked and have to set them to 0.
Dimmer value green
value has been reduced
Dimmer value red
Blocked value (the value that was defined by the previous cyancolored value, will be saved. Changes on the
previous cyan-colored value will no longer affect
the value - the first (upper) tracked value will turn from red to
cyan.
Background red with blinking frame this value is selected
Fixture name yellow (header bar)
this fixture is selected in the Fixture Sheet
Sequence name in title bar white
Figures in the cells are dimmer values. Display can be adjusted over
an option
Sequence name in title bar green
Figures are Fader times (press TIME 1x)
Sequence name in title bar orange
Figures are Fader times (press TIME 2x)
Colors used for the screen display in EFFECT POOL
Color or symbol
Pink button
Effect group with assigned scanners / dimmers
Red button
Effect group without assigned scanners / dimmers
Green button
Blue button (in the ALL RUNNING EFFEKTS menu) Temporary Effect group, will be deleted after switch-off,
if not saved before
Circulating white dot
the effect is running
168
MA Lighting Technology GmbH . Dachdeckerstr. 16 . D-97297 Waldbüttelbrunn . www.malighting.de eMail: [email protected]
1 . 6 General Safety Instructions
1. Read all the instructions in the user’s manual, especially the safety
requirements 1.5 Safety requirements
2. Follow all instructions. Keep the user’s manual for later use.
3. Follow all cautions and warnings indicated on the unit.
4. Disconnect the mains plug before cleaning the unit; don’t use any
liquid or spray cleanser. Clean with a dry cloth.
5. Do not use the unit near water. Do not expose it to a humid
environment. Do not spill any liquid over the unit.
6. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
7. Do not block or cover any ventilation slots in the housing - they
guarantee the reliable functioning of the unit and protect it against
overheating. Do not install the unit into a frame unless sufficient
ventilation is guaranteed. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not insert any objects through the slots of the unit, as these could
get in contact with live parts or could cause short circuits. This may
cause a fire and an electric shock.
9. Do not place the unit on unstable surfaces. It may fall and get damaged.
10. The unit is provided with a safety plug. This plug can only be used
with safety sockets. These precautions should by all means be followed.
If the plug should not fit into a given socket (e.g. the case with old
sockets), the socket should be replaced by an electrician.
14. If the power cord or the mains plug is damaged, let a qualified technician replace it immediately.
15. Only use power cords which are marked as safety-proof.
16. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus
has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Besides others, you run the risk of
suffering an electric shock.
17. All service work should be exclusively performed by qualified service technicians.
18. Do not use any high-power walkie-talkies or cellular phones near the unit.
19. If one of the following conditions occurs, please disconnect the mains plug and
call your dealer or technical support!
– Power cord or mains plug is damaged or worn.
– Liquid penetrated the unit.
– The unit was exposed to rain or high ambient humidity.
– The unit does not function properly, even when following all the instructions in the manual.
Only manipulate the controls as stated in the manual, wrong settings on the controls may
damage the unit.
– The unit fell and the housing was damaged.
Please note that this console is based on complex software and as you probably know from
your own computer experience, software crashes can occur on occasion. But be assured,
that we will do our best to keep them rare exceptions.
Electric shock warning on the rear of the grandMA
The unit should be serviced by qualified personnel only, as live parts may be exposed when
11. Do not ignore the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The
third prong is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit
into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
12. Do not place any objects on the power cord. Protect it from being
walked on or pinched particularly at plugs and the point where they
exit from the apparatus.
13. If using an extension cord, make sure the rated output of all units
connected in aggregate does not exceed the maximum rated output
of the extension cord. The rated output of the units plugged into the
socket should in aggregate not exceed 10 amperes.
Micro
opening and/or removing coverings; besides others, you run the risk of suffering an electric
shock.
169
Hotline: +49 5251 688865-99 . Operating Manual Micro Version 5.0
Index
Symbole
<<<: 87
11.10 PARTIAL SHOW
READ (loading parts
of a Show) 151
11.7 Loading a Show from
Floppy disk 150
11.8 Loading a Demo
Show 150
3D stage display 14
5.1.7 Assigning effects
91
5.1.8 Assigning BITMAP
EFFECTS 92
6.8. Modulators INDEX
108
7
BITMAP Effects
110
7.1 Creating a Layout for a
BITMAp Effect 110
7.3 Starting the Effect
115
A
ACTION 76, 81
Activating 10
Active 51
Active Values
54, 69, 70
Add Point 29
Additiv 38
After Roll 118
ALIGN 6, 101, 102
ALIGN Function 49, 57
ALL 11, 69, 70, 136
All for Selected Devices
69, 70
ALL FULL 90
ALL OFF 106
ALWAYS 103
ANGLE 107
ARC 107
ARROW 107
Artistic Licence 32
ARTNET 31
AS (Adaptive Speed) 103
Ascii 37
ASCII-Format 37
ASSIGN 11, 136
ASSIGN menu 11, 85
Assignments, deleting
126, 127
AT 137
Attribut 24
Attribute 21
ATTRIBUTE GROUPING 21
ATTRIBUTE SETUP 21
Attribute Setup 21
Attributes 22
AUTO 54
Auto Create 35
Auto Create Effects 37
AUTO FIX 88
AUTO LOOP 81
Auto PrePos 89
AUTO SCROLL 93, 94
AUTO SCROLL button 76
AUTO STOP 40
AUTO-SORT-Function 59
AUTO-SORT-Funktion im
FIXTURE-Fenster 53
AUTO-WRAP 60
AutoGen. 27
B
Background Illumination
38
BASE 102
BASE VALUE 102
BASIC FADE 11
BeamAngle 24
Belüftung. Siehe Lüftung
Bibliothek. Siehe Library
BLACKOUT 39
BLIND 76
BLOCK 95
Booting 9
BOUNCE 81, 104
BPM 39, 40, 81, 104
Break 24
Bühnengröße 14
Button, changing a 86
Button Page 96
Button Pages 44
BUTTONS OFF 98
C
Calculator 7
Calibrating Button 37
CHANNEL 43, 137
CHANNEL FADER 56
CHANNEL Mode 56
Channel Pages 44
Channel Start Id 13
CHANNEL VALUES 26
Channel Values 26
CHANNEL window, colors
used for the screen
display
164, 166, 168
CHASE 99
Chase Fade 39
CHASER 92
Chaser, calling a (Playback)
74
Chaser, editing a 80
Chaser, executing a 85
CHASER SPEED 39
CHASER, triggering a 40
CHASER-FADE 82
CHASES OFF 98
Chat 44
Circular Copy 67
CLEAR 10, 48, 56, 137
CLEAR LED 48, 56
CLEAR-Taste 56
CLOCK 44
Clone 36
COLOR CODE 165, 166
colors 26
colors used for the screen
display 164
Colums 60
Command Line Commands
80
Command Line Order 75
Command Overview 133
Command Reference 134
COMMANDLINE 44
Comment 24
CONFIRM 107
COPY 47, 78, 138
COS 99
Create 13
CREATE GROUPS 36
Create Preset Preference
36
CREATE PRESETS 36
CREATE SINGLE GROUPS 36
Crossfade 39
CUE 138
Cue 68
Cue, copying a 78
Cue, deleting a 65, 79
Cue Destinations 83
Cue, executing a 85
Cue, including a 72
Cue load 73
Cue, merging a 71
Cue, moving a 77
Cue Only 70, 78, 95
Cue Options 70
Cue, overwriting a 71
Cue, removing a 71
Cue, renumbering a 79
Cue, Update 63, 84
Cue, updating a 83
CURRENT PAGE OFF 98
Current Settings 87, 89
D
Date 24
Datum. Siehe Sortierung
nach Namen, Hersteller und Datum
Deactivate 52
DEF_GO 138
DEFAULT 20, 39, 48, 56
Default Sequence 73, 93
DEFAULTS Menu, Settings in
the 39
Defined 51
Defining DMX Addresses for
Fixtures 43
DELAY 11, 138
Delay 75
DELAY times in the
CHANNEL window 58
DELAY times in the FIXTURE
window 51
Delayed Output 32
DELETE 44, 139
Delete Point 29
Desk Lamp 38
Desk, Locking the 42
DESK STATUS 44
DIMMER CHANNELS,
accessing directly 55
Dimmer channels,
assigning colors 19
Dimmer, creating a 12
Dimmer, editing a 12
Dimmer Group, calling up a
46, 90
Dimmer Group, creating a
46, 90
Dimmer Option 60
Dimmer, patching a 12
Dir (direction) 101
Discrete Values 28
Disketten-Laufwerk. Siehe
Floppy
Display Panel, Adjusting the
Viewing of the 4
DMX 4, 21
DMX Addresses 53
DMX Channels, assigning
126
DMX hub 33
DMX IN, Remote Control by
126
DMX input 31
DMX Input, using the 126
DMX LINES 43
DMX List 20, 28
DMX Output Window 35
DMX Pan 18
DMX-Adressen für Scanner
festlegen 43
DMX-Hub 34
DMX-Kanäle, Funktionen
der einzelnen 20
DMX-XLR sockets 31
DMX_BTN 139
Dot-Zero 40
DOUBLE SPEED 81
Dropout Elimination 118
Drucker. Siehe PRINTButton
DUMMY Function 25
E
EDIT 139
EDIT EFFECT 100
EDIT FORMS 99, 106
EDIT menu 75
EDIT PROFILES 29
Editing Macros 129
EFFECT 43, 140
Effect, creating an –
automatically 35
Effect, deleting individual
an 103
Effect, editing an 100
Effect Group, assigning a
85
Effect Group, customizing
an 104
Effect Group, editing a 100
Effect Group, executing an
103
Effect Group, switched off
106
Effect groups in Cues 105
Effect Pool 99, 100
Effect run backwards 103
Effect Speed 39
EFFECTS 75, 81, 93
EFFECTS OFF 98
Effekt automatisch erstellen 27
Einstellungen, einzelkanalspezifische 20
Einstellungen im
DEFAULTS-Menü 131
Elimination, Dropout 118
Embedded Presets 63
Emergency Switch 37
Empty 86, 87
ENCODER 61
Encoder (Attribute)
Grouping 23
Encoder Grouping 23
Encoder labels 51
EQUALIZE DOTS 107
Equalizer 40
ESC 140
ESCAPE 10
Ethernet 31, 32
EVEN 36, 140
EVERYTHING OFF 98
EXCLUDED 94
EXEC 140
Exec Sync 163
EXECUTOR 11, 43, 80
EXECUTOR, Assignment to
85
EXECUTOR BUTTON 68, 87
EXECUTOR Button Page 96
EXECUTOR, copying an 92
EXECUTOR Defaults 39
EXECUTOR, deleting an
65, 92
EXECUTOR FADER
75, 87, 96
Executor Fader 126
EXECUTOR FADER Window
92
EXECUTOR, moving an 92
EXECUTOR pages 88
EXECUTOR SETTINGS 39
EXECUTOR Window 93
EXECUTOR, Zuordnung
auf. Siehe ASSIGNMenü (Zuordnung auf
EXECUTOR)
Export Effect 37
Export Effects 37
Extra 27
extra fine 38
F
F (Fade) 76, 81
F9 37
FADE
11, 20, 75, 80, 86, 141
Fade Time, individual 51
FADE times in the CHANNEL
window 58
FADE times in the FIXTURE
window 51
FADE(Basic) 69
FADE/SNAP 24
FADER 43, 141
Fader, changing a 86
Fader Page 96
Fader Pages 44
FADER window, colors used
for the screen display
164, 165, 168
FADERS OFF 98
Feature 22
Fenster löschen 44
Figuren, virtuelle. Siehe
Virtuelle Figuren
Figures, red 48, 56
Filter 100
FIX 94, 141
FIXTURE 43, 141
FIXTURE, accessing directly
48
FIXTURE, calling up a
46, 90
FIXTURE, creating a
12, 46, 90
FIXTURE, editing a 12
Fixture Layer 13, 16
FIXTURE, odd-numbered or
even-numbered 100
FIXTURE OPTION 53
FIXTURE, patching a 12
FIXTURE, selected 51
FIXTURE, selecting a 12
Fixture Start Id 13
FIXTURE TYPES 23
FIXTURE window 48
FIXTURE-Fenster, AUTOSORT-Funktion im 53
FIXTURE-Fenster, Optionen
im 53
FIXTURE-Fenster, SORTFunktion im 53
Fixtures, Defining DMX
Addresses 43
Fixtures Library Updating
25
FIXTURES TYPES 25
FIXTURES window, colors
used for the screen
displa
164, 166, 168
Flash 87
FLASH_DOWN 141
Flashdisc 3
Flightcase 4
Floppy 150
FOLLOW 76
FONT SIZE 54, 60, 93
FORM 142
FORWARD 81
FREEZE 63
From 101
FULL 142
Full Access 25
Full Tracking 162
Full World. 163
Function Pan 18
Function Sets 26
Functions 20
Functions, mathematical
107
G
GAIN 40
GO 142
Go 76, 86
Go fast backwards 136
Go fast forward 136
Gobos 26
GOTO 142
GPS 41
grandMA 3D 26
grandMA 3d 25
grandMA light 7
grandMA-3D 159
GRANDMASTER
11, 40, 53, 60, 68
GRANDMASTER FADER 18
Graphic parameters 26
GROUP 142
Group Button, creating a –
automatically 35
Group, calling up a 46
Group, deleting a 65
Group Master, assigning a
90
Group, moving a 47
Group Name, changing a
90
Group Overview 90
GROUPS 43
Grp (Group) 102
Gruppen aufrufen 46
H
HALF SPEED 81
Hard Disk 148
Hard key 133
Hardware 4
Hardware-Schutz. Siehe
Dongle
Hersteller. Siehe Sortierung
nach Namen, Hersteller und Datum
HIGHLIGHT 20
Highlight 24
HIGHLITE 18
History 77, 78, 132
HOLD-OFF 40
HOTLINE 9
Hz 28, 39
I
I DELAY 75, 80
I.FADE 75, 80
IF 143
IFOUTPUT 143
Illumination 38
Import Effect 37
Import Effects 37
Import einer Show 37
INCLUDED 94
Incremental 38
INFO - Fenster 84
INSERT 143
Installation 4
INTENS 76, 81
INTENSITY 103
Inv 24
INVERT 143
IP address 33
K
KEYBOARD GERMAN/
ENGLISH 40
Keyword 133
L
LABEL 143
Lasso Function 94
Lasso function 6
Latest Takes
Precedence. Siehe
LTP Prinzip
Layer 36
Layer Control 54
Layer Display 53
LAYER TO DISPLAY 53, 59
LEARN 87, 143
LI. DEL 75, 81
Library 12
LIN 99
line, command 132
LINK 75, 80
LINK DEFAULT 93
Link Fader-Function in the
CHANNEL window
59
LIST 96
Live Access 12, 21
LOAD 144
Location Auto 41
Locking the Desk 42
LOOP 75, 80
LOOP (COUNT) 79
LOOP (TIMED) 79
LOOPDELAY 75, 79, 80
LOOPS 79, 93
LOOPS abbrechen 89
LOOPS break 89
LTP Dimmer 88
LTP principle 88
Lumen 24
M
MACRO 144, 175
MACRO, activating a 128
Macro, creating a 128
MACRO, deleting a 65
Macro, editing a 129
MACRO, inserting a – in a
Cue 80
MACRO Pool 129
MACRO TIMED 129
MACROS 43, 92, 128
Manufacturer 24
MASTER 86
Master Priorities 161
Master priority 160
MASTER Sequence 73
MASTER START 88
MASTER STOP 88
Mathematical Functions
107
MAtricks 43, 66
MAtricks Interleave 66
MAtricks Mirror 67
MAtricks Next/Prev 66
MAtricks Wings 67
MIB 25. Siehe auch MOVE
IN BLACK
MIB Fade 24
MIDI Channel, selecting the
127
MIDI Control 128
MIDI IN 127
MIDI Input 128
MIDI Note 128
MIDI note 127
MIDI Programm 128
MIDI, Remote Control by 127
Midi Show Control 127
Midi Timecode 117
MIDI_BTN 144, 175
MIDIOUT 128
MIRROR 107
Mode 27
Monitor, external 38
mouse 29
Mouse Button, middle
55, 61
Mouse Function 38
MOVE 77, 144, 175
MOVE IN BLACK 75
MSC (Midi Show Control)
127
MTC. Siehe Midi Timecode
MTC (Midi Timecode) 117
Multi User 12, 162
Multipatch 17
N
NAME 75, 80
NAME Field 60
Namen. Siehe Sortierung
nach Namen, Hersteller und Datum
Network Configuration 159
Network connections 159
NEW START 79
New Timecode 116
NEXT 46, 144, 175
NMEA 41
No 23
NO MASTER 60
NO SWAP 53
No. 75, 80
NoMaster 21
NON TRACKING 11
O
ODD 36, 144, 175
OFF 11, 87, 144
OFF menu (RUNNING
PROGRAMMS) 98
Off On Overwritten 104
Off Overwritten 89
OFF Time 39
OFF-EXECUTOR 98
OFF-PAGE 98
ON 86
On Overwritten 89
One Shot 104
OOPS 145
Out 87
Outdelay 75
OUTFADE 75
OUTFADE TIME 69
Output Window, DMX 35
Overview, Command 133
P
PAGE 88, 96, 145
PAGE Administration 96
PAGE, copying a 97
PAGE, deleting a 65, 97
PAGE, moving a 97
PAGE Name 97
PAN NORMAL 53
PAN to TILT changing 18
PAN/TILT-TrackerballOrientierung 18
Pan/Tilt/Swap 21
Param (Parameter) 100
Part (Partly) 103
Patch Sheets 28
PAUSE 86, 103, 145
Phase 102
PHASE1/PHASE2/PHASE3
99
Pitch, assigning the 127
Playback 162
Playback Buttons, assigning
125, 127
Playback Timing 39
Playback, True-Tracking
159
Playback-Tasten zuordnen
125
PORTALL 31
Position X, Y, Z 15
POSITIVE ENABLE 90
Power 24
Pre Roll 118
PREDEFINES 106
PRESET, calling up a
61, 62
Preset Control 54
Preset Control Bar 48
Preset, creating a 61
Preset, creating a –
automatically 35
Preset, deleting a 65
Preset group 22
Preset Options 70
Preset-Gruppen 21
PRESETS 26
Presets automatically 35
Presets automatisch
erstellen 27
Presets, embedded 63
Presets kopieren 62
Presets Selective 61
Presets Universal 61
Presets, Update 63, 84
Presets verschieben 62
PREV 46
PREVIEW 74
PREVIOUS 145
PRIORITY OPTIONS 89
Profil löschen 29
Profil zuordnen 28
Profile 24, 28
Profiles deleting 28
Prop.– 38
pulldown menu 6
PULSE WIDTH 100
PUSH 38
PWM 99
Q
Quick Reference 9
QUIKEY 43, 128, 130
QUIKEY, activating a
130, 156
QUIKEY, assigning a
130, 156
R
RANDOM 99
RANDOMLY 81
Range (Name) 27
Rate 86, 102
RATE FACTOR 93
READOUT 54
Reference, Command 134
Remote Control 116
Remote Control by DMX IN
126
Remote Control by MIDI
127
Remote Control vial
Touchboard 125
renumbering Cues 79
Replay Unit. Siehe
grandMA Replay Unit
REVERS 81
Roll, after 118
Roll, pre 118
ROTATION 107
Rotation X°, Y°, Z° 15
RPM 28
RUN 81
RUNNING EFFECTS 106
S
Safety Instructions 169
SAVE Show 148
SAVE Show As 148
Scanner, DMX-Adressen
festlegen 43
Schleifen. Siehe LOOPs
SEC 39
SELECT 145
Selecting 10
Selection 100
Selective Copying 67
Separate Memories 69
SEQU 146
SEQUENCE 43, 92
Sequence, assigning a 85
Sequence, calling a
(Playback) 74
Sequence, copying a 72
Sequence, deleting a 65
Sequence, editing a 75
Sequence, executing a 85
Sequence Names, changing
85
Sequence, programming a
71
Sequence, triggering a 40
SEQUENCES 68
SEQUENCES OFF 98
Service Work 169
Session 160
SET 47
Settings, current 87, 89
Settings in the Setup Menu
37
SETUP 12
Setup Menu, Settings in the
37
Sheet 39
Shortcut 133
Show, deleting from
harddisk 149
Show Import 37
Show laden, leere 149
Show, loading from harddisk
149
Show, saving on floppy disk
149
Show, saving the current on
harddisk 148
Show speichern, auf
Festplatte 13
SIN 99
Single 51
SINGLE DIGIT VALUE ENTRY
39
Size 101
Size of EXECUTOR buttons
87
SMPTE 116
SNAP 75, 80
SNAP DELAY 11, 69
SOFT 76, 81
SOFT Keyboard 8
SOFTNESS 103
Software Crash 169
Software Update 153, 155
Software-Version 44
SOUND 40, 81
Sound Signal 76
Sound Signal, Setting of a
40
Special Masters, assigning
91
SPEED
76, 81, 86, 103, 104
Speed Group 91, 104
SPEED INDV. 81
SPEED SCALE 104
STAGE 20
Stage 24, 26, 44
Stage Setup 14
stage size 14
Standarddrucker. Siehe
PRINT-Button
START LINE 79
Start New Session 161
Start Speed 104
Statuscopy 78
STORE 146
STORE encoder window 71
STORE ENCODER WINDOW:
71
STORE LED 45
Store Options 70
Store Source: 70
SUB NET addresses 32
SubNet 33
Summer Time 41
SWAP 86
SWOP 87, 146
SWOP_OFF 146
Sync Start 104
T
Table 100
TEMP 87, 146
Temp 86
TEST OUT 14
Throw Out Station 162
THRU 146
TILT NORMAL 53
TILT OFFSET 25
TIME 11, 51, 58, 73
Time, automatically
according to set 76
TIME SCALING 77
Time Scaling Sequence 77
Time, summer 41
TIMECODE 43, 116, 146
Timecode, Midi 117
Timecode, new 116
TIMECODE Show 92
TOGGLE 87, 147
Toggle Curve 29
TOP 87, 147
TOUCH_BTN 147
Touchboard, Remote
Control vial 125
Touchscreen 4, 37, 75
TRACKBALL 48, 61
TRACKBALL, Sensitivity of
the 38
TRACKING 11, 43, 73
TRACKING mode 88
TRACKING Window 94
TRACKINGSHEET OPTIONS
94
TRIANGLE 99
TRIGGER 69, 76, 80
TRIGGER, changing the 76
True-Tracking Playback
159
Type 24
U
ultra-light. Siehe grandMA
ultra-light
Unblock 95
Universe. Siehe DMX-Port
(Universe) A bis H
Unmoveable 23
UNPRESS 147
UPDATE 82, 105, 147
UPDATE Cue 63
UPDATE Presets 63
UPDATE Software
153, 155
Updating the Fixtures
Library 25
USER DEFINED 99, 101
USER Library 36
User Management 42
V
VALUE 147
VALUES 6
Variable functions 28
Ventilation 4
VIEW 147
View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS
menu 106
VIEW, assigning a 45
VIEW button 45
VIEW, deleting a 65
View Macro Button 3
View Pool 45
VIEW, saving a 45
VIEWBTN 147
VIEWS 43
Violett bar 103
Virtual Form, creating a
106
Virtual Form, modifying a
107
Virtual Form, self-created
two-dimensional 101
Virtual Form, two-dimensional 106
Visualize 27
VISUALIZE FORMS 101
W
Weight 24
Weights and Dimensions 4
Wheel 38, 61
Window, creating a 43
Window, deleting a w 44
Window, enlarge a 44
Wing 102
World pool 163
Worlds 43, 163
WRAP 60
Wrap 60
X
x-axis 29
XF A/B 86
XFADE 86
Y
Yellow dot 53
Z
Zuordnung auf
EXECUTOR. Siehe
ASSIGN-Menü
(Zuordnung auf
EXECUTOR)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement